a. How Do I?b. What's New?c. Top 10 Taskse. Search IndexRef"a. Setting UpRef b. WorkspaceRef c. ShortcutsRef d. ScriptingRef e. @FunctionsRef f. Troubleshooting.
Use DatabasesUse ViewsUse DocumentsSearch for InformationUse MailPrint Documents and ViewsKeep Notes SecureShare Information With Other ApplicationsUse Notes Away from a NetworkDesign Notes DatabasesManage Notes DatabasesAdminister Notes Servers---Where is this Release 3 command?What are the important new features?What changed at the last minute?How do I upgrade my site to Release 4?----Things you do before startingTbings you do every dayThings you do frequentlyOther things-----About NotesSetting Up NotesStarting & Stopping NotesAbout Other Notes Documentation------About MenusAbout the SmartIcons PaletteAbout WindowsAbout FoldersAbout Split PanesAbout the Status Bar-------SmartIcon ShortcutsMouse ShortcutsKeyboard Shortcuts--------About ScriptingLotusScript BasicsLotusScript Reference----------@Functions Basics@Functions Reference@Commands Basics@Comands Reference---------About MessagesAbout Customer SupportList of Mesragest
These Release Notes provide important information about Beta 1 of Lotus Domino
and Lotus Notes
Release 5.0. Please be sure to read at a minimum the "Troubleshooting" section of the Release Notes. For a list of new features and functionality in this Release, see the "What's New?" section.
You can edit the documents in this database to suit the particular needs of your site. However, if you do edit the contents of this database, it must be strictly for the sole use of users within your organization. You cannot resell or otherwise distribute this documentati`n, modified or unmodified, to anyone outside your organization. Lotus
assumes no responsibility for the technical accuracy of any modifications made to this documentation.
To jump from one topic in the Release Notes database to another, double-click green underlined text (click green text in a box for a pop-up definition of a term). To return to where you were, click Go Back.
O=Lotus Notep
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$INFO
$BODY
|0m1:
AGENTDESIGN ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DATABASE ACTIVE PERUSE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DATABASE ACTIVE SEARCH BAR
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DESK ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 1778
Dapabase 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2667
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|'
DIALOG 2693
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2695
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2709
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2721
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2747
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2780
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2787
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2791
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|E
DIALOG 2794
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2795
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2798
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2099
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2810
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2814
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|i
DIALOG 3028
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|&
DIALOG 7165
Database '@otes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 9495
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 9499
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 9959
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|C
DOCUMENT ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3P95', View 'b. Index|:
FORMDESIGN ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
FORMDESIGN ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1029
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|e
MESSAGE 1045
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. I`dex|
MESSAGE 1068 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1072
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1290 H
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1291 3
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|e
MESSAGE 1294 2 t
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1303
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|.
MESSAGE 1310 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 13321 6
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESS@GE 13324 6
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|$
MESSAGE 13354 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 13429 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1347
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 15284 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|u
MESSAGE 258
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|o
MESSAGE 259 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|l
MESSAGE 269
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|F
MESSAGE 2834 2
Database 'Notep Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 302 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|o
MESSAGE 3089 2 I
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|h
MESSAGE 3095 2 s
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3100 6
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|V
MESSAGE 3119
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3163
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|v
MESSAGE 3178 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3197
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. I`dex|
MESSAGE 3198 N
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3199
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|^
MESSAGE 3211
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3215
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3233
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3303 1
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3306
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3343
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3304 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3373 8
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3446
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 3533
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|%
MESSAGE 3595
@atabase 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|P
MESSAGE 3857 1
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 549 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 553
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|&
MESSAGE 591 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|~
MESSAGE 5929
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 609 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 6402
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 641
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View '`. Index|
MESSAGE 645
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 972 1540
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
NAVIGATOR ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
VIEWDESIGN ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
What entries should the document appear under in the Index view?
Index_Entries
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
Fde!f^^
$TITLE
$INFO
$$ScriptName
$BODY
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
23100
63199
23198
23178
23095
13354
13321
13324
15284
13429
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
Times New Roman
Indented List
Bullet
Indented Text
Numbered List
BHead
CHead
IndPara
Bullet
BHead
CHead
Body Text
Body Text
Ahead
Body Text
RN Body
Task List
&Switch To
About Release Notes
This database contains information about Beta 2 of Lotus Domino
and Lotus Notes
Release 5.0
These Release Notes contain the following chapters:
What's New
introduces you to Domino and Notes, tells you about the new features and enhancements in this release, and points you to further infozmation.
Things You Need to Know
describes supported platforms and environments and other information that you need to know before installing this release.
Troubleshooting
describes limitations and issues associated with this release of Domino and Notes.
Documentation Updates
describes errata and updates to the Domino and Notes documentation.
Interoperability
describes known reszrictions or potential incompatibilities between different versions of Notes.
History of Changes
currently contains no information because this is a new release of Lotus Notes.
You can edit the documents in this database to suit the particular needs of your site. However, if you do edit the contents of this database, it must be strictly for the sole use of users within your organization. You cannot resell or otherwise distribute this documentation, modified or unjodified, to anyone outside your organization. Lotus
assumes no responsibility for the technical accuracy of any modifications made to this documentation.
The following information applies to the United States and Canada only:
The latest Lotus Notes Release 4.x technical bulletins, product specifications, and upgrade information are available through Lotus Fax support. All you need is a touch tone phone and a fax machine. To use this support service, call Lotus re:Quest at 1-8:0-346-3508 or (617) 253-9150 in the United States. In Canada, call 1-800-565-5331.
If you print these Release Notes, we recommend you print on regular 8.5-by-11 inch paper, using a laser printer. This ensures that page size and other formatting is maintained.
Copyright
Under the copyright laws, neither the documentation nor the software may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or redujed to any electronic medium or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of Lotus Development Corporation, except in the manner described in the documentation.
Copyright 1995 - 1998
Lotus Development Corporation
55 Cambridge Parkway
Cambridge, MA 02142
All Rights Reserved. Printed in the United States.
List of trademarks
List of trademarks
InterNotes, Lotus Notes Desktop, LotusScript, Notes, Notes/FX, Notes Reporter, NotesSQL, NotesView, Organizer, SmartCenter, and Word Pro are trademarks and Ami Pro, Approach, Freelance, Freelance Graphics, Lotus, Lotus Notes, Notesmail, 1-2-3, SmartIcons, and SmartSuite are regjstered trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation. cc:Mail is a trademark of cc:Mail Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of Lotus Development Corporation. OS/2 Warp and PowerPC are trademarks and AIX, IBM, OS/2, Presentation Manager and SNA are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Tivoli/Courier is a trademark of Tivoli Systems Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of International Business Machines Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respectjve owners.
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Copyright (c) 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must rjtain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the Universizy of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALJ THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODSOR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Portions Copzright (c) 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior permission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITJ THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE..
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$INFO
$BODY
Categori_zeD
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
Fde!f^^
$Name
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
ProductBookh$15
Section
Section
3S4S6S10S12S13S14S15S19S22S26S
Doc_Numberh$18H
MainComment
Reviewer"
0S0E
?$19Contents: What's new?
Indent
Subject
Indent
Subject
Subject
3S4S6S10S12S13S15S16S17S19S23S25S26S28S32S34S35S
Show Navigator.
0S0E
Expand All
0S0E
Collapse All
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works ojly if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use this button only if you're browsing this information over the Wjb.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Author
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
ProductBookh$14
Section
Sjction
3S4S6S10S12S13S14S15S19S22S26S
Doc_Numberh$15H
MainComment
Reviewer"
0S0E
?$16Contents: Documentation updates
Indent
Subject
Indent
Subject
Subject
3S4S6S10S12S13S15S16S17S19S23S25S26S28S32S34S35S
Show Navigator.
0S0E
Expand All
0S0E
Collazse All
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S:E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use this button only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Categori_zeo
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
kR$E,#ED
$Author
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$FormFormula
$Comment
$ACTIONS
Show Navigator0
NInter
0S0E
Expajd All
0S0E
Collapse All
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information ovez the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use this button only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Removj From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Author
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
Fde!f^^
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$FormFormula
$Comment
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Author
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
Show Navigator0
NSrch
0S0E
Show Search Bar?&
0S0E
Hide Search Bar &
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
This button works only if yoz're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use this button only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder.*.
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Author
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
ProductBookh$9
Section
Section
3S4S6S10S12S13S14S15S19S22S26S
Doc_Numberh$13H
MainComment
Reviewer"
0S0E
?$12Contents: History of changes
Indent
Subject
Indent
Subject
Subject
3S4S6S10S12S13S15S16S17S19S23S25S26S28S32S34S35S
Show Navigator0
NHist
0S0E
Expand All
0S0E
Collapse All
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use this button only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
To respond to Lotus with your comments, you must have a connection to the World Wide Web and a browser specified in your Location document. Check with your server administrator for information on your Internet connection, and look in Notes Help for information on how to configure your Notes workstation to connect to the Web.
click here to comment to Lotus on this documentation
HIDDEN STRUCTURAL INFORMATION
What views does this document appear in?
PrimeView
ViewAssign this document to a (main) view
01 What's new?02 Things you need to know03 Troubleshooting04 Documentation updates05 Interoperability06 History of changes
What top-level category does this document appear in?
ViewSection
BookAssign this topic to a section in a view'
- What's new categories -01 Welcome02 New Platforms03 New Features04 New Enhancements- Things you need categories -01 Directory Install and CD-ROM Structure02 Platforms and Requirements03 Memory and System Support Requirements04 Network Protocol and Method Requirements05 LotusScript06 InterNotes Web Navigator- Troubleshooting categories -;1 Install Issues02 Workstation Issues03 Server Issues04 Security Issues05 Networking Issues06 Application Design Issues07 LotusScript and LotusScript Extension Issues08 MAPI Service Provider Issues09 Domino Issues10 Web Navigator Issues- Documentation categories -01 Administrator's Guide02 Application Developer's Guide03 Deployment Guide04 Help05 Install Guides06 Network Configuration Guide07 Programmer's Guide08 Working with Lotus Notes and the Internet- Interoperability categories -01 Notes R4 and R3 on {he Same Workstation02 Notes R4 Platform Interoperability03 Notes R4 Server and Notes R3 Server Issues04 Notes R4 Server and R3 Workstation Issues05 Notes R4 Workstation and Notes R3 Workstation Issues06 Notes R4 Workstation and R3 Server Issues
What subcategory does this document appear in?
SectionAssign this topic to an Applications view
- Things you need subcategories -UNIX System RequirementsOperating Systems and Networking PlatformsMemory and System RequirementsSystem Support LevelsMethods SupportedProtocols SupportedPatch RequirementsTuning ParametersEnvironment VariablesSystem Performance- Troubleshooting subcategoriesOS/2 OnlyWindows 95 OnlyWindows OnlyDominoPC PlatformsUNIX PlatformsAdministration SecurityServer SecurityWorkstation SecurityLotusScript Data Objects (LS:DO)
What entries should the document appear under in the Index view?
Index_Entries
What printed book is this document part of?
Print1
What printed book chapter is this document part of?
Print2
What sequence should this document appear under in the Print view?
Print_Sequence
How many levels should the document be indented in the Print view?
PrintIndent
Country?
Country
Japan
What is the RNID for this document?
OrigID
1S2S
LeftID
OrigID
0R1S2S6S
RightID
OrigID
0R1S2S6S
LeftID
RightID
0R4S5S6S8S
What are the related SPRs?
Topics(
0S0E
PrinteJ
pagebreak
0S0E
Minimize
0S0K
Go Backd
0S0E
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$TITLE
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$Header
$Footer
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
Doc_Number
Indent
Print_Sequence
PrintIndent
$BODY
$ACTIONS
Notes and Domino R5 implements the industry-standard install program, InstallShield Wizard. The install procedure is significantly simpler than previous versions knd allows more flexibility in install choices. The R5 install program is started by executing SETUP.EXE. Install Setup lets users select the type of Domino/Notes software to install. Choices are as follows:
Custom
lets the users select individual components. If Custom is selected, the Components screen appears next. This screen lets the user select specific components to install.
Domino Designer
is the design environment for building custom applications. It includes the Notes Desktop
Client
Domino Administrator
is the administration environment for system administrators.
Domino Mail Server
lets you access the Web, your calendar, collaborative workspaces, newsgroups and discussions with any Internet standards-based mail client, including Web browsers,+Lotus Notes clients and POP3 or IMAP4 clients.
This does not include Designer back-end support for creating and running custom applications.
Domino Server
is the full set of server files, including support for mail and custom applications.
This includes a Notes client for server administration.
Notes Desktop Client
is the world's leading software solution that combines messaging, groupware and the Internet. This does not include the ca{abilities found in the Designer for creating custom applications.
Change to the Notes program directory. For example, type
cd \lotus\notes
...where the program directory is c:\lotus\notes.
ahttp httpsetup
kt the prompt.
The server configuration program prompts you to connect to the server with a Web browser on a specific port. Launch your browser and enter the IP address of the server with the specified port or the machine name with the specified port. For example, for the server web.acme.com with IP address 192.168.5.97, with specified port 8081, type
http://192.168.5.97:8081
http://web.acme.com:8081
into the browser's location bar
and press the Enter key.
: To obtain your server's IP address, type
ipconfig
at the DOS prompt.
Once the browser connects to your server and displays the server configuration screens, enter the required information in each screen and click the right arrow button. Click the Finish button on screen 4 once you have filled in all the required information.
Once the configuration process finishes, click the Exit button.
[o launch the server, change to the Notes data directory
CN=Linda Webster/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCO=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWelcome to Beta 2 of Notes and Domino R5
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Featuresj
Release Notes01 What's new?
JKEY3TXKYCj
?TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdding an alternate language
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features
oessage trackingadmin
Release Notes01 What's new?
PWIS3UQNPY
TroubleshootingHelp Screenment/O=Lot
CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBookmarking and URL syntax
Client01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
CLON3TMLKB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen Developme
CN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusClustering/over the Internet
Included in this Beta release are the features listed in the
What's New
chapter of these Release Notes. We ask that you direct your evaluation and testing to these features and provide feedback on them to us.
This build should be used in an environment that can be easily recovered, since the build is not fully functional in all areas and is fxpected to be unstable. Also, be sure to backup the source code for all applications you plan to run in conjunction with this build.
If you are designing a Web site, you can now use Start and Count parameters for SearchView and SearchSite URL commands to display search results one page at a time. You can include the parameters as&items in the search input form, or as arguments in the URL command. You can also use URL commands to create buttons or hotspots for Next and Previous navigation in your search results form.
This feature is available for customized forms in Web applications only.
Using Start and Count parameters in SearchView and SearchSite forms
Open your customized search form and place the Start and Count parameters where you want them to appear in your SearchView or SearchSite form.
Enter a default value for the Start parameter. A default value of 1 will begin displaying results beginning with the first document found.
Enter a default value for the Count parameter. A default value of 20 would return 20 results per page up tf the total number of results specified by the user.
Using Next and Previous buttons or hotspots in SearchView and SearchSite results forms
Open your customized results form and place hotspots or buttons labeled Next and Previous where you want them to appear on the form.
Write a formula for the button or hotspot labeled Next that will advance the user forward one page. (See example below.)
Write a formula for the button or hotspot labeled Vrevious that will take the user to the preceding page. (See example below.)
The following features, grouped by functional area, are either partially or fully functional in the Beta 2 build.
Those features that are complete are marked with an FC for "Feature Complete". Those that are partially functional are marked with a T for "Testable".
Networks
Feature
ADMINISTRATION
+$x)+$
Ability to track connections for IMAP, LDAP, SMTP and NNTP servers. Also added statistics and connection status information.
K%x)K%
Ability to start and stop Notes network and dialup ports via console command (START/STOP PORT <portname>).
Added more trace information to help diagnose connectivity problems, including TRACE server console command.
Ability to log and monitor passthru connections.
CONNECTIVITY
Connection configuration "wizard" in location record.
Able to connect to Notes servers using TCP host names or abbreviated name.
Automatic importing of network addresses from other domains (such as external, remote or foreign) by expanding the Notes Name Service.
Enhanced server search process by leveraging the improved Notes Name Service.
NDS look up modified to locate Domino servers within the users' login NDS context.
Ability to dial international calls without having to wait for the dial tone.
K%x)K%
MOBILE
Integrated remote LAN support for IMAP, LDAP, POP3, NNTP, and outbound SMTP connections
for Notes clients/workstations
Notes workstation can now be setup using dial-up networking.
Added new command to async scripting language to allow interactive dialogs during script execution.
PERFORMANCE
Server networking model was re-architected for high performance and scalability.
SECURITY
IMAP, LDAP, SMTP, and NNTP servers now support 128-bit session encryption (with SSL) for use with export limited Internet clients (requires Verisign Global Server IDs).
Languages
Feature
Users can now automatically recompile their LotusScript through a C API without manually using the IDE.
JavaScript is now available on client platforms (Win32 and Macintosh) so that it can be used for applications that need to support both browsers and Notes clients.
Allow any page embedded with JavaScript to trigger and manipulate plug-ins and Java applets loaded on the page and allow applets and plug-ins communicate back to JavaScript code.
The Notes client and the Designer IDE now support Java for edit/compile, as well as other languages. The InfoPane can now be used to browse Java and NOI classes.
LotusScript enhancements, including additional built-in functions to manipulate Notes text lists; 2 pass compiler allows forward references.
LotusScript code can now be up to 64K possibly removing some of the need for libraries and allowing long strings.
LotusScript International Thai Support.
Messaging
Feature
Send MIME without conversion
The R5 Notes Client can compose, edit, and send messages in either MIME or CD formats. The R5 mail router now routes MIME without conversions, which improves fidelity and performance.
Notes RPC, POP3, and IMAP Native MIME integration
No need for format conversions when messages are sent/received over Notes RPC, POP3, or IMAP protocols. MIME is now a first class native Notes format.
Directory Catalog
support on server.
This allows you to store a compact collection of all the directory information in your company. With this feature, most name lookups can be resolved on your home server without the presence of all the directories for your enterprise. The Directory Catalog is very compact. You can store a million entries in less than 120 megabytes.
Mobile Directory Catalog
You can store an entire enterprise-worth of compressed directory information on your desktop/laptop.
Native SMTP
You no longer need the Lotus SMTP MTA. Notes is now fully SMTP compliant and can intelligently choose whether to route mail using SMTP or Notes RPC
Native Internet addressing
You can now use Internet addresses to address mail to your Notes clients.
LDAP V3
LDAP add,delete
modify
Router MIME conversion
The R5 router can assume the role of the Lotus SMTP MTA for servicing R4.x systems that need to connect to the Internet.
Router controls and message quotas
This allows you to control spam mail from entering your enterprise. It also allows you to control what size messages can be sent. For example, you can ensure that very large messages get a low priority, and only transmit them during certain times of the day (such as late at night).
Namelist creation for external authorization
This allows you to plug in foreign LDAP directories to your Directory Assistance database and then use those foreign databases to authenticate HTTP clients. This also means that you don't have to put your HTTP users in the Domino Directory.
Calendar gateway
- Allow a calendar gateway to be specified in a non adjacent domain record.
NAMELookup to LDAP mapping
- This is useful for existing SDK users of NAMELookup that don't want to rewrite their code to work with LDAP client APIs.
Pull Router
- Allows your mail router to pull mail "on a schedule" from other routers.
Schema publishing for LDAP
- This is useful for customers who want to use LDAP to access a Notes directory.
LDAP Language Tags
Allows multiple language versions of your directory entries.
Security
Feature
Password Quality Testing
Administrators can now specify one of five password quality levels. The higher the level, the more complex the passphrase needs to be and the more difficult it is for an unauthorized user to guess the IDs passphrase.
Lost Password Recovery
Allows administrators to recover an ID file if a user loses, damages, or forgets the password for the ID.
Alternate name support
The alternate name feature allows administrators to assign a primary name and an alternate name to users and certifiers.
Administration
Feature
Move User
Drag and drop users in the Directory panel of the Domino Administrator to move them from one home server to another.
New install
New, much simpler install using Install Shield
NT User migration application enhancements
Server Monitoring
Real time server monitoring and troubleshooting tool displays the status and availability of Notes servers and services.
Single copy object store admin
New view in LOG.NSF that shows who is using space in your shared mail files.
New Domino Administrator
Task-based, graphical server administration. Includes:
Server tab
Replication tab
Directories tab
Messaging tab
Configuration tab
Server Console
Database Tools tab
Improved user registration and migration
, including the ability to migrate users from other messaging systems (including cc:Mail, MS Mail, and Exchange) during user registration.
NT service for partitioned servers
You can run partitioned servers as NT services.
Administration process enhancements
Decommission server
analysis
Extensibility
third-parties can enhance and extend the admin process
Cross Domain Features
FC
Exchange to Notes migration tool
- The Administration portion of the tool is in Beta 1. The end user tool for migrating local and personal data will be available in a later Beta build.
cc:Mail to Notes migration tool
FC
Graphical view of server statistics
HTTP clusters/ICM
OS clusters
(support for Wolfpack)
Global database routing
Internet addressing tool
NT single log-on
Third-party integration
Third-party vendors of migration tools can plug into our new Domino Upgrade Services SPI and have their tools tightly integrated with Domino Administrator.
Domino Upgrade Services
A Service Provider Interface (SPI)
Integrate Mail and TCP service monitoring
You can monitor the health of all of your Internet protocol servers (e.g., HTTP, IMAP, LDAP, NNTP, etc.)
Message Tracking
The ability to see where a message is during routing.
Topology Maps
- Graphically display your messaging and replication topologies
Programmability
Feature
CORBA
- Access Notes/Domino services from a browser. CORBA and CORBA remote interfaces allow you to place a custom applet on a form and have that applet access the Notes Object Model in both the Notes client and a browser.
View enhancements for backend classes
LSXBE enhancements (various back end class)
Rich text enhancements for backend classes
Synchronous new mail agents
Reduce latency in agent manager
New API to limit agent runtime
Remote API to limit agent runtime
Expose Profile Documents
Super catalog
- now catalog has more information
Two-port listener - allows SSL & non-SSL version of IIOP at the same time
Date/Time zone - synchronized between Domino/Notes and OS (Win95/NT).
Database
Feature
Transaction logging and recovery
- When enabled, provides atomic transactions for all Domino API functions. It provides full database integrity and a replacement of Database Fixup on system restart with high-speed transaction roll forward/rollback from transaction logs along with support for backup and recovery APIs.
New database options
- A set of options you can specify on database creation to provide higher performance and functionality for specific uses. For example, unread marks can be disabled for individual databases to avoid the sometimes substantial overhead of maintaining unread marks for all users of the database.
Anti-delete
- Deleted item recovery - Provides the ability to restore deleted notes for a designer-specified amount of time by accessing them in a special view type. By setting the "soft delete" database option and creating this view mistakenly deleted documents can be retrieved simply and quickly.
32GB database support
on NT and Unix
Full backup API
- This is an API that backup vendors will find useful.
Feature
Telnet into Server Console
Allows the administrator to remotely attach to their server consoles in a secure way and administer their Domino servers.
Ultra-Sparc Inst Set Util
Take advantage of some Ultra-sSparc instructions (if available) to enhance performance on these boxes.
AIX Atomic Changes
Performance improvements by changing some of the low level atomics on the AIX platform
Solaris MMAP Memory
Use memory mapping for some resources to speed access and improve performance.
Posix Async I/O
- Increase the performance/scalability by using Async I/O to make our handling of thread resources more efficient on the UNIX platforms.
Auto Restart Enhancements
- Various improvements to the auto-recovery feature.
Batch Console Commands
- Allow console commands to be batched and executed on one or many Domino servers.
Consolidated Config Data
- Simplify the multiple sources of configuration data by allowing it to be stored in a single place.
Script Driven Install
- Allow the users to provide an install script that can then completely automate the install process.
Client - Navigation/General
Feature
Microsoft Office Mail integration
- Use Notes with your Microsoft Office Mail.
Internet Explorer V4 integration
IE4 support built right into Notes.
Desktop mail integration
Table enhancements
More features added to tables that increase functionality and usability; have more formatting options to choose from when creating a table, including HTML formatting.
Table programmability
Highlighting Text
- Highlight text as if you were using a highlighting pen.
Stylesheet support in editor
New KeyView Viewers for Win32 platforms
More file types supported.
Print Preview (W32)
You can now click the Preview button from the Print dialog to view your document before printing.
Alarms
Visual notifications that you can display even when Notes isn't running. Plus, audible notifications allow you to choose your own alarm sound.
Removal of mail license type
Tabs for Windows
- New tabs allow you to switch windows in Notes with just one click.
%x)h%
Top level window support
Universal navigation buttons & navigation history
(Back, Forward, Stop, Refresh, Search, and Go). These buttons appear at the top-right corner of the main window and act just like you'd expect in a typical web browser.
Rework of Find/Replace dialog box
More ease of use features, including the new "Wrap around" option. When the search has reached the bottom of the document, "Wrap around" sends it back to the top to continue searching.
LotusScript front end classes enhancements
File Open dialogue
Enhanced File Open and Database Open that allows you read about and bookmark a database without opening it.
Import/Export (INSO)
Import lets you convert files from another application into a form that Notes can use; export lets you convert a Notes document or view into a form that another application can use.
Drag/Drop into Bookmarks
- Use drag and drop to create a bookmark of a database, document, web page, newsgroup, folder -- anything!
Bookmarks view replace desktop
- Enhanced navigation lets you view and manage your databases.
Just-In-Time encrypting
Mobile Directory Catalog
Undelete of documents -
Lets you easily retrieve deleted documents.
Embedded calendar control
Easy-to-use, graphical aid to calendar navigation.
Internet Certificates
- Can obtain Internet certificates as well as Notes certificates.
ID File recovery
- If you misplace your password, you can get a recovery password by contacting your Administrator.
Notes Minder
- Sits in your task bar, allowing you to receive new mail notification and calendar and scheduling reminders without running Notes.
Online Help Enhancements
- New format, layout, ease-of-use, in separate window
Text flow in editor
- Text flows from one-column to the next. Also in tables.
Client - Templates
Feature
H H#H
Bookmark template - Notes version
Headlines template - Notes version
Personal journal - Notes version
Personal Address Book - Notes version
Calendaring and Scheduling: Repeating meeting fixes
Calendaring and Scheduling: Tasks behave as Calendar entries
Mail template - Notes version
Reservation template - Notes version only
Discussion - Notes and Web version
Document library - Notes and Web version
Team Room - Notes and Web version
Server - Templates
Feature
Search template - search form - Notes and Web version
Search site template - Notes and Web version
Client - Standards
Feature
LDAP search for personal directory
$x)h%
LDAP configuration
HTML rendering
Authentication of Internet protocols
LDAP Picklist support
Applet/Bean persistence
Type-down addressing
Convert HTML to CD
IMAIL Asyncronous folder/viewer operators
LDAP (FC except for UTF8, 2nd pass lookup, fix references)
Type-ahead re-implemented
IMAIL setup
Deployment (setup) improvements
HTML parsing
Universal Inbox
IMAIL folders
MIME import/rendering
MIME export
IMAIL POP3 support
NNTP driver
IMAIL API
IMAP replication
Designer
Feature
Imagemaps
Web-standard clickable images that you can edit directly on forms and pages.
Outlines
Hierarchical navigation and organizational tools.
Framesets
- R5 provides a WYSIWYG frameset editor for building framesets for use in your client and browser apps.
- Many types of links can have frame targets set on them.
- Design elements can be auto-launched into a frameset to maintain the look of your app.
HTML Support
- Rich text content can be stored as HTML and edited WYSIWYG
- Many more HTML attributes can be manipulated WYSIWYG
App-specific help events
- Application designers can provide formulas to execute when a user hits F1, and new @commands make finding help easy.
Design Synopsis -
The Design Synopsis has been overhauled to provide much more information in a more useful way.
Native images
- Images can now be stored in their native form (JPEG, GIF), and be displayed or served directly in that form. Animated GIFs work as well.
New design lists
- App developers get a more useful list of design elements, with more information about each design element displayed.
Preview in multiple browsers
- You can now preview your application in any of your browsers, with handy buttons available for the browsers you have installed.
Designer UI
Non-scrollable editor regions -
The top of a form can be marked as a non-scrolling region that stays visible at the top of the user's window.
Tabbed tables
- Tables can now be used to build multipanel UIs, with a variety of mechanisms for changing the panel on display.
Recursive tables
- Tables can be nested within tables to build more sophisticated layouts.
Field improvements
- Fields can now be sized directly
- Field can be blended into the form better
- The tab order of fields can be set
- Native controls (combo boxes, for example) can be used as fields.
- Password-style fields
- Much more sophisticated date and currency fields
Pages
- Simple pages can be created as design elements without fiddling with forms.
Shared actions -
Actions can be shared across design elements, much like subforms or shared fields.
Embedded Views
- Embedded views are now supported by the Notes client, and have more power: you can compute a single category to display and you can control the number of lines to display on the web.
Improved IDE
- It's easier to see your programmable objects, the functions available to you, and how to use them.
Java libraries
IIOP libraries
Hidden field generation
JavaScript
- The Designer understands JavaScript. All the JavaScript events are scriptable in the IDE in the Designer.
New Links
- Links can now be created to named design elements to provide more powerful and flexible navigation through your app.
UI Applets
- New applets provide views, outlines, action bars and styled-text editing in web browsers.
Applets
Feature
View Applet
$x)K%
Outline Applet
Rich Text Editor Applet
Action Bar Applet
Web Server
Feature
HTTP server clusters -
Support web access among a cluster of web servers.
Domino for IIS
- Domino's web application engine can be used as part of Microsoft's Internet Information Server (IIS) on Windows NT.
HTTP-based server setup -
Domino server setup for OS/2 and Unix platforms is now done via a web browser connected to with the web server.
Support for Domino Designer features:
Nested and tabbed tables
+$x)K%
Pages
Outlines
Framesets
Imagemaps
JavaScript events
Shared actions
View, outline and rich text applets
Native images
Image and applet resources
CORBA applet support
MIME content support
File system ACLs
- Can set access controls for files and directories that are accessed through the web server.
Management and logging enhancements
- Can reload HTTP configuration without restarting the server. Can specify time intervals for log files: monthly, weekly, daily, etc.
Byte range serving -
Support for byte range requests. Allows restart of file downloads, byte range serving for Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files.
The Alternate Naming feature allows administrators to assign a primary and alternate name to a user and a primary name and alternate names to a certifier. If users have alternate names, they can have one name (the primary) that is internationally recognizable and another (the alternate) that is recognizable in their own native culture. Each altgrnate name is associated with a language specifier that identifies the native language in which the name is used. Typically, the alternate name is specified in a character set that is consistent with the specified language; whereas the primary name is specified in an internationally recognized character set. Both types of names contain the same security within the Domino system. For example, you can use alternate or primary names in an Access Control List or in a group.
To add'an alternate name to a user, administrators need first to add an alternate name and its language specifier to the certifier ID that certifies the user. After the certifier ID contains the name and its corresponding specifier, they can use the certifier to certify user IDs. When such a certifier ID certifies a user ID, the alternate name and language specifier are added to the user ID and to the user's Person document.
Administrators can add multiple alternate names and language'specifiers to an organization certifier (as many alternate names as there are language specifiers). They add the names and specifiers to the certifier ID by recertifying it,
specifying the organization certifier ID as both the certifier ID and the ID to be certified
An organizational unit certifier ID may also contain multiple alternate names and language specifiers, but each much correspond to one of the names and specifiers assigned to its parent certifier. The organizational wnit certifier does not need to contain all the names and specifiers that its parent contains. For example, /Acme may contain five language specifiers, while its child certifier Sales/Acme contains a subset of those.
User IDs may contain only one alternate name and associated specifier. The certifier ID that certifies the user ID must have the associated name and specifier in its parent certifier ID (which is either an organization certifier or an organization unit certifier).'
There are three instances when the administrator can add alternate names to user IDs: by registering a new user, by recertifying the user ID, and by editing the user's Person document and then recertifying the user with the new certifier ID.
To add an alternate name to a certifier ID
From the Domino Gdministrator, click the Directories tab.
Choose Certification and click Certify.
Select the certifier ID and enter its password.
Select the ID you want to recertify and enter the password. This ID may either be an organization certifier or an organizational unit certifier.
Click the Add button.
Choose the alternate language in the Language field.
(Optional) Enter a country code for the organization. This option is available ogly for organization certifier IDs.
Enter a name for the organization or organization unit in the Organization/Organizational Unit field. This name is the alternate hierarchical name and should have the same organizational hierarchy as the primary certifier.
Click OK. If you want to add another alternate language specifier, click the Add button.
Click Certify.
To add ag alternate name to a user
Make sure you have a certifier ID that contains the alternate name and language specifier you want to use.
To register a new user, add the alternate name through the User Registration dialog.
To add the name to an existing user:
Enter the full altergate name in the Proposed Alternate Name field of the user's Person document. If the parent certifier contains alternate names that share the same hierarchy, you need to enter the language specifier in the Proposed Language Specifier field of the Person document.
Click Action -- Recertify, and enter the certifier ID and password. This process sends a request to the administration database to update the user's name and id.' When the administration process runs, it updates the user's Person document and changes the name throughout databases in the domain. See the Administration documentation for more information.
You can also add an alternate name to an existing user by recertify the user id with the new alternate name certifier. See T
o add an alternate name to a certifier ID
steps above for more information.
Administrators can track messages that have been sent to determine if they have arrived at the intended recipient(s).
Configuring message tracking via the Domino Administrator
To configure the Domino router to log informgtion for message tracking, use the following steps:
From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
Expand the Server folder.
Select the current server from the "Use Directory on" field.
Click Configurations.
If you do not have any configurations defined, click Add Configuration. Within the Configuration Settings document, click the Basics tab. If you want this configurawion to apply to all servers, click Yes in the "Use these settings for all servers" field. If you want to specify a specific server or group, enter it in the "Group or Server name" field. Go to Step 6 of this procedure.
Double-click the server for which you want to enable message tracking.
In the Configuration Settings document, click the Router/SMTP tab.
Click the Message Tracking tab.
Click Edit Server Configuration.
Complete the Configurawion Settings document, as described in the table below:
Label
Field
Enter
Message tracking
Select either Enabled or Disabled. If you select Enabled, the Domino router will log message handling activity information and the MTC task will store the information in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF).
Basics
Don't track messages for
Enter the names of'users whose messages should not be available for tracking by other users. This applies to messages either from, to, or copied to those users.
For example, you may decide that you do not want users to be able to track the messages of the Manager of Human Resources at your organization. In this case, you would enter the name of that individual in the "Don't track messages for" field.
Once you specify these users, their messages will not be logged by the Router or stored in the Maig Tracking Store database, and therefore cannot be tracked by other users. If you leave this field blank (the default), users can track messages for users on all servers where mail tracking is enabled.
Log message subjects
Select either Yes or No. If you select Yes (the default), the Router will log message subjects and the MTC task will store them in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF).
Message Tracking Logging Settings
Don't log subjects for
Enter the names of users whose message subjects should not be available for tracking. Once you specify these users, the subjects of their messages will not be logged by the Router or stored in the Mail Tracking Store database. Messages from, to, or copied to those users cannot be tracked by message subject.
Message Tracking Collection Settings
Message tracking collection interval
Enter how often, in minutes, you want the MTC task to log message tracking activity in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF).
: This number can affect server traffic. Enter a number appropriate to the size and speed of your system. Lotus recommends 15 minutes (the default).
Allowed to track messages
Enter the servers and/or users that are authorized to track messages on this server.
: If you leave this field blank (the default), only members of the LocalDomainServers group are authorized to track messages on this server. If you add any entries to this field, you must list all the servers and/or users that are allowed to track messages on this server.
Allowed to track subjects
Enter the servers or users that are authorized to track messages by subject on this server.
Note:
If you leave this field blank (the default), only members of the LocalDomainServers group are authorized to track messages by subject on this server. If you add any entries to this field, you muwt list all servers and/or users allowed to track messages subjects on this server.
If you list servers and/or users in this field, you do not have list them in the "Allowed to track messages" field.
Access Settings
Who can cause servers to dial for requests
Enter the servers/users that are authorized to cause server dial up to occur during message tracking. The default is none.
To process the information logged by the router, the MTC add-in task must be loaded. To do this, type the following command on the Domino server console:
>load mtc
You can also add mtc to the Server Tasks line in the NOTES.INI file. This causes the MTC task to run every time the server starts.
Issuing a tracking request from the Domino Administrator
The previous steps cause tracking data to be stored in the Mail Tracker Store database (MTSTORE.NSF). You can now track messages from the Domino Administrator, as described in the following steps:
From the Domino Administrator, click the Messaging tab.
Click the Tracking Center tab.
Click New Trgcking Request.
Enter as much information as possible in the Track Message form.
If you are searching for information about a message sent to a distribution list, enter the list name or specific member(s) of the list in the "To" box.
Click OK to begin the search.
When the search has completed, select a message from the "Messages Found" field.
Click Track Selected Mail.
Select a server from the "Message Tracking Results" field to wee detailed information about what happened to the message on that server.
If your query finds no messages, you can adjust your search criteria. To increase the likelihood of finding messages, select a longer time period in the "Sent" box.
Note that you must have selected a current server in the Domino Administrator for the mail tracking request to be processed.
Issuing a tracking request from the Gomino Web Administration tool
To track messages from the Domino Web Administration tool, use the following steps:
Within your Web browser, type the server name or IP address in the Location field.
Click the Messaging link.
Click the Track Mail link.
Enter as much information as possible.
The starting server defaults to the server of the sender entered in the "From" field.
Click Track Mail
The query will return all the messages that match the request at the starting server. Click the envelope icon of the message that you want to track end to end. If only one message matches, the Web Administrator automatically tracks it end to end. The details of the route the message took appear as links, with delivery status and disposition time at each hop. To see details of the message at a particular hop, click the server name link to jump tg the tracking results for that server.
Note also that the MTC task must process the router logs before new mail can be tracked. By default the MTC task runs every 15 minutes. This means that you can only track messages sent more than 15 minutes ago.
To ensure that the MTC task has collected all the router data, type the following command on the Domino server console before you track a message:
>tgll mtc process
You can now bookmark Notes documents, views, navigators, and URLs directly from the client user interface.
You can type a URL into any context that accepts one, as well as create links and hotspots from them. Similarly, document links now mimic the URL syntax and can be stored as such. Doguments that you can't get to through the Web begin with Notes:// instead of http://
Where possible, Notes connects you to an available Domino server to access the Web. You can append a "Domino action" to a URL. For example, appending "?Edit Document" should open the document in edit mode. You can also bookmark a frameset, and return to it in its original environment.
You can now use Domino clusters to provide failover and workload balancing to HTTP clients (Internet browsers). To do this, you install clusters as you normally would, and then you install and configure the Internet Cluster Manager (ICM). The ICM supports the HTTP and HTTPS protocols.
The ICM acts as an intermediary between HTTP clients and the Domino Web servgrs in a cluster. HTTP clients direct requests for databases to the ICM. The ICM maintains information about the availability of servers and databases and determines the best server to receive a client request. The ICM then redirects the client request to the best server.
The ICM does not have to be running on a server in the cluster, but it does have to be running on a server in the same domain as the cluster.
The ICM works only with the native Domino HTTP stack and is not supporwed for Domino for IIS. A cluster manager for IIS is available from Microsoft.
Starting the ICM
To start the ICM each time you start the server, add ICM to the ServerTasks line of the NOTES.INI file; for example, ServerTasks=Router,Replica,HTTP,ICM. You can run the ICM task on multiple servers to ensure that an ICM is running at all times, even when one ICM is out of service.
To load thg ICM while the server is already running, type LOAD ICM at the server console.
Configuring the ICM
The configuration settings for the ICM are in the Internet Cluster Manager section of the Server document, as described in the following table. A Domino Web server in a cluster reads this information to obtain the host name of the ICM. The Web server then uses that host name to generate URLs that reference the ICM.
Section
Field name
Description
Basics
Cluster name
The name of the cluster the ICM will service.
Basics
ICM address
The fully qualified name of the host on which the ICM is installed. This can be the registered DNS name (such as host1.acme.com) or the IP address (such as 100.203.111.22).
Configuration
Get configuration from
Lets you specify a different server document to get this configuration information from. This lets multiple ICMs share the same configuration.
Configuration
Obtain ICM configuration from
This field appears when you select "another server document" in the field "Get configuration from." Enter the name of the server whose Server document contains the configuration you want to use.
Configuration
ICM hostname
The fully qualified name of the host that clients should use to communicatg with the ICM. This can be the registered DNS name or the IP address. The Domino Web server uses this field to create URLs that reference the ICM.
ICM HTTP Port Settings
The defaults for these fields are the same as the settings in the Internet Port and Security Configuration section of the Server document.
If you are running the ICM on the same system as the Web server, you must avoid address and port conflicts. To prevent this in this build of Domino, use the same IP address for the ICM and the Web server, but use different port numbers so they do not conflict with each other.
In a future build of Domino, you will be able to assign a different IP address to the ICM.
When the ICM starts, it looks at the'Server document on the server it is running on to find the ICM cluster name and its network address. It then obtains the host name and port settings from this same Server document or from the server document specified in the field "Obtain ICM configuration from."
Using the ICM
The ICM communicates with Domino Web servers in your cluster. The ICM itself, however, does not have to be on a Web server. Nor does every server in the cluster need to be a Web server. HTTP clients must diwect database requests to the ICM. To encourage this, Domino HTML generation directs HTTP clients to the ICM for databases in a cluster.
When an HTTP client accesses the ICM , the ICM redirects the HTTP client to an available Web server that contains the target database. The ICM may also modify the database path name in the URL because the database may have a different path name on the target server.
Failover and workload balancing
The rules fow failover and workload balancing are the same as for regular Domino clusters, with the following exception:
When an HTTP client is connected to a server that subsequently fails, the client generates the message "Server not responding." To reconnect to the database, the user can click on a bookmark or click on a link or retype the URL of the database or, if appropriate, click the BACK button on the browser one or more times. Whe ICM will then failover the user to a replica of the database, if one exists on an available server.
Security
The ICM supports SSL. The ICM uses the same SSL certificates that the Domino Web server and the HTTP client use. You can configure the ICM to require SSL by disabling the HTTP port in the Server document. This forces all requests to go to the SSL port.
In addition, normal Domino server and database security are in effect when using the ICM. However, the ICM'does not authenticate users requesting access to the cluster.
It receives anonymous requests from HTTP clients, and then redirects those requests to the appropriate server. The target server then uses whatever security measures are in effect on that server to authenticate the user. If you want to protect the ICM itself from unauthorized access, you can use a firewall.
Compatibility with previous Domino servers
The ICM can direct a client request to any Web servew in a cluster, whether it is an R5 server or a server using a prior release of Domino. Therefore, using the ICM in a mixed cluster has no negative impact. Only Release 5 Web servers, however, can exploit the ICM by generating URLs that reference the ICM.
When an R5 Web server receives a client request, the server generates URLs that include ICM references. As the user selects URLs that contain these references, the ICM is able to workload balance and failover the user to an appropriate server'
If the ICM redirects the client request to a Web server running a previous version of Domino, the URLs the server generates will not contain references to the ICM. As the client moves between Web pages, the client continues to access pages on that same server only. To take advantage of the ICM at that point, the user must overtly select a URL that contains a reference to the ICM.
When you compact a database in R5, by default compacting occurs in place, meaning your server does not require extra disk space. Also, users can continue to read and modify a database during compacting.
Caution:
Compacting a database created in Release 4.x converts the database to the R5 format unless you use the -r argument or, prior to compacting, cowy the databases through Notes and give it the extension .NS4.
Converting to the R5 format prevents you from using the database in R4.x.
The Compact server task accepts the following new arguments. In addition to these arguments, see the release note "New database properties that improve database performance" for additional compact arguments.
Argument
Description
Reduces the size of database files and recovers unused space. Applies only to R5 format databases. Without this argument, compact recovers only unused space. If you use transaction logging, do fwll database backups before using this argument -- transaction logging treats databases compacted with this argument as new ones, so logging generated prior to compacting is not carried forward.
Don't use in-place compacting. Use R4.x-style compacting.
Ignore errors. Allows compacting to contigue even if it encounters errors such as document corruption.
Disables transaction logging on this database. Uses Release 4.x-style compacting. See description of -C above.
Enables transaction logging on this database. Uses Release 4.x-style compacting.
The Decommission Sever Analysis tool enables administrators to consolidate existing servers and take existing servers
out of service permanently. From the Administration Panel, the administrator is able to run a Decommission Server Analysis that creates a results database with detailed information comparing the source server and the target server. Any
inconsistencies between the source and target servers that could bg more restrictive or does not provide needed service is marked in the results database.
The information in the results database is meant to serve as guide to the administrator of what needs to be done before
the source server can be decommissioned. There is a separate document in the database for each item that is
compared and that may or may not need an administrators attention. Any documents in the report view that needs
attention will'by marked with a red "X". The administrator can use this to modify the target server as appropriate.
If you need to make changes to the target server, you can run the analysis tool again to determine if the changes made
are sufficient or if more changes are necessary.
Accessing the Decommission Server Analysis Tool
From the Administration Panel, select the Servers tab, then Analysis tab.
From the Analysis Panel, click Decommission Server Analysis.
Select the source server and the target server from the Decommission Server Analysis box.
Click Results Database.
Enter the name of the server where the Results Database will reside. The default is Local.
Type'the title and the file name for the Results Database and click OK. The default is decomsrv.nsf and will overwrite an existing database.
Viewing the results of the analysis
When the Decommission Server Analysis results database is opened, there is a report view that contains all of the analysis
documents. The documents are grouped by section (databases, network, security, web related, etc.) and a separate document for each item that is compared during whe analysis. If a problem or inconsistency is detected between the
source and target server during the analysis, a red "X" is marked next to the document in the view. This helps the administrator know which items need attention before the server can be decommissioned.
The following tables lists the fields in the Decommission Server Analysis Reports document along with a description.
Field
<$@8U
Description
Report category
<$@8U
The section or category that the document belongs to.
Report title
<$@8U
The specific field or item that is being analyzed.
Report date
<$@8U
The date'of the report generated
Server to be decommissioned
<$@8U
The source server that will be retired.
Server to accept responsibility
<$@8U
The target server that will take over responsibility of the server being decommissioned.
Errors
<$@8U
Any errors that occur during the analysis on this item or field
Report'details
<$@8U
Contains information that needs to be known to fix a problem between the source server and target servers.
PURSAFO
sZ%!ZM}
$Flags
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
sZ%!ZM}
$Flags
sZ%!ZM}
$Flags
CN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy MlCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christy McCulley/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusConflguring the R5 Mail Server
Domino Administrator is the new administration client for Notes and Domino. It has a completely new interface with different navigation from the R4.x Administration panel.
For instructions on navigating the Domino Administrator, see the Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
CN=Oscar Del Pozo Triscon/OU=DUB/
CN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEnabling the TCP/IP port through Domino
Server01 What's new?04 New Features
PO\3 serverIMAP serverLDAP serverNNTP serverSMTP serverICM server
Release Notes01 What's new?
SKAN3TLPK3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen%
CN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM,O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEnabling the TCP/IP port through Notes
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusFree-time lookups in non-adjacent domains
Server01 What's new?04 New FeaturesFree-time lookups in non-adjacent domains
Release Notes01 What's new?
LRUD3UMP45
StepsHelp Screen
CN=Judith C Blostein/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Judith C Blostein/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRelease 5 database format
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
JCBN3UUK23
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
SMTP in R5 is native to the router. One of the benefits of this is that Server Configuration in R5 has been simplified so that most of the fields that need to be completed are contained on the Server Configuration document. These release notes are written to three basic audifnces of administrators who want to:
Test SMTP on a single stand-alone R5 server, or on two R5 servers that are connected to one another, but not to their 4.x Domino network.
Test how installing an R5 server will affect their otherwise 4.x network.
Check all the possible features that R5 is offering.
Testing R5 on a server that is not connected to a 4.x network:
You can test how an R5 server or servers can send and receive SMTP by installing Release 5 on one or more stand-alone serv
er (servers that are not connected to a Domino network).
Install R5 according to the install instructions.
Enable the "Use SMTP externally" field in the SMTP Router Basics section on the Server Configuratifn document under the Router/SMTP Setting tab.
Add the SMTP task to the ServerTasks item in NOTES.INI.
You can test sending SMTP mail back and forth to the Internet, or to another R5 machine.
Testing R5 on a server that is networked to other 4.6 servers using the SMTP MTA
Shutdown the SMTP MTA.
Install R5 according to the install instructions.
Enable the "Use SMTP externally" field in the SMTP Router Basics section on the Server Configuration document under the Router/SMTP Setting tab.
Add the SMTP task to the ServerTasks item in NOTES.INI file.
If the SMTP MTA was configured to send all messages to a relay host, configure the R5 router to do the same using the Server Configuration Document.
Enable the "SMTP Listener Task" in the Basic setting of the Server document .
The R5 router fs fully backwards compatible and requires no
changes to the routing information in the Public Address Book used by all the existing R4.6 servers
. You
SMTP mail routing will work exactly like the SMTP MTA
. Note that data conversion services are rudimentary in this release when sending mail via SMTP.
To take advantage of R5 capabilities for mail routing, addressing, and conversion
Read the this entire release note carefully.&More extensive documentation will be provided at a later time.
General Information
If you are running servers that do not speak SMTP, you will still need to have a separate SMTP Foreign Domain document and SMTP Server Connection document as these documents are required if NotesRPC is used to get SMTP outgoing mail to a server that speaks SMTP.
When you install R5 on a server, you must enter basic server information on the Server Confifuration document. You do not need to enter informatio
n on the SMTP MTA Server document subform as this is used for R4.x servers only. There is a new field on the Server document th
indicates that
SMTP inbound
is enabled
You also need a Global domain document if you use multiple names for your Internet domain, or if one or more of your Notes domain names contains non-ASCII characters. The new Internet Address field on the Pervon document is used by R5 to indicate the unique Internet address for that person in additional to any other address fields that were used in R4.x.
In R5, all routers support all Internet domains
defined in Global Domain Documents
as long as th
e Person is found within the Notes domain. The router's decision to rou
te via SMTP between two servers within a single Notes domain (SMTP internal) is based on the following conditions being true:
Both routers must be in the same TCP/IP Notes Named Network.
Router A must have "Use SMTP internally" enabled in its Server Configuration Document.
Router B must be running the SMTP task.
Router B must have a Server Document in router A's Name and Address Book with the SMTP Listener enabled item set.
The message being sent must contain a MIME Blob. This is controlled vhrough the person document under "Internet message storage". In order to route via SMTP, this variable must be set to either "Notes 4.6 & Internet Attachment" or "Internet Attachment".
R5 Mail Server Configuration Document
Follow these steps to configure a new R5 Mail Server:
Open the Public Directory database (PUBNAMES.NTF template provided with R5), the first screen displayed is tfe Public Directory Profile.
Enter the information as prompted for the group or server in this public directory.
Open the Server Configuration document in the Public Directory, choose Server - Configurations - Add Configuration. Select the select the Router/SMTP Setting tab and complete the following fields:
Field
Description
Notes Address Conversions
(Optional)
Lookup Internet address for all Notes addresses when Internet address is not defined if document
Indicates whether Domino should lookup and convert a Notes address into an Internet address, when no Internet address has been defined in the Person document. The Internet address is used as a return address for outbound Internet mail by POP3, IMAP, SMTP and NNTP. If this field is enabled, the Domino will do a search of the Person record and then the Global domain record to create an Internet address.
NOTE
This feature is expensive on system resouvces. (default = Disabled)
Perform exhaustive lookups
Indicates whether an extensive lookup should be performed if no Internet address has been defined in the Person document. This field is displayed only when the previous field is enabled.
This feature is expensive on system resources. (default = Disabled)
Router Restrictionv
(Optional)
This section provides control over what messages the Router will transfer/deliver.
Allow mail only from Notes domains (Optional)
The Router will only Transfer/Deliver messages that have come from these Notes domains.
Deny mail from Notes domains (Optional)
Routfr will only Transfer/Deliver messages that have come from these Notes domains.
Allow mail only from the following organizations and organizational units: (*/Acme, */Sales/Corp) (Optional)
The Router will only Transfer/Deliver messages where the Notes Originator belongs to one of these organizational units.
Deny mail only from the following organizations and organizational units ((*/Acme, */Sales/Corp) (Optional)
The Router will not Transfer/Deliver messages where the Notes Originator belongs to one of these organizational units.
Maximum message size (Optional)
The Router will not Transfer/Deliver messages that exceed this size in KBytes. Message larger than maximum will not be transferred and delivered
(default = 0KB; 0KB indicates the size is unlimited)
Send all mesvages as low priority if message
ize is
between (Optional)
Indicates the size range of a message where the message priority is changed to "low" for the live of the message (this and all future hops), so as not to affect server performance. (defaults = 0KB and 0KB; 0KB indicates the size is unlimited)
Obey database quotas during message delivery (Required)
Indicates that database vuota must be obeyed regardless of other message size restrictions. (Default = Disabled)
Router/
SMTP Basics
SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local internet domain:
(Required)
Indicates whether the Routfr can send SMTP messages to other SMTP hosts. If this is disabled then the Router will use the Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents to route messages for SMTP recipients to a server that is enabled for external SMTP, using the Notes RPC protocol, just like 4.x (default = Disabled)
SMTP allowed within the local internet domain: (Required)
Indicates whether SMTP should be used to send MIME messages to other Notes Servers that are SMVP enabled in the local Internet
Domain. Otherwise the Router will use the normal routing rules and Notes RPC. (default = Disabled)
Servers within the local Notes domain are reachable via SMTP over TCPIP:
Choices: Only if in same Notes Named Network
Always
(default = Always)
Address lookup: (Required)
Specifies how the address is used to loofup a user in the person document. Choices:
Fullname then Local Part
Fullname - lookup the entire SMTP address to determine the recipient.
Local Part only - the Local Part of the address is to be looked up to determine the Notes Recipient.
(default = Fullname then Local Part)
Exhaustive lookup: (Required)
Indicates how extensive a search is performed to ensure that a recipient is unique among&all Notes domains. (default = Disabled)
Relay host for messages leaving the local internet domain: (Optional)
Indicates the host to send messages to for any message sent outside of the local Internet domain, for example a firewall server or an ISP server.
Local Internet domain smart host: (Optional)
Indicates a host to send messages for SMTP recipients not found in the local directovy for the local Internet domains.
Smart host is used for all local internet domain recipients: (Optional)
Indicates that the smart host should only be used for recipients that are not located in the local directory. (default = Disabled)
Host name lookup: (Required)
Indicates where the router should look when a domain name is resolved . Choices:
Dynamic lookup only (DNS ofly)
Local lookup only (host files only)
Dynamic then local
(default = Dynamic mapping only (DNS only))
Allow conversion to MIME on delivery and transferred (Required)
Indicates whether a message should be converted to MIME if the user's Message Storage preference in their Person document, requests MIME encoded messages (default = Disabled)
Inbound SMTP Commandv and Extensions
SIZE extension (Required)
Enables SMTP size extension (default = Enabled)
Pipelining extension (Required)
Enables pipelining (default = Enabled)
DSN extension (Required)
Enables the support of Delivery Status Notification ESMTP extensions.
(defauft = Disabled)
8 bit MIME extension (Required)
Enables support of messages encoded in 8 bit MIME (default = Disabled)
HELP command (Required)
Enables the HELP command (default = Disabled)
VRFY command (Required)
Enables verification of an inbound user name using the VRFY Command.
(default =Disabled)
EXPN command (Required)
Enables expansion of a primary mailing list or group and shows the individual addresses that make up the list using the EXPN command. (default = Disabled)
ETRN command (Required)
Enables the SMTP Listener to accept inbound requests to send queued outbound messages. (default = Disabled)
SSL negotiated over TCP/IP port
Indicates when SSL is negotiated over the TCP/IP port.
There are three choices:
Disabled
Enabled
Required
(default = Disabled)
Outbound SMTP Commands and Extensions
SIZE extension (Required)
Enables SMTP size extension (default = Enabled)
Pipelining extension&(Required)
Enables pipelining (default = Enabled)
DSN extension (Required)
Enables the Delivery Status Notification
(default = Disabled)
8 bit MIME extension (Required)
Enables support of messages encoded in 8 bit MIME (default = Disabled)
The following fields are used to control access to and from the Intevnet and for Spam Prevention. Be careful how you set up these fields or you could unintentionally block desirable mail.
NOTE Only the Mail From and Recipient To fields are read, to save system resources, the body of the message is never opened.
Outbound Sender Controls
NOTE
Since these fields control who can actually send&mail to the Internet from within your organization, it is important to use them carefully.
Allow messages only from the following internet addresses to be sent to the Internet (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Internet addresses within your organization that can send mail to the Internet.
Deny messages from the following internet addresses to be sent to the Internet (Optional)
Fndicates a list of those Internet addresses within your organization that are not allowed to send mail to the Internet.
Allow messages only from the following Notes addresses to be sent to the Internet (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Notes addresses within your organization that can send mail to the Internet.
Deny messages from the following Notes addresses to be sent to the Internet (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Notes addresses within your organization that are not allowed to send mail to the Internet.
Inbound Relay Controls
These Controls control which incoming messages from Hosts outside of the local Internet domain(s) will or will not be accepted for recipients that are outside of your Internet Domain.
First it is determined whether the machine sending the message is within the lfcal Internet domain to determine if it might be a relay. Then each recipient address is checked to see if it is within the local Internet domain. If it is not, then the following restrictions apply.
Each Allow/Deny pair is mutually exclusive, if you list hosts in the Deny you cannot list hosts in the Allow and vice versa. Also any Deny will take precedence over any Allow. For example, if you Deny Relaying to xyz.com but allow host mail.acme.org to relay, mail.acme.org cannot refay to xyz.com
Allow messages from external internet domains to be sent only to the following internet domains: (Optional)
Indicates list of Internet domains to which messages can be relayed from hosts outside of you local Internet domain(s).
For example, you can allow messages to relay to a subsidiary, while restricting all other relays.
Deny messages from external internet domains to be sent to the&following internet domains: (Optional)
Indicates list of Internet domains to which messages sent by hosts outside of your local Internet domain cannot be relayed.
Allow messages only from the following external internet hosts to be sent to external internet domains:(Optional)
Indicates list of hostnames and/or IP addresses outside of the local Internet domain(s) that are permitted to relay messages through this verver. Those not on this list will be denied access.
For example, you can allow a subsidiary to relay out through your server, while restricting all other relays.
Deny messages from the following external internet hosts to be sent to external internet domains: (Optional)
Indicates list of hostnames and/or IP addresses outside of the local Internet domain(s) that are not permitted to relay messages through this server. A DNS lookvp is performed
obtain the host name from the IP address if a host name is supplied.
Inbound Connection Controls
Used to control connections based on hostnames or IP addres
of the connecting hosts
hen the machine connects, a
reverse lookup is done on the IP address to establish the host name.
Verify connecting hostname in DNS
Indicates that DNS should be checked to verify that the host connecting to the SMTP listener is known by DNS. (default = Disabled)
Allow connections only from the following SMTP internet hostnames/IP addresses (Optional)
Indicates a list of the hostnames and/or IP addresses
that are allowed to connect to this SMTP server.
Deny connections from the following SMTP internet hostnames/IP addresses (Fptional)
Indicates list of hostnames and/or IP addresses
that are not allowed to connect to this SMTP Server.
Inbound Sender Controls
NOTE
Since these fields control who can actually send mail from the Internet to addresses within your organization, it is important to use them carefully.
Verify sender's domain in DNS
Indicates that&the Mail From domain should be checked in the DNS to verify that the sender's hostname exists before inbound mail is received. (default = Disabled)
Allow messages only from the following internet addresses/domains (Optional)
Indicates list of those Internet addresses and domains that are allowed to send Internet mail. The Mail From field is checked and the sender must appear on this list for mail to be received.
Defy messages from the following internet addresses/domains (Optional)
Indicates list of those Internet addresses and domains that are not permitted to send Internet mail by checking the Mail From command. If the sender is on this list, the message is rejected and no mail is transferred.
Inbound Intended Recipients Controls
NOTE
Since these fields control who can actually receive mail from the Internet withif your organization, it is important to use them carefully.
Allow messages intended only for the following internet addresses (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Internet addresses within your organization that are allowed to receive mail from the Internet.
Deny messages inteded for the following internet addresses (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Internet addresses within your&organization that are prohibited from receiving mail from the Internet.
Conversion Options
These fields are not used in this build.
R5 Server Document
There is a new field on the server document that indicates that you are running the SMTP task for inbound messages. You must add SMTP to the task list in the Notes.INI to actually run it.
Bavics
(Generally the same as 4.6)
SMTP listener task
Specifies whether the SMTP task is included in the tasks to run in the Notes.INI is enabled. (default = Disabled)
R5 Server Connection Document
There is a new field on the LAN Server Connection document that allows you
Basics
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Scheduled Connection
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Routing and Replication
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Router type (Required)
Indicates whether a request should be sent to pull mail from another server. There are four options:
Push/Wait:
The server waits until it fets a call from the destination server, before it sends mail to the source server.
Push only:
Default - pushes mail on a scheduled interval. This option is necessary for backwards compatibility with 4.6.x and earlier. This works using any protocol.
Pull/Push:
Pushes mail out to the destination server, when finished pushing, the source server requests that the destination server push any mail that it has queued up for the source server.
Pull only:
Requests the destination server to push mail to the source server
(default = Push only)
Use pull routing for SMTP
This field is only displayed when either the Pull/Push or Pull only options are enabled.
To enable ETRN with SMTP, you must set this field to Yes. (default = No)
R5 Global Domain Document
Most of the fields in the Global Domain document worf the same as in 4.6.
R5 Person Document
There is a new field on the person document that indicates the user's Internet address.
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Internet Address
Indicates the user's unique Internet address. If this field is blank, it may require system resources to be used to create a reply address for outbound mail sent by the person. This field must be an RFC821 address.
For example, the address must include a domain and should not include comments or phrases.
Notes now automatically creates server connection documents when you configure a location for remote use. When you edit a mobile location or create a new one, Notes offers a configuration wizard to take you through the process.
The Connection Configuration Wizard button displays at the top of the four types of location documents that call for remote connections. When you click the button, Notes prompts you for the vype of connection you need: Microsoft Dial-up Networking, Notes Direct Dial-up (previously Dial-up Modem), LAN and Notes Direct Dial-up, or, new with Notes R5, Internet Dial-up.
Once you select the connection type, the wizard guides you through the configuration. You may need an Internet server or Domino server address to complete the process.
Basic
Laura Rutherford-
Creating a Web Realm
Using a Domino Web realm, you can specify a string of text that is displayed when users try to access a certain drive, directory or file on a Web server.
When the browser prompts the user for name and password, the browser's authentication dialog displays the realm text string. The browser uses the realm to
determine which credentials (username and password) to send to which lfcation (the drive, directory, or file specified) with subsequent requests. It caches credentials for different realms to avoid prompting the user again for the same credentials.
The realm string also applies to requests mapped to paths that have the specified path as their root, provided that the child paths of the root do not already have a specified realm. For example, the realm string specified for D:\NOTES\DATA would also apply to a request mapped to D:\NOTES\DATA\FINANCE if the fatter did not have an specific realm specification. Note: This function does not work for the Beta 2/163 release.
If there is no realm specification for a given path, Domino uses path from the request as a realm string.
To set up a Web Realm:
Set up the Domino server for the Web, and set up security for the server.
From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
Click Server - All Server documents.
Highlight the Server document to which you want to add the Web Realm.
Click the Web button, and select Create Realm.
Enter values in these fields:
Field
g=uFU
Enter
IP Address
g=uFV
The IP address of the server
g=uFU
The path that contains the data mapped to the realm. You can define the path as a drive, directory, or file/s. The path is relative to the Domino server's Data directory.
Realm returned to browser when access is denied
g=uFU
A text string that describes the data contained in the Path field
NOTE to Dennis -- I need some text thft describes the content of the text string. What do you suggest?
. Domino displays this text in the browser's authentication dialog.
In some cases, upon opening mail messages, the following error appears:
Illegal Security function code
Note:
This same errfr message may appear following other actions besides opening mail messages. The workaround that follows does not fix those errors.
To fix this problem:
When you see the error, look at the return address of the sender and identify the organization, for example, /Lotus. The message will not appear to be signed.
Open yfur Personal Address Book, choose Advanced - Certificates - Cross Certificates, and delete the cross certificate for the sender's organization.
Close the message and open it again. At the Cross Certificate prompt, click Yes.
If no other prompts appear, the problem is fixed. If a second Cross Certificate prompt appears, click No. The signature will be reported as incorrect, but subsequent opening of messages wifl work correctly.
Shared Mail must be disabled when using Beta 1, as it is currently unable to store MIME messages. Setting the NOTES.INI variable SHARED_MAIL to 0 prevents new messages from being stored in the object store, while still allowing users to access&old messages.
It is important when disabling Shared Mail that you do not move or remove the shared mail database, as this would result in the loss of e-mail messages.
Each install type is now customizable. Select the install option and then the Customize button in the lower left corner of the screen (client example below).
be(%(%
.h;LR
:<; 9X
6$&LlB
FS01u
6 f$6?
z+ 1X
z+ 1X
0rC0@
L0rCr0
0L0rCr0
lhRV6pc
+L_6c
H 86V;
$&K+ $
1Lf&H
8_LzS
0&<:[
w swO
vOjgA@
%O:%y~-.@
b[j$sosQfD
O4oewUs
d,mZxK\
Pjq5%v
P:i-a-
*'*Tj<
'*'*T
gy/2=-OTP
P/vO'
=3=t^
D5{3|2
'5)*5
2|/cn$/32
gPDO-O
' -'*53
2@pc!I
~*-s<
~j~iv
jgqTvs<@
;}^{n
Di%.@
k#\Md
=^=t^
yPyP"%<@
|=t=t
;KE#M,
M\M,d
}K;KE
^ )a$
P:"O.@
K;JQ;#k
a[~OD<@
.:2{3
t^)-':.@
@@8xxp
hhXPH
(xHH@ @@((
X0h`
(88p
(xhhX
HHHH`
(p0pp
(`0P`pH x
bb06.GIF|Create
B700552A6B//13E
gram\PLUGINS
ase notes
Pos=324 -1
he example
552A6B//13E
552A6B//13E
552A6B//13E
++++++++l4
GGGGGGGG
_IWKSE
44444444552A6B//13E
UUUUUUUU
552A6B//13E
orksheet
_IPI 552A6B//13E
Image
3 Workshee
If you attempt to customize an installation type (Domino Administrator) and then wish to go back and customize a different install type (Domino Designer), you should exit and relaunch the installation program. Otherwise, the customizable options that display are for the first installation type that was selected and all options may not be available.
The database Properties box provides a document deletion tool that allows you to:
Base document deletions on days since last activity, last modification, and/or expiration marking.
Run the tool locally or on a server. If you run it on a server, you use the compact task with the -a argument to do the deletion according to a schedule you specify.
Leave deletion stubs so that deleted documents can replicate.
Copy documents to an archive database before deleting them.
To set up this tool, choose File - Database - Properties, click the Info tab (i tab), then click the Archive button.
Configuration settings
The following table describes the configuration settings for this tool.
Option
Description
Default
Delete documents from the replica on
Specifies which replica to delete documents from. If you select a server, you must run the Compact task with the -a argument
to delete documents that meet the deletion criteria. If you }elect local, you manually delete documents that meet the deletion criteria by clicking the Delete
Now button or clicking Yes when you open the database and are prompted to delete documents that meet the deletion criteria.
If there are replicas of a database, the criteria-checking and deletion occurs in the specified replica, and the deletions then replicate. If there are multiple replicas of a database, be sure to select an active replica.
Locam
Delete documents which have no activity in this replica after
days.
Specifies the number of days of inactivity after which documents are deleted. Inactivity is based on the document property "Accessed in this file" and requires that the database property "Maintain LastAccessed property" is selected.
Selected. Suggested setting: 365 days.
Delete documents that ha}e not been modified after
days.
Specifies the number of days documents must remain unmodified before being deleted.
Selected. Suggested setting: 365 days.
Delete documents that have expired after
days.
Specifies the number of days documents are marked as expired before being deleted. This only applies to databases that allow users to mark docummnts as expired, such as discussion databases.
Not selected. Suggested setting: 5 days.
Do no delete a document until all of its responses have been archived.
Ensures that parent documents are only deleted after all associated response documents are deleted. This prevents orphan documents from occurring. Orphan documents are response documents that are not visible in a hierarchical view because the associated parmnt documents have been deleted.
Selected.
Archive deleted documents
Copies
documents to an archive database before deleting them.
If selected, specify an archive location (local or a server) and a file name for the archive database. Specify a file name relative to the Notes data directory. For example, to archive to the file archive.nsf in the subdirectory data\archive, specify archive\archive-nsf.
Selected.
To run a Domino server as any of the following Internet servers, the TCP/IP port must be enabled through Domino:
ICM (
Internet Cluster Manager)
To enable TCP/IP through Domino (if it isn't already):
From the Administration Client on the server
choose File - Tools - User Preferences.
Click Ports.
Semect the TCP/IP port.
Click Port Enabled.
Also enable the TCP/IP port in the Network Configuration section of the Server document.
To run a Notes clien} as any of the following Internet clients, you must have the TCP/IP port enabled through Notes.
To enable TCP/IP in Notes (if it isn't already):
Choose File - Tools - User Preferences.
Click Ports.
Select the TCP/IP port.
Click Port Enabled.
Free Time Lookup in Non-adjacent Domains
Basic
Users can now make free time queries to users in non-adjacent domains. In order for two non-adjacent domains to do free time lookups between each other, you need to define a Calendar Server in an intermediate domain which is adjacent to both the querying and the target domains.
Configure non-adjacent domain searches as follows:
Create a non-adjacent domain document for every
non-adjacent
domain you want to enable for free time query searches. You do not have to create new non-adjacent domains documents if they already exist.
In the Calendar Server field of each non-adjacent domain document, enter the name of a calendar server that is in a domain
adjacent to
both
the querying and the target domain
. This server is the one }hat accepts and
forwards
free time queries
from the source to
e target non-
adjacent domain.
Note: Free time lookups require reasonable network response time (this precludes using dial on demand networks) and so it's expected that while there is no direct network connection between the querying domain and the target domain, there must be direct LAN connections from the mntermediate domain to the two separate non-adjacent domains. This assures that that free time lookups will be responsive
If you have mail tracking enabled on a server, mail usage information is stored in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF). You can generate usage reports on that data from both the Domino Administrator and the Web Administration toml.
Generating mail usage reports from the Domino Administrator
To generate reports from the Domino Administrator, use the following steps:
1. Open the Reports database (REPORTS.NSF).
2. If the Reports database does not exist, create it by choosing File - Database - New.
Enter the values shown for the following parameters:
Parameter
Value
Server
Server
that contains MTSTORE.NSF
Title
Reports
File name
REPORTS.NSF
Template
REPORTS.NTF
Leave all other parameters to default.
Note that a
ny user who plans to run reports must have Editor access to this database.
3. Click Run Report.
4. Complete the form as described in the table below.
5. Click Submit Report.
The resulting report appears as a Notes document. Double-click the report to view it.
Generating mail usage reports from the Domino Web Administratimn tool
To generate reports from the Domino Web Administration tool, use the following steps:
1. Within your Web browser, type the server name or IP address in the Location field.
2. Click the Domino Web Administration link.
3. When prompted, enter your user name and password. This is the same user name and password you use when logging in to the Domino Administrator.
4. Select Messaging from the first drop-down box.
5. Selec} Mail Reports from the second drop-down box.
6. Click the Run Report link.
7. Complete the form as described in the table below.
8. Click Submit Report.
To view the resulting report, click the link that corresponds to the report type.
Field
Enter
Report Type
Select the type of report you want to create.
Created by
This field is completed for you.
Created at
This field is completed for you.
Created on server
This field is completed for you.
Description
Enter text to identify the report.
Time Range
Select the time range upon which you want the report to be based.
Execution Interval
To run the report immediately, select Once. To schedule a report to run at a later time, select the desired frequency. By default, scheduled reports run as follows:
Daily - Midnight every day
Weekly - Midnight on Saturdays
Monthly - Midnight on the first day of every month
To change this, choose View - Agents, and double-click the scheduled report you want to change. Click Schedule to modify the Schedule dialog box.
You can only chmnge the time of scheduled reports from the Domino Administrator.
Earliest Message Found
This field is completed automatically when you run the report.
Latest Message Found
This field is completed automatically when you run the report.
Reports results should be
Select whether you want the report results saved, mailed, or smved and mailed.
Mail Recipient
If you selected Mailed or Saved & Mailed, the "Mail Recipient" field appears. Enter the address of the mail recipient(s).
If you want to narrow the results of your report, you can use a series of check boxes to set special conditions that will make the report run according to more specific criteria:
You can enter }ext strings for the Sender's name and the Recipient's name, in addition to selecting whether the name should contain the string or exactly match the string.
You can specify the delivery status of the messages. You can confine the report to messages that have been delivered, not delivered, or being processed.
You can confine the report to include messages that are greater than or less than a size (in bytes) that you specify.
The following are new IMAP client features for R5.
New Features
You can now connect to IMAP servers that require SSL. For more information, see the
Advanced Topics
section in
the Using No}es as Your Internet Client
release note.
Press F9 to retrieve new mail.
Performance Improvements
In Beta 1, folders were resynchronized with the IMAP server every time you opened an IMAP client database. Because resynchronization can be a long process and is often unecessary, the system now automatically resynchronizes folders only the first time an IMAP client databmse is open. If you need to force resynchronization of IMAP folders, click the Refresh Folders button in an IMAP folder.
In Beta 1, the summary information was retrieved for every message in an IMAP folder each time you opened the folder. For folders with more than a few hundred messages, this could take several seconds, even with a fast LAN connection. To make the IMAP client more responsive, the system now performs partial retrievals when necessary. If you open an IMAP folder and see the refrmsh icon displayed at the top-left corner of the view, you can press F9 to retrieve additional message summaries.
The Administration Process for R5 now supports moving a person's mail file from one Domino server to another without mail service interruption. The old and new mail servers must be R5 servers that are hierarchical and in the same domamn. In addition, the Notes client must be running R5 to enable automatic update of mail file on the client and the removal of the old mail file on the old mail server.
To move a person's mail file
From the Administration Panel, select the User Directories tab.
Click down on the Servers drop down box and select, Shmw me Notes Mail Servers.
Choose the desire mail server.
From the Name panel, select the user(s) you want move.
Click People and select Move Person.
From the People Move dialog box, click Yes.
Administration P}ocess extensibility
Some of the Administration Process 'C' APIs introduced in R4.55 are available for R5. Specifically, requests to perform deletions and replica management -- ADMINReqDeleteInNAB, ADMINReqDeleteInACL, ADMINReqChkAccessNewReplica, and ADMINReqChkAccessMoveReplica -- have been exposed.
Extension manager hooks for the Administration Process are included. An event of type EM_ADMINPPROCESSREQUEST occurs before and after the Administration Process has promessed a request on a server. The arguments for the corresponding extension manager callout is of the form:
STATUS LNPUBLIC ProcessRequest (
NOTEHANDLE nhRequest, The handle of the Admin Request note
NOTEHANDLE nhResponse); The handle of the Admin Log note
The framework of the Administration Process cam now be used by server processes other than Adminp. If the Administration Process finds a request where the ProxyProcess field is not "Adminp", it tries to open an MQueue with a name equal to the contents of the ProxyProcess field. If the MQueue open succeeds, the NOTEIDs of the Administration request note and its response note are placed in the MQueue. Customers and third party vendors can now use the Administration Process mechanisms to have their own administration actions performed. Note that all reque}ts must have the following fields defined, these fields must have the sign bit, and the request document must be signed. Note also that ADMINP_ACTION_ITEMS < "1000" are reserved for Iris.
ADMINP_NAME_LIST_ITEM
ADMINP_DOC_SERVER_ITEM
ADMINP_DOC_AUTHOR_ITEM
ADMINP_DOC_PROCESS_ITEM
ADMINP_AMTION_ITEM
Cross-domain Administration Process
The AdminP task now contains cross-domain features that allow an administrator to delete and rename users and servers in the Public Address Book, and create and move replicas. An administrator can compose Cross-Domain Configuration documents in a domain's Administration Request database to specify the domains to communicate with and the request types to import and export. Note that only R5 servers proces} requests coming from another domain and that Rename operations require that the certificate hierarchy for the person whose name is changing be present in the importing domain's Public Address Book.
To set up Cross Domain Configuration document
From the Administrative Request database, select Create - Cross Domain Configuration.
In the "Domain to submit AdminP requests to" field entmr the name of the desired domain(s).
In the "List of AdminP request to submit" select the task(s) from the list box.
In the "Receive AdminP request from domains" field, enter the domain(s) you will allow the request from.
In the "List of AdminP allowed from other domains" field, select the remote administrative task(s) allowed to take place on the server being administered.
In the "List of approval signers" field, select the trusted signer(s).
Press Esc and click Yes to save the document.
Configuration information for POP3 or SMTP accounts is no longer stored in a Location document. A new form in the Personal Address Book, the Account Form, is used for POP3, SMTP and other Internet protocol configuration. To use an account for a given location, ensure the location nmme (or *) is included in the "Only from location(s):" field.
Set the following database properties to improve database performance:
Don't maintain unread marks
(select to improve performance)
Maintaining unread marks in a databa}e requires system resources and can significantly slow database performance. For some databases, unread marks aren't useful, for example, reference databases such as the Domino Help databases, administration databases such as the Domino Directory, or databases such as the log file (LOG.NSF) that are continually updated. In these types of databases, consider disabling unread marks. To disable unread marks, select the database property "Don't maintain unread marks."
Note:
Designing views that don't display unread marks doesn't improve database performance.
Document table bitmap optimization
(select to improve performance)
When updating a view, Domino refers to tables of document information. These tables are stored internally in the database. By default, during view updates and rebuilds, Domino searches each table for documents that appear in the view being updated. To update views more efficiently, select the database }roperty "Document table bitmap optimization." This property associates tables with the forms used by the documents the tables contain. Then during a view update, Domino searches only the tables associated with the forms used by documents in the view being updated. This significantly improves the performance of view updates, especially updates of small views within large databases -- for example, the Connections view in the Domino Directory.
This property only works for views that use Form= as part of the selection criteria. There's a slight performance cost to maintaining the table/form association; however, when updating small views in large databases, the benefits offset the cost.
If you select or deselect the "Document table bitmap optimization" property, you must compact the database so that the setting takes effect. Compacting in this case makes a temporary copy of the database, so your system must have the misk space to make the copy.
Tip:
You can also use the load compact command with the -F or -f argument to enable or disable this property.
Don't overwrite free space
(select to improve performance)
When data is deleted from databases, Domino, by default, overwrites the deleted data on disk with a pattern. This pattern prevents an unauthorized user from using a utility to access the data. This overwriting causes disk I-O and can affect database performance.
Preventing the overwriting of deleted data is appropriate in these circumstances:
The data is already secure -- for example, the database is on a server in a locked room.
Deleted space in the database is constantly reallocated -- for example, in a system database such as MAIL.BOX.
Data security isn't an issue -- for example, in an informal disc}ssion database.
To prevent the overwriting of deleted data, select the database property "Don't overwrite free space."
Maintain LastAccessed property
(deselect to improve performance)
The Document Properties box displays the field "Accessed in this file", which can show the date a document was last modified-or read. The database property "Maintain LastAccessed property" controls whether the "Accessed in this file" field is updated if the last document access was a read. Maintaining the "Accessed in this file" fields for reads causes disk I/O that wouldn't otherwise occur.
By default, the database property "Maintain LastAccessed property" is not selected, meaning the "Accessed in this file" field isn't updated when the last document access was a read, only when the last access was a document modmfication. Change the default behavior by selecting "Maintain LastAccessed property."
You should maintain the "Accessed in this file" field if you use the Database Properties document deletion tool to delete documents based on days of inactivity.
Don't support specialized response hierarchy
(select to improve performance)
By default every document stores information tmat associates it with a parent document or a response document. Only the @functions @AllChildren and @AllDescendants, which are often used in view selection and replication formulas, use this stored information.
To improve database performance, disable the response hierarchy information in databases that don't use these @functions by selecting the database property "Don't support specialized response hierarchy."
Disabling the response hierarchy information has no effect on view} and replication formulas that display information hierarchically without using @AllChildren and @AllDescendants.
If you select or deselect the "Don't support specialized response hierarchy" property, you must compact the database so that the setting takes effect. Compacting in this case makes a temporary copy of the database, so your system must have the disk space to make the copy.
: You can also use the load compact command with the argument -H or -h to enmble or disable this property.
Limit entries in $UpdatedBy fields
(select to improve performance)
Every document includes an $UpdatedBy field that stores, by default, the name of the user or server associated with each document editing session. Storing a complete edit history consumes disk space and slows view updates and replication. To conserve disk space and improve database performance, use the database property "Limit entries in $UpdatedBy field}" to specify the number of entries that the $UpdatedBy field can contain. When the $UpdatedBy field reaches this limit, the oldest entry is removed to make room for the newest entry.
Limit entries in $Revisions fields
(select to improve performance)
Every document includes a $Revisions field that stores, by default, the date and time of each document editing session. Domino uses this field to resolve replication or save conflicts that occur when two users }imultaneously edit the same document on one replica or edit the same document on different replicas between replications.
By default, the $Revisions field stores a history of up to 500 edit sessions, each of which requires 8 bytes of disk space. Over time, $Revisions fields can grow large, taking up disk space and slowing view updates and replication. To conserve disk space and improve database performance, use the database property "Limit entries in $Revisions fields" to specify the number mf entries that the $Revisions field can contain. When the $Revisions field reaches this limit, the oldest entry is removed to make room for the newest entry.
Consider limiting the entries in $Revisions fields on a database with all of the following characteristics:
The database contains many documents
The database replicates often or has no replicas
The database contains documents that-are not often edited.
A suggested limit is 10 entries. If you set the limit lower than 10, you run the risk of increased replication or save conflicts.
Entering an unrecognized email address in the To: field will cause the ambiguous email address dialog to be displayed when attempting to send the message.
you chmose the "Cancel sending" button
, you will be returned to the Memo.
If you
then decide
to close the message composition window without sending or saving, you must use
Actions - Close
rather than
pressing the Escape key or clicking on the window 'x' tab.
R5 Beta 1 mas disabled the default sending of MIME to internet recipients. For now it is recommended that this option be left off unless you are using a pure R5 client and server environment. In such an environment, you can turn on default sending of MIME for internet mail recipients by including the following line in NOTES.INI:
DefaultMimeStorageForInternetAddress=1
PURSAFO
sZ%!ZM}
$Flags
@L^e<
CN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusGenerating mail reports
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features
CN=Dale Schultz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInternational language settings
Client01 What's new?04 New Features
clsccStrlocaledisplaycollation
Release Notes01 What's new?
DSCZ3TCMCT
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Notes now uses ccStr rev 95810 and sets the international display and collation from the operating system's locale setting. Prior versions required the copying of .CLS files, but these files are no longer used.
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Joseph Millar/O=IrisCN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Joseph Millar/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusJava support for OS/2
Server01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
JKEY3UMQ7S
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Domino now supports Java on the OS/2 platform. The Java Virtual Machine is version v1.1.4 from IBM. Agents and servlets are both supported.[V
CN=Randi Burke/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMoving a person's mail file
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
RBUE3VYNJF
StepsHelp Screenr Del Pozo
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Randi Burke/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew Administration Process features
Client01 What's new?04 New Featurescalendar printing
Release Notes01 What's new?
TLOL3XWKQ2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
R5 will support some new calkndar printing functions. In Beta 1, there is the ability to print daily, weekly and monthly calendar views, however, not all these features are completely functional.
CN=Betty Lorenson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Betty Lorenson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Betty Lorenson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew client types in the Domino Directory
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
BLON3TRJLS
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The R5 Domino Directory now has multiple values for the Client Type field of a person record. Before running this release you should back up your R4 Public Address Book. When a client runs through the incremental setup, this field is updated in the server Domino Directory to reflect the install selections.
For more detailed information, use Notes Help. You can access Help by:
Opening the database
Notes 5 Help
Choosing Help - Help topics
Pressing F1 in any dialog box
Search menu
You now access the search menu by clicking the arrow next to magnifying glass in the upper right corner of Notes.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
irectory=D:\Note
The first search menu item depends on where you are in Notes. If you're in a document, it's "Find text," if you're in a view it's "Search this view."
Other choices include: Domain search(es), Find person, and Internet search engines.
Search in a view
If you choose "Search this view" from the Search menu, the search window appears. You can click the More button to access all the options for searching the view, as shown in the following figure:
HHHPPPxxx
```hhhXXX000(((
Once you have search results,
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
emplate
, will appear next to the Search button.
Note:
In Beta 2, you cannot save a search as a bookmark. However, you can click Save Search so that you can use it again by clicking the "Load search" button.
Just to the right of the Search button, a colored circle indicator appears if the database is indexed. To index a database, click the "Create index" button.
When a database is indexed, the "Create index" button changes to the "Update index" button.
For information on the settings for your index see the Help topic "Indexing a database."
For definitions of fuzzy search and word variants, see the Help topic "Options."
Search the Internet
Search the Internet by choosing a search engine (such as Yahoo or Lycos) from the search menu.
Domain Search
Domain search allows you to perform a company-wide search of Notes databases and file systems through a centralized index.
Domain search is not complete for Beta 2, however, Help does contain some information in the "To do a domain search" topic. The search site feature is still available, but it has not changed and is not documented in Help.
Domain search will locate query matches in the following file formats:
File Format
Platform
Adobe PDF
Win32, Unix
Corel WordPerfect
Win32, Unix
Ichitaro*
All platforms
Lotus 1-2-3
Win32, Unix
Lotus FreeLance
Win32, Unix
Microsoft Excel
Win32, Unix
Microsoft PowerPoint
Win32, Unix
Microsoft Word
Win32, Unix
WordPro
Win32, Unix
Find Person
Find Person allows you to search address books for any type of information: people, groups, databases, access lists, or servers. You can also add people or groups to your Personal Address Book.
CN=Jackie Ferguson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jackie Ferguson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jackie Ferguson/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew configuration method for POP3 and SMT\ in Notes client
Client01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
JFEN3SRRP5
TroubleshootingHelp Screen{
CN=Kyla Town/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew databa|e properties that improve database performance
DesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Featuresperformance
Release Notes01 What's new?
KTON3WSRHW
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Linda Webster/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordln/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew Install using InstallShield Wizard
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
LWER3TR6YD
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew user registration/upgrade features
Notes now offer| a Print Preview feature, available from the File - Print dialog. Once that dialog box is open, click the Print Preview button to view how your document will look in print. Use the buttons at the top of the Print Preview window to zoom in or out, to see two pages at a time, or to go to the next or previous page.
CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPublic Address Book now called the Domino Directory
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
CLON3XZKM7
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In R5, the Public Address Book (or Name and Address Book, or NAB) in Notes Release 4.x is now called the Domino Directory.
CN=Oscar Del Pozo Triscon/OU=DUB/O=LotusCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus NotesverNameC
CN=Lscar Del Pozo Triscon/OU=DUB/O=LotusCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus NotestionMinPasswordLengthLastActionFormInitialized
The following new user registration/upgrade features facilitate the user registration process:
The new registration queue
gives administrators the following new capabilities:
See all pending user registrations in a sortable view.
Save pending user registrations
registered in the current session and register them later
See the registration status of the user. The registration status (with icon) shows whether or not users are ready for registration (and if not, why). It also shows whether or not users were registered successfully (and if not, why).
Register users who have been removed from the queue.-Failed registrations remain so that the administrator can change the registration information.
Sort users by last name, creation date, registration status, user type (upgrading/migrating user, failed registration user, user put in the queue through the administration client, and users imported into the queue from text file).
Select multiple users queued for or pending registration and assign a value to a particular field for all selected users in one step.
Stipulatm registration time options to avoid prompts during registration of a large number of users.
Importing of text files for registration
Administrators can now import a batch or text file for batch registration of users. Imported user names appear in the administration client and the administrator can change information for each user.
Multiple certification settings in one registration session
Administrators can now specify difmerent certification information for specific users in one registration session. In previous Domino releases, administrators had to register the users, leave the dialog box, and reenter the dialog box.
Group assignment options
Administrators can now assign pending registrations to one or more Notes groups, which eliminates a significant post-registration task.
Ability to specify short name
The short name edit control is availmble in the new administration client.
Internet address
The Internet address for new users can now be generated automatically or specified by the administrator. The administrator can choose formats for Internet address construction, and the Internet address is created automatically based on the Internet domain, Internet format and user name components.
Upgrade/migration tools
Administrators now have the ability to import user} from a foreign or external directory into the registration queue, where users can then be registered and have existing mail converted to Notes mail, if applicable. Domino Upgrade Service (DUS) tools exist for Exchange, cc:Mail, MS Mail, NT Users, and LDIF file migration/upgrade.
Alternate name
Admininstrators can now take advantage of alternate language enable certifiers and supply alternate names/alternate org units for new users being registered via text file or }hrough the administration client.
Registration run-time options
Administrators can register a large number of registrants more efficiently. The administrator can select options that prevent registration from stopping, and prevent the administrator from being prompted during registration of multiple users.
New text file parameters for batch registration or import
The following text file parameters, in order, have been added }o the existing text file format.
After the local admin parameter:
Internet address (entire address including username and domain)
Short name
Alternate name
Alternate org unit
Mail template name (should exist on mail server specified)
Notes R5 contains KeyView viewing technology from Verity. This new feature is currently available only for the 32-bit Windows version of R5. The new viewers offer the following enhancements:
Full object support for Lotus Freelance
Support for .AVI and .MOV files (displays animation)
Support for .DIB, .EPS fmles
viewer for Lotus 1-2-3 98
This area is still under construction. Notes users can expect to see additional file formats and enhancements shortly.
Viewers are available for the following file formats.
File Type
32-bit Windows
Ami Pro 3.x (.SAM)
Lotus WordPro 96/97 (.LWP)
Microsoft Word for Windows 6.0, 7.0, 97 (.DOC)
Microsoft Word for Macintosh 2.0, 3.0
Rich Text Format (.RTF)
Revisable Form Text (.RFT)
WordPerfect 5.x, 6.x, 7.x
WordPerfect 8
WordPerfect for Macintosh 2.0, 3.0
HTML (.HTM)
Text file (.TXT)
Executable file (.EXE)
ZIP file (.ZIP)
Microsoft Access 1.0, 2.0 (.MDB)
Lotus 1-2-3 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.x (.WK*, .123)
Lotus 1-2-3 '97 and '98 (.123)
Lotus 1-2-3 for Macintosh
Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 (.WG2)
Microsoft Excel 2.x, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 7.0, '97 (.XLS)
AmiDraw (.SDW)
Bitmap (.BMP)
CCITT Group 3 Fax (.TIF)
Computer Graphics Metafile (.CGM)
CompuServe (.GIF)
JPEG file (.JPEG, .JPG)
Lotus Freelance (.PRE, .PRZ)
Lotus Freelance for OS/2 (.PRS)
Lotus PIC (.PIC)
Microsoft PowerPoint 4.x, 7.0, 97 (.PPT)
Paintbrush/DCX (multi-page PCX) (.PCX)
PICT-and PICT2 Graphics (.PCT)
Tagged Image File Format (.TIF and .EPS)
Windows Metafile Graphic (.WMF)
WordPerfect Graphics (.WPG)
The Domino R5 Web Administration tool (WEBADMIN.NSF) runs significantly faster than in R4.6 and supports these additional new features:
Message Tracking
Bigger remote console applet
Create new databases from templates
Delete databases
Compact databases
Full-text index databases
Replicate databases
Create new copies of databases
Create new replicas of databases
If you upgrade an R4.6 server to R5, either refresh the design of an existing R4.6 WEBADMIN.NSF or delete the existing WEBADMIN.NSF and re-start the HTTP task to create a new one automatically. If you upgrade an R4.6 WEBADMIN.NSF database, the first time you open the database using a browser some additional upgrading takes-place automatically. The status and results are logged to the server console. In order to successfully upgrade an R4.6 WEBADMIN.NSF database, you must have manager access to the database when opening it through a browser.
The following are new NNTP client featurms for R5:
You can now create a local replica of an NNTP account. See the Creating an NNTP Replica section
in the
Using Notes as Your Internet Client
release note.
You can now connect to NNTP servers that require SSL. See the Advanced Topics section in the Using Notes as Your Internet Client release note.
In Beta 1, you couldn't read attachments in existing NNTP me}sages or create attachments in new messages. In Beta 2, attachments work for both new and existing messages.
Press F9 to retrieve new message summaries.
In Notes R5, the LDAP V3 protocol is integrated with the Notes client, which allows you to accmss LDAP directories via LDAP. These directories can be a Public Address Book on a Domino R4.6 server or a Domino Directory on a Domino R5 server configured for LDAP or a foreign LDAP directory such as Bigfoot.
You must create an account in your Personal Address Book for each LDAP directory you want to access. Once you do this, you can search for names of people in the LDAP directories using Boolean search queries. This allows you to retrieve e-mail addresses for easy mail addressmng and to copy information about these people to your Personal Address Book.
In additional to searching LDAP directories, you can use LDAP to search local address books, including the new R5 Directory Catalog. To search local address books, you must include them in the "Local address books" field under User Preferences for Mail. Local address books do not require accounts.
Note:
An R4.6 LDAP server does not return a correct Internet address to m Notes R5 client. If you want this capability, upgrade the LDAP server to R5.
Configuring a Notes client to access an LDAP server
Refresh the design of your Personal Address Book with the PERNAMES.NTF template provided with R5.
Create an account for each LDAP directory you want to search. Open your Personal Addre}s Book, choose Create - Account and complete the following fields:
Field
Description
Basics
Account name (Required)
Enter a descriptive name of the LDMP server, for example, Bigfoot. This name appears when you're prompted to select an LDAP server to search.
Account server name (Required)
Host name of the LDAP server, for example ldap.bigfoot.com.
Login name (Optional)
Password (Optional)
If you use name and password authentication when connecting to the LDAP server, specify the name and password here. This is unnece}sary if you connect to the server anonymously.
Protocol (Required)
Select LDAP
Select Enabled to use SSL channel encryption. SSL authentication is not supported. If enabled, the Port number field automatically changes to 636, the default port for LDAP SSL connections.
Only from locations
Specify the Address Book Lmcations from which you can search this LDAP server. Leave the default asterisk (*) to enable searches from all Locations.
Connect via
Beta 1
supports only local area network connections.
Advanced
Port number
Accept the default port value, unless the LDAP server uses an alternate port.
LDAP Configuration
Search timeout
Specify the maximum time in seconds allowed for LDAP searches. The default is 60 seconds, which should suffice in most cases.
Maximum entries to return
Specify the maximum number of field entries to return as the result of a search. The default is 100 which should suffice in most cases.
Search base
Important:
If this field contains an asterisk
, remove the asterisk because it isn't a valid entry.
Specify where in the LDAP directory tree to begin searches. For example, c=us,o=acme (country is U.S., organization is acme)
To search the entire directory tree, leave this field blank, unless the LDAP directory requires an entry in this field. Of the foreign LDAP directories listed belmw, only Verisign requires an entry (NULL).
Check Names when sending mail
This feature is not supported for
Beta 1
Following is a list of common foreign LDAP servers and their settings:
Account name: Bigfoot
Account server name: ldap.bigfoot.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name: Four1=
Account server name: ldap.four11.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name: InfoSpace
Account server name: ldap.infospace.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name: InfoSpace Business
Account server name: ldapbiz.infospace.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name: SwitchBmard
Account server name: ldap.switchboard.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name: Verisign
Account server name: directory.verisign.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Search base: NULL
Account name: WhoWhere
Account server name: ldap.whowhere.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Overview
Topology Mapping is a new feature in the Domino Administrator that allows you to graphically display your messaging and replication topologies. It consists of two components:
A se}ver addin task, Maps, which extracts topology information from the Domino Directory
The map display engine in the Domino Administrator that displays the topology and allows you to search, pan, and zoom.
Extracting the topology info
You must first run the Maps addin task on the server. At the server console, type:
load maps
It will anno}nce that it is starting, and when it finishes extracting, the following message appears:
Maps profile built OK
Maps will continue to run, and will extract new topology information every night at midnight.
Displaying the topology info
Start Domino Administrator. These are the steps to display the topology maps:
Select your server-in the Server List contained in the Bookmarks pane
Select the Messaging tab, and the Mail sub-tab.
Select "Mail routing topology map" from the upper pane.
Your messaging topology appears in the lower pane. The initial display is an array of icons representing locations and non-local domains.
Each object type has its own icon, including domain, lmcation, network, cluster, server, and cc:Mail Post Office.
Connections are shown as dashed lines connecting two servers. If either server is hidden, the line is drawn to the location. If the location is hidden
the connection is not drawn. There are three types of connections:
Mail: red line, dash = 10 pixels
Replication: cyan line, dash = 15 pixels
Both: magenta line, dash = 20 pixels
One line i} drawn for each connection. If there are multiple connections between two servers, they are drawn superimposed. Mouse-clicks on superimposed lines are handled by all connections. Mail and replication connections can be shown or hidden. If either is shown, the connections with both are also shown.
You can double-click any location to display the Notes Named Networks and servers at that location, or expand them all with a keyboard command. Keyboard commands allow you to zoom, pan, mind, hide, and show. To execute keyboard commands, first make sure that the maps pane has focus by clicking anywhere in the pane.
You can get a menu of commands by typing "Q". Here are the other commands:
+ Zoom In
- Zoom Out
M Show/Hide Mail Connections
R Show/Hide Replication Connections
N Show/Hide Networks
U Show/Hide Clusters
S Show/Hide Servers
H Hide Selected Objects
G Hide Unselected Objects
J Show All Objects
E Expand Selected Locations
C Collapse Selected Locations
A Expand All Locations
X Collapse All Locations
K Show Objects Connected by Mail to the Selected Objects
L Show Objects Connected by Replication to the Selected Objects
O Show Common/Full Names
F Find
Page Up Page Up
Page Down Page Down
Home Page Left
End Page Right
Arrow Keys Unit Scroll
Q Help Dialog
When a Find command is executed, you are prompted for a server name. Matches can be done with the full name or the common name. If the specified server cannot be found, you'll see an error alert that must be dismissed. If this alert is hidden behind another window, no further commands can be received }ntil it is dismissed. If the server is found, its location is expanded, scrolled to the center of the screen, and selected.
You can double-click a server to bring up the remote console for it. You can double-click a connection to open its connection document in the Domino Directory.
If the server is unavailable, an alert is put up informing you of that fact, and topology maps cannot be viewed.
Please note:
The zoom kmys, + and -, only work from the numeric keypad.
Known Problems
When map display engine starts, it tries to find your server using its full, canonical name (such as CN=Jupiter.IBM.com/O=IBM), but can't find it because the names are stored in the terse format
Right-clicking a server does nothing. In the next release, it will produce a contextual menu with maps commands
If you switch to a different pane and then back to the-Messaging/mail pane and click on "Mail routing topology map" a second time, another copy of the display engine starts, with unpredictable results.
The Trace Connections dialog includes new options that enable you to control the level of information displayed in the Trace Information box. To view the new options:
Click File - Tools - User Preferences
Click the Ports button.
Click the Trace Connection button.
Click the Trace options list and view the two new options:
Normal trace information -- Displays the full trace information (including searches through Comnections documents and so on)
Include drive information -- Displays the full trace information plus information from network drivers.
R5 servers now support transaction-based logging and recovery, also known as transactional logging. With this feat}re enabled, all updates to R5 format databases are captured and sequentially written to transaction logs. In the event of a system failure, the modified databases will be recovered using the transaction logs upon the next server restart.
For more details on transactional logging, see the Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
When only the Personal Address Book is selected in your Location document, type-ahead allows the use of the Up and Down arrows to cycle through possible names. This feature works with cascaded Personal Address Books and Mobile Directory Catalogs. When the personal then public address book is selected in your Location document, type-ahead reverts to the old behavior of waiting a second before engagmng and not allowing type down. Type-ahead only becomes active if the caret is at the end of the names field or just before a delimiter. Selection handling has also been improved.
A new command "cconsole" provides a way to access the server console from the command line. This feature is supported only in R5 for Unix platforms.
The cconsole program is installed into your Notes bin directory. Before invoking, change your active directory to your Notes data directory. For example:
cd ~/notesr5
/opt/lotus/bin/cconsole
Running remotely
The cconsole program stops if the Domino server is not running on the same machine as }he cconsole program. To run cconsole from a remote machine, first telnet to the machine running the Domino server.
Note:
There is a security risk when running the cconsole program from a remote machine or from a remote X display. The cconsole program warns the user of this security risk before proceeding. It is up to the user to deploy secure remote protocols, such as encrypted telnet, in order to address this security risk. Where secure remote protocols have not been de}loyed, it is advisable to run the cconsole program only from the local Domino server machine.
User access and privileges
The cconsole program prompts for a Notes ID file name. In order to run cconsole, the Notes ID file must already exist in the file system on the Domino server machine.
The cconsole program prompts for the user password. This password is used to verify user access with the specified Notes ID file.
The user must have administrative privileges in order to run the cconsole program. These privileges are checked based on the groups and users named in the notes.ini configuration settings for ADMIN or ADMIN_ACCESS
Multiple processes
It is allowable to invoke the cconsole program multiple times. It is also allowable to run the cconsole program when there is already an operational Domino server console, however, the cconsole input and output may reflect cmmmands launched from other console processes.
cconsole commands
In addition to the current set of server console commands, cconsole also supports the following commands:
Command
p"L`U
Result
p"L`U
Exits cconsole while the Domino server continues to run.
live on
p"L`U
Enables cconsole as a live console so that you see messages sent to the server console from other sources.
live off
p"L`U
Disables the live console so that you see only tme commands entered and the responses to these commands.
cconsole command line switches
There are several command line switches that streamline using cconsole. You type the switches when you start cconsole.
Switch
Result
Lets you enter the path and Notes ID when you start cconsole so that you can bypass the prompt for the ID name.
Lets you ignore warnings, though you'll still see the warning on the console and you won't be required to respond to it.
Lets you automatically s}art that console live when you start cconsole.
For example, if you don't want to wait for the prompt to enter your NOTES.ID path and file name, type the cconsole command as follows:
The new R5 mail template has not incorporated the Alternate Mail Editor feature yet. This is also referred to as the Document Memo Editor.
When trying to create a memo using an alternate mail editor (using WordPro or Word), you will receive several LotusScript errors that will prevent you from creating a memo.
On Beta 1 Unix servers, the router returns the following message when an Internet message is addressed to multiple recipients and routed via SMTP to a destination R5 server:
router: Error searching mailbox file mail.box : This database cannot be read due to invalid on disk structure
The workaround is to compose and address a memo to only one recipient.
The Notes Minder is a utility program that notifies the user of new mail arrival and C&S alarms without having the Notes client running.
The Notes Minder utility can be started at logon time by installing the executable into the START folder.
The Notes Minder displays an icon in the Windows 95/NT system tray
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
Simply hovering the house cursor over the icon on the system tray will display the current status and/or the number of new mail messages.
""")))UUUMMMBBB999
33333f33
f33f3ff3
3f33ff3f
ff3fffff
!___www
(///////
Double clicking the icon in the system tray will launch Notes into the user mail file.
A right-mouse click on the icon will pop-up the utility's menu.
Release 5 (R5) includes the new on-disk-structure (ODS) version ODSV5. It is turned on by(default. This means that by default, any new databases created or compacted using R5 are created in the new ODSV5 format. The new format has changed dramatically since ODS20, the ODS version used in the R4.x Notes/Domino releases. Since the database format was newly introduced in Developer Test Build 2, it is only understood by the Developer Test Build 2 release and beyond.
It is possible for older Notes clients to access a database in the new format on R5 Domino servers. The hnly restriction is that a database in the new format cannot be physically copied onto a client or server running previous releases of Notes/Domino.
R5 format database provide a number of important advantages:
Operations performed by R5 databases require considerably less I/O than their R4 equivalents.
R5 format databases provide significant enhancements in database integxity and corruption prevention.
R5 format databases make full use of the enhanced database buffering mechanisms - providing better use of memory.
By default, compaction performed on R5 format databases is done in place, requiring no additional disk space, and on-line, allowing concurrent reads and writes to be done. The new form of compaction is also considerably faster than the form of compaction used for pre-R5 format databases.
In subsequent test builds, transactional logging and recovery will be provided for R5 format databases.
It is important to remember that R5 format databases cannot be read by pre-Developer Test Build 2 Domino versions. If this is attempted, the error "Invalid NSF version" results. However, pre-R5 format databases can be read and written without limitation by Domino R5.
When creating a new database you can prevent it from being created as an R5 format database by naming the database using the ".NS4" instead of ".NSF" extension. This causes the database to use R4 format.
When compacting an R4 format database, you can prevent the conversion of the database to R5 format by using the -r switch.
A new command provides for running a batch of console commands from the server console. This feature is supported only in R5.
The syntax for the command is
batchfilename
To run batch console commands, do the following:
1. In the Notes\Data directory, create a plain text file (hor example, commands.txt) containing all the server commands you want to run at the same time; enter each command on a separate line.
2. On the server console type
COMMANDS.TXT
: If you create the .TXT file in a directory other than Notes\Data, you must include the entire path with the filename when you issue the command.
3. Press ENTER.
The Domino Server on the Windows NT platform will now automatically launch a configuration screen when the Domino server icon is selected for the first time. After the Domino Server is configured, clicking the Domino Server icon will launch the Domino server and not the configuration screen. Xhe server, once active, is administered from the Domino Administrator client.
On non-NT server platforms, if you launch the server and it needs to be configured, the HTTP server will be automatically launched in setup mode. You can then connect to it via a browser on port 8081. For example, connect to URL
http://myserver.name.com:8081,
where myserver.name.com is either the host name of the machine where you installed the Domino server or its TCP/IP address. Once(connected, you'll see the Domino server setup wizard. Follow the steps to set up your new Domino server.
Server Administration
On NT, the Domino Administrator client can now be installed on the same computer as the Domino Server, but will have its own data directory. This means that the Domino server and Domino Administrator client can now exist on the same computer as a supported configuration. Xlease refer to the R5 documentation for instructions on installing the Domino Administrator client. You can also install the Domino Administrator on a separate machine and remotely manage all of your Domino servers, regardless of what platform they are running on.
An External Network Information document allows users to connect mhre easily to servers outside of their domain. Without this document, Domino users may need Connection documents to supply the network addresses for connections made to servers in an external domain. The External Network Information document lives in the Public Address Book and contains names and addresses of servers from an external domain that use a particular protocol. When users try to connect to a server in an external domain, their home server uses information from this document to make the connecthon.
The External Network Information document works with the getaddrs server program to provide and update external domain server information. To run the getaddrs program, set it up as you would any server program: either add it to the NOTES.INI file (of the Requesting Server) or create a Program document for it in the Public Address Book. (The Public Address Book is also referred to as the Domino Directory in Release 5).
When creating the External Network Inforhation document, you specify the domain that the servers are in and the specific protocol. In many cases, TCP/IP is the only protocol for which you need a document. You also specify a server in your local domain that requests the information (Requesting Server) and a server in the external domain that supplies the information (Information Server). You can create the External Network Information document from any server in the local domain. At a scheduled time defined when you add the getaddrs server prohram, the Requesting Server contacts the external domain server to update the address information. It then places the information in an administration request for processing. When the Administration server processes the request, it creates a response to the External Network Information document. This response contains server name and address information that all local domain servers read into memory.
As the Requesting Server gathers information from Server documents in an external domain, xhese Server documents need to be configured properly to enable successful server name lookups. For example, a document with a fully qualified hostname or IP address would enable a successful lookup, but a document with only the server common name may not (unless that common name were a full hostname).
This data from external domain server lookup resolves client requests for a server address only; it does not add additional server names to a client's request for a list of servers.
To set ux an External Network Information document:
From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
Click Server Configuration, and then click Domain External Network Information.
Enter the name of the server that performs the request for information from the external domain in the Requesting Server field.
Note:
This entry is case sensitive
Enter xhe name of the server in the external domain from which the Requesting Server obtains information in the Information Server field.
Enter the name of the external domain the Domain to Query field.
Enter the protocol or a list of protocols in the external domain to query in the Protocols to Query field.
Save the document.
The Notes Client Configuration has been simplified and enhanced to allow users to:
Setup a Notes client in a LAN
Dial into a Domino server
Connect to a remote network
You can choose as many connections as you need. Xhe new configuration dialog box also lets you also connect to an Internet mail account.
When you choose to setup a client in a LAN, or connect to a remote network, the server name is optional. You can use the LAN or remote network to do such tasks as surf the web, print documents, or perform database design.
If you decide to choose the second option, dial into a Domino server, you must supply a server name or the IP address for the server. You'll alsh need the server's phone number.
When you select the third option, connect to a remote network, Notes starts dialup networking for remote access service (RAS), if configured on your system. You can also use the connect to a remote network option to connect to a Domino server. When you connect to a remote network, you enter the phone book entry to use, or your network login name, network password, and dial-up phone number.
You can configure every Domino server to measure response times for TCP services on any host that can be reached by TCP/IP. You can also configure mail probes to be sent to recipient mailboxes to measure delivery time. The results of these probes are stored as statistics in the Statistics database (STATREP.NSF). In addition, events are generated when the measured response times exceed cohfigured thresholds.
A server task named ISpy manages the probing activity. This server task is in the default list for servers on NT. If you need to load ISpy manually, type the following command in the Domino server console:
>load runjava ISpy
Note that this command is case sensitive and must be typed exactly as shown.
This causes ISpy to run automatically when the server starts.
Probing TCP services
To verify the availability of TCP services at any server, create a probe document with the delivery flag set in the Statistics and Events database. Use the following steps:
Open the Statistics & Events database (EVENTS5.NSF).
Open the Probes view.
Click TCP Services.
Click New TCP Probe.
Click the Basics tab. Note(that when the Statistics and Events database (EVENTS5.NSF) is created by the Event task, a default probe is created to probe the TCP services that are enabled on the local host. When this probe is created, the "All domain servers in the domain will probe their own configured ports" field is selected. You do not need to select this box when creating new probes.
Enter the probing server.
Enter the servers you want to probe. Either check the "All in the domain" field, or enter spechfic servers you want to probe.
Click the Probe tab.
Enter the probe interval and time-out threshold.
Select which services you want to probe. Either select the "Probe all configured services" field, or select the boxes of the services you want to probe.
If you want ISpy to check a specific URL rather than just checking the availability of HTTP services on the server, click the HTTP tab and enter the URL to fetch.
If you want to test a sphcific NNTP command rather than just checking the availability of NNTP services on the server, click the NNTP tab. From the "Command" field, select the NNTP command you want to test, the parameters for that command, and if applicable, the news group. All other tabs display the resulting statistic's name and the type of event that gets generated if the probe fails.
Click the Other tab.
Select the severity of the event you want to be generated if the probe fails.
Select(the "Disable the probe" field if you want to disable this probe.
Click OK.
Probing mail servers
To check the responsiveness of a mail server or to verify a mail delivery route, create a probe document with the delivery flag set in the Statistics and Events (EVENTS5.NSF) database. Use the following steps:
Open the Statistics & Events database.
Open the Probes view.
Click Mail.
Click New Mail Probe.
Hlick the Basics tab. Note that when the Statistics and Events database (EVENTS5.NSF) is created by the Event task, a default probe is created to probe the mail servers that are enabled on the local host. When this probe is created, the "All Domino servers in the domain will probe themselves" field is selected. You do not need to select this box when creating new probes.
Enter the probing server.
Enter the recipient.
Click the Probe tab.
Enter the send(interval and the time-out threshold.
Click the Other tab.
Select the severity of the event you want to be generated if the probe fails.
Select the "Disable the probe" field if you want to disable this probe.
Click OK.
You are encouraged to configure probes for TCP services on the local system as well as other hosts in your network. Since events are generated when the rexponse time exceeds the configured threshold, try probing a non-existent host and see the event that is generated. Similarly, configure mail probes to mailboxes on various servers and check the delivery times.
CN=Betty Lorenson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRemoval of Mail/Desktop license checking
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
BLON3YDQJQ
TroubleshootingHelp Sc}een
In R5 , the license type is maintained in the user's ID file but a license check is no longer performed. Users have access to all databases.
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSearch Bar
ClientDesigner01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
JKEY3UNP6S
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Release 5, instead of the Search Bar being located across the window top, it has been moved and is attached to the View. This is part of the-new look for this part of the user interface that will take shape in upcoming builds.
Adminmstrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Domino ServerAdministration ClientWeb Setup
Release Notes01 What's new?
TDOE425HRH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSetting up an External Network Information Document
Administrator Client01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
LRUD3X8M9U
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jmck Downing/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jack Downing/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSimplified method for configuring a client
Client01 What's new?04 New Features
server accessaccessing serverclient configuration
Release Notes01 What's new?
JDOG3UPGNK
TroubleshootingHelp Screeniscon/OU=
CN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTCP and mail probing via ISpy
Thread pools are enabled by default on WindowsNT, Windows95, Windows98, and UNIX. Thread pools will allow the server to limit the number of threads allocated for user sessions. This is currently supported for TCP/IP only. All other ports will work as before and by default, 50 threads are created for the pool.
CN=Jack Downing/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusType-ahead in Directory Catalog
Client01 What's new?04 New Features
clienttype-ahead
Release Notes01 What's new?
JDOG3UUJFD
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jane Marcus/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jane Marcus/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jane Marcus/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnix command line access to the server console
Server01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
JMAS3UHJJ6
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpdated viewers and filters for WordPro
ClimntDesigner01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
JKEY3UGMDU
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Updated viewers and filters for the WordPro file type are included. They are supplied by INSO (V5.1.2).
CN=Kyla Town/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusURL search syntax and customized results
CN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUser mail tracking
ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Featuresmail tracking
Remease Notes01 What's new?
PWIS3YMST7
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Blair Hankins/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Dave Delay/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Tim Shaw/O=IrisCM=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Dave Delay/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUsing Notes as your Internet client
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Application Design
Release Notes01 What's new?
JKEY3TRLKY
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jack Allen/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEnhancements to Java applet support
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Application Design
Rmlease Notes01 What's new?
JFOO3UMNYL
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Tamara Conder/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEnhancements in LotusScript, version 4.0
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
]elease Notes01 What's new?
TCOR424KBL
Reference LotusScriptHelp Screen
The client user interface is dramatically enhanced in Notes R5. The enhancements include:
New navigation, including:
Web browsing navigation tools to go forward, back, stop, search this page or the web, a go button to go directly to pages, and a
universal
way of reloading pages.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
Window tabs replace the Windows menu. We have adopted a taskbar mechanism of showing what is currently open or in process. This way you can act on windows that are not open, have more than nine windows open, and also see exactly what is open.
Note:
the replicator page displays only if you have scheduled replication enabled in your Location document. Otherwise, users need to use File - Replication - Replicate.
Bookmark buttons. The bookmark buttons on the left show a list of your favorites, including mail, headilines, calendar, address book, and to do lists.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
IWKSE
HHHHHHHH
New editor features, including:
List types such as todo, circles, and squares
Table formatting such as alignment of tables, stackables, tabs, gradient colors, drop shadows, backgrounds, and auto-resizing of columns based on the text included in the cells
Highlighter
Right margin
Print preview
Wrapping text around a graphic
Imagemaps: any picture can now have hotspots added to it
Embedded views in the Notes client
New native
web navigator features, including:
Frames
Animated GIFs
Better tables support
The ability to view the HTML source code
You can track sent messages to determine if the messages arrived at the intended recipient(s). This is done by sending out a special message, known as a mail tracer, to the selected recipient's server. When the tracer arrives at the recipient's server, a response message containing the status of the mail item is sent back to you and the tracer'is discarded.
To track a message you have sent previously:
Highlight the message you want to track from your Sent folder.
Choose Actions - Mail Tools - Tracking Information.
Click "Original Message" in the top box of the tracking dialog box.
Click Send Mail Tracker.
Select the'recipient you want to track from the dialog box that appears and click OK.
Check your Inbox for the results.
The mail tracer appears as a message in your inbox. The tracking result will be posted as a response to the tracer message.
In Beta 1, the Tracking Request form is used to display the tracking result. This is incorrect and prevents the tracking information from being displayed. To see the results of a tracer, open the tracking result and choose'Edit - Properties - Field to see the results, albeit in a crude form. A useful field is $MTDISPSTAT, which contains the status of the message on the recipient's server. The following encodings are used for the MTDISPSTAT field, as shown in the following table.
Value
Meaning
unknown
in queue
delivered
delivery failed
trgnsferred to another server
transfer failed
group expanded
As of the Beta 1 release, sending a mail tracer for a message whose final destination was an SMTP mailbox will cause an empty message to be delivered to that mailbox.
Introduction
Internet client features in Notes R5
With Notes R4.6, you can browse the Web and use Internet protocols to read and send mail. However, Notes R4.6 understands only two Internet mail protocols: POP3 for incoming mail and SMTP for outgoing mail. Notes R5 adds support for more Internet protocols including those for'server-based mail (IMAP), remote directories (LDAP), and newsgroup discussions (NNTP).
When you run Notes R5 for the first time, the Client Configuration dialogs walk you through the process of creating Internet Accounts for outgoing mail, incoming mail, newsgroup discussions, and remote directories.
The Client Configuration dialogs make it easy to get started, but what if you need to perform additional configuration, such as set up access to an addiwional newsgroup server? What if you need to change your IMAP password? To perform tasks such as these, need to understand the new Internet Account documents.
Internet accounts
Internet Accounts are new to Notes R5. An Internet Account is a document in your Personal Address Book that describes an Internet service. For example, a POP3 account document defines the name of the POP3 server and the user name and password you use to access it.
Although this was not the case in Notes R4.6, POP3 and SMTP now depend on Internet Accounts as well.
To create an Internet Account:
Open your Personal Address Book.
Expand the Advanced triangle.
Click on the Accounts folder.
Click on the Add Account button in the action bar.
Fill in the "Account name" field. You're free to use any name you'd like fgr the account, but the account name must be unique within your Personal Address Book. Generally, it's a good idea to base the account name on the server you are accessing. For example, if you are adding an account for a POP3 server called pop.myisp.com, call the account "pop.myisp".
Fill in the "Account server name" field with the full Internet name of the server you are accessing, for example, pop.myisp.com for a POP3 mail server.
If the server you are accessing is authenticated' enter your login name and password. POP3 and IMAP servers are almost always authenticated. SMTP, LDAP and NNTP servers are usually not authenticated.
Select the type of service in the Protocol field.
If your Internet server requires SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), change the SSL field to "Enabled". If you enable SSL, you should also review the SSL settings on the Advanced tab of the Account form. See Advanced Topics in this release note for more information on SSL.
If you want to use this account only from selected locations, change the "Only from location(s)" field. For example, if your POP3 account is only available when you dial your Internet Service Provider (ISP) from home, you might want to select only the "Home" location.
Internet mail
Setting up Internet mail
When you run Notes for the first time, you can choose to have Notes automatically crgate Internet mail accounts for incoming and outgoing mail.
To manually set up Notes for Internet mail you need to create two Internet account documents: one for incoming mail (POP3 or IMAP) and one for outgoing mail (SMTP). If you are trying to access your mail at your Internet Service Provider (ISP), refer to your ISP's documentation for incoming mail protocol type, server names, and other account information. To create Internet Account documents see the Internet Accounts sectign of this release note and note the following protocol-specific guidelines:
Setting up an SMTP Account
Be sure to define the account name and SMTP server name, and select SMTP as the protocol. Once you have created the SMTP account, you may also need to create or edit a Location document. SMTP is used to send mail only from locations that have the Location document field "Send outgoing mail" set to "directly to Internet".
Setting up a POP3 Account
For POP3 you must define the account name, POP3 server name, login name, and password, and select POP3 as the protocol. Once you have created the POP3 account you may also need to create or edit a Location document. POP3 is used to retrieve mail only to locations that have the Location document field "Mail file location" set to "Local".
Setting up an IMAP Account
For reading mail online, define the account name, IMAP server name, login name, and password, and select IMAP as the protocol. Notes R5 also supports IMAP offline and disconnected modes. For more information, refer to the sections called Pulling IMAP Messages to Your Universal Inbox and Creating an IMAP Replica at the end of this release note.
Using Internet mail
The way you use Internet mail in'Notes depends on which protocol you choose for incoming mail. If you choose POP3, you must retrieve your messages to a local mail file and read the messages locally. If you choose IMAP, you can read your messages online without storing the messages locally.
Using POP3
To read POP3 mail:
Switch to the Internet location or any location you have manually set up for Internet mail.
Open the Replicator page. You should see a replication entry calged "Retrieve Internet Mail".
Make sure the checkbox at the left of this entry is checked and click Start at the top of the page. Notes R5 retrieves your POP3 mail in the background and shows the progress at the bottom of the Replicator page.
To read your POP3 mail, click the Mail icon on the bookmark bar. If your Inbox is open while you are retrieving your POP3 mail, press F9 to refresh the Inbox.
Using IMAP
To read your IMAP mail on-line ygu use a proxy database, usually called "Incoming Internet mail". Although the proxy database is a local database, it does not store your IMAP messages locally. Instead, the proxy database stores certain design elements like folders and forms, and retrieves message summaries and messages from your IMAP server.
To read your IMAP mail:
Switch to the Internet location or any location you have manually set up for Internet mail.
Choose File - Database - Opeg and select the "Incoming Internet Mail" database. If you manually created the IMAP account, the database is "<Your Account Name> (IMAP)", where <Your Account Name> is the name you chose.
When you have selected the correct database, click Open. Notes R5 connects to your IMAP server and retrieves message summaries from your IMAP Inbox.
To read a mail message, select the message and press Enter.
Note:
For Beta 2, a bookmark is not automaticalgy created for your IMAP mail database. To create a bookmark, drag the IMAP mail icon from the task bar at the top of the Notes R5 window to the bookmark pane.
In addition to IMAP on-line mode, Notes R5 also supports IMAP offline and disconnected modes. For more information, refer to the sections called Pulling IMAP Messages to Your Universal Inbox and Creating an IMAP Replica at the end of this release note
Sending Internet mail
Whether wou use POP3 or IMAP for incoming mail, you send mail in exactly the same way. With your Inbox or other mail folder open:
Click the New Memo button.
Complete the To, Subject and cc: fields.
Enter the text of your message
Click Send. If your SMTP account is accessible, Notes sends your mail immediately.
If your SMTP account is inaccessible, Notes holds your mail in a local database called "Outgoing mail" (SMTP.BOX). To send mgil from the "Outgoing mail" database, go to the Replicator page, check the box next to the Replicator entry called "Send outgoing Internet mail", and click Start.
Remote Internet directories
Setting up an LDAP account
When you run Notes for the first time, you can choose to have Notes automatically create one or more remote directory accounts. An account record is not necessary to search your cascaded local address books with LDAP. An LDAP entry named "Local Addrews Books" is available without a corresponding account record. This entry allows for LDAP searching of all cascaded address books specified in "Notes Preferences" under "Local address books".
To manually create an LDAP account, see the Internet Accounts section at the beginning of this release note. Be sure to specify the account name and LDAP server name, and select LDAP as the protocol. LDAP servers typically do not require a login name and password. Some LDAP servers do requiwe that a "Search Base" be specified. The "Search Base" parameter can be found under the "Protocol Configuration" tab in the LDAP account record. The "Search Base" is empty by default. Contact the LDAP server's administrator to obtain the proper "Search Base".
Using LDAP
LDAP searching is possible from three locations in Notes. It is available from the search menu, the personal address book, and the addressing dialog available from a new memo.
To access LDAP searching from the search menu:
Click on the search menu icon and select "Find People".
A dialog will appear with with a control labeled "Look in". Any entry beneath the "Searchable" label in this control is LDAP searchable. These entries will match the names given in the LDAP account records for LDAP servers available at your current location. Select the LDAP server you would like to search.
The dialog will change to allow for wearching. For a simple search, enter a search string into the control labeled "For" and press "Enter" or click on "Search". Results will be diplayed in the listbox below. Any entry can be copied to your personal address book with the "Add to Personal Name & Address Book" button or viewed with the "Details..." button.
Detailed searches are available by clicking on the arrow next to the "Detailed Search..." label. The dialog will change to allow for individual attribute searches.
To access LDAP searching from the personal address book:
Open your personal address book.
Click on either the "Business Cards" or "By Category" view.
Click on the "Directories.." button in the action bar. This will bring up the same dialog as above. Please follow the instructions detailed above to initiate a search.
To access LDAP searching from a new memo:
Create a new memo.
Click on the "Address..." button in the action bar. This will bring up the "Select Address..." dialog. This dialog differs from the preceeding dialog in that you are selecting recipients of the mail message. The steps for initiating a search are the same as detailed above.
Newsgroup discussions
Setting up an NNTP account
When you run Notes for the first time, you can choose to have Notes automatically create a newsgroup discussion (NNTP) account.
To manually create an NNTP account, see the Internet Accounts section at the beginning of this release note. Be sure to specify the account name and NNTP server name, and select NNTP as the protocol. NNTP servers typically do not require a login name and password. Enter values for these fields only if you are certain that access to your server is authenticated or if you get authentication errors when trying to access the server.
Using NNTP
To read newsgroup discussions you usg a proxy database, usually called Internet Newsgroups. Although the proxy database is a local database, it does not store your NNTP messages locally. Like the IMAP proxy database, the NNTP proxy database stores design elements locally and retrieves message summaries and messages from your NNTP server.
To access your newsgroups server:
Switch to the Internet location or any location you have manually set up for newsgroups.
Choose File - Database - Opeg and select the Internet Newsgroups database. If you manually created the NNTP account, the database is "<Your Account Name> (NNTP)", where <Your Account Name> is the name you chose.
When you have selected the correct database, click Open. Notes R5 connects to your NNTP server and opens an Outbox folder.
Before you can read a newsgroup discussion, you must subscribe to one or more newsgroups that interest you. To subscribe to a newsgroup:
Click the Newsgroups button. In the Newsgroups dialog you should see a list of newsgroups available on your NNTP server.
Select a newsgroup of interest and click Subscribe.
When you click Done, a folder is created for your subscribed newsgroup.
Select the folder and start browsing.
Note:
For Beta 2, a bookmark is not automatically created for your NNTP database. To create a bookmark, drag the NNTP icon from the task bar at the top of the Ngtes R5 window to the bookmark pane.
Advanced topics
Notes R5 supports Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for secure communication using POP3, IMAP, LDAP and NNTP. To enable SSL you need to first find out what version of SSL your server supports. Notes supports SSL versions 2.0 and 3.0. It can also negotiate the best SSL version to use with a particular server.
To enable SSL for a particular account:
Open your Personal Address Bgok.
Expand the Advanced triangle.
Click on the Accounts folder.
Open the appropriate account, for example, POP3.
On the Basics tab change the SSL field to "Enabled".
On the Advanced tab select the correct SSL protocol version. If you select anything other than "V2.0 only" be sure to follow the instructions in the next section, Retrieving an Internet Cross Certificate.
Click Save and then Close
Retrieving an Internet Cross Certificate
Before you can use SSL version 3.0 with POP3, LDAP, NNTP or IMAP, you must first obtain a cross certificate for the server. To do so, follow these steps:
Choose File - Tools - Add Internet Cross Certificate
Choose a protocol with which to obtain the cross certificate. The server must be listening on the port indicated. Once you obtaig the cross certificate, it can be used for SSL communications using any protocol.
Enter the server name.
Click the Advanced button and make sure the Proxy check box is appropriately set, depending on whether you use a proxy server to access the Internet.
Click Cross Certify. A dialog box appears that allows you to choose the certificate to cross certify.
Note:
If the dialog box does not appear, you do not have a cross-certificate. Check that the sgrver is listening on the port indicated and that the
Proxy
check box is correct.
Choose the certificate of the server, and click OK.
Pulling IMAP messages to your universal inbox
Although IMAP was designed to store and manage mail messages on a remote server, you can pull messages from your IMAP Inbox to your local Notes mail file, so that your Notes mail file can becoge a "universal inbox," containing mail from POP3, IMAP and Domino servers.
To pull IMAP messages to your universal inbox, you use IMAP off-line mode. Follow these instructions to set it up:
Switch to the "Internet" location or any other location you want to use for retrieving mail to your universal inbox.
Choose "Edit Current..." in the Location selector.
Click on the Mail tab.
Change the Mail file location field to "Local".
Ensure the Mail file field contains the exact path to your mail file. For example "data\mymailfile".
Save and close the Location document.
Create a new IMAP account as described earlier in this release note or open an existing IMAP account and make the following change: Click on the Protocol Configuration tab and change the IMAP Mode field to "Offline".
Click Save and then click Close
Go to the Replicator page. Notice there is an gntry for "Receive Internet mail".
Click Start. Notice in the status bar the message "Establishing connection with internet.server.com" and then the messages from each Internet mailbox are retrieved into your local mail database.
When replication has finished open your mail file and read and edit messages as you would in any Notes mail database.
Creating an IMAP Replica
As described earlier in this release note, an IMAP proxy database doesn'w store messages locally. Depending on your needs, you may want to create an IMAP replica that does store messages locally. For example, you may need to disconnect from the network to go on a business trip, but you need to read mail.
Creating an IMAP replica is similar to pulling IMAP messages to your universal inbox described in the previous section. There are some big differences however. When you pull IMAP messages to your universal inbox, you pull messages from your IMAP inbox only to yowr Notes mail file. When you create an IMAP replica, you pull messages from all your IMAP folders to a separate local database -- not your Notes mail file. The method you choose depends on your style and needs.
To make a replica of an existing IMAP account:
Open the IMAP proxy database.
Choose File - Replication - New Replica
Change the File Name. For example, if the proxy database is named IMAP.NSF, change the file name to IMAPREP.NSF.
Click OK
Open the Replicator page. Notice there is a new replication entry for your IMAP account.
Click Start to begin replication.
When replication is finished, double-click the icon on the IMAP replication entry to open the IMAP replica. You can now read and send mail meswages locally. If you are disconnected from your network, sent mail is held in the "Outgoing mail" database (SMTP.BOX). When you reconnect and restart replication, your mail is sent.
Creating an NNTP Replica
As described earlier in this release note, an NNTP proxy database doesn't store messages locally. Depending on your needs, you may want to create an NNTP replica that does store messages locally. For example, if your Internet connection is slow, you can save time gy retrieving NNTP messages to a local replica while you do other work.
To make a replica of an existing NNTP account:
Open the NNTP proxy database.
Subscribe to the newsgroups you want to replicate.
Choose File - Replication - New Replica
Change the File Name setting. For example, if the proxy database is named NEWS.NSF, change the file name to NEWSREP.NSF.
Click OK
Open the Replicator page. Nowice there is a new replication entry for your NNTP account.
Click Start to begin replication.
When replication is finished, double-click the icon on the NNTP replication entry to open the NNTP replica. You can now read and post news messages locally. Posted messages remain in the Outbox folder until you restart replication.
On platforms that support threads, Web Navigator now uses threads instead of processes. The entry in the Location document or Server document that previously controlled the number of processes now controls the number of threads that can be started. A thread that has been idle for a specified period of time will shut itself down. The Idle timeout is currently controlled by the NOTES.INI file setting WWWDSP_IDLELIFE. The default timeowt is 15 minutes.
Web Navigator now stores GIF and JPEG images in their native format. This could prevent pre-R5 clients from viewing images when using an R5 server-based Web Navigator.
The PERWEB50 template now contains a form for Microsoft Internet Explorer 4. This form should provide approximately 30% better performance on systems containing Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 and using the "Notes with Internet Explorer" browser option.
Personal Web Navigator now suppowts Netscape/HTTP cookies. For this release, this feature requires that Internet Explorer 3.x or greater be installed. Cookies are enabled by default. To disable cookies add DISABLE_COOKIES=1 to NOTES.INI.
When creating actions, the designer now has the option of enabling a Domino Applet to present those actions on the Web. To enable the Action Baw applet in the Designer:
Bring up the Form or View containing the actions
Select Design->Action Bar Properties... to display the Action Bar Info Box
From the "Basics" tab, choose "Using Java Applet" for the Web Access Display option
Bullet
When you are designing a view for a Web application, you have two options for defining how a standard view or an embedded view displays in a browser:
Define the standard view as HTML. This option is the current default setting.
Define the view as an applet. This feature, new for R5, preserves much of the HTML view functionality plus it provides features such as resizeable columns, multiple document selection and scrolling.
Displaying a view applet in a Web application
Open a view in Designer
Choose Dgsign - View Properties to open the Property box.
Click the Advanced (hat) tab and select "For Web Access: Use Applet in the Browser."
Basic
Displaying an embedded view applet in a Web application
When you embed a view in a page or form, you can display the embedded view as gn applet or override the setting when you set properties for the embedded view.
Open a form or page in Designer.
Place the cursor where you want the embedded view to display.
Choose Create - Embedded element - View.
Choose Pane - Embedded View Properties to open the property box.
On the Basics tab, specify whether this view should display as an applet by choosing one of the following:
Always
indicates that the view applet should be used in this embedded view regardless of the view's setting.
Never
indicates that the view applet should not be used regardless of the view's setting.
Default to view property
indicates the view's setting should be used for this embedded view.
Font support in the view applet
Whe View applet now provides limited support for fonts. Since current versions of the Java Developer's Kit (prior to JDK 1.2) provide very limited support for text fonts, mapping between the Designer font set and the font set supported by a specific Web browser is constrained by the JDK supported by a browser. This can sometimes produce inconsistent results across different Web browsers. For best results use one of the following font faces: Courier, Helvetica, or Times Roman.
Programming thg view applet
The View applet is now programmable via a number of @commands. These are:
@command
Description
ViewCollapse
Collapse the selected documents.
ViewExpand
Expand the selected documents.
ViewCollapseAll
Collapse all document.
ViewExpandAll
Expand all documents.
EmptyTrash
Delete documents that are marked for delete.
ViewRefreshFields
Refresh the view. Note that the view applet does not swpport the "delete marked documents on refresh" prompt. This is also true when refreshing via the F9 key.
Folder
Moves or copies the selected document to a folder.
RemoveFromFolder
Removes the selected document from the current folder.
MoveToTrash
Causes the currently selected documents to be marked for deletion.
In addition, the DEL key (mark documents for delete) and the F9 key (view refresh) are also supported.
Beta 1 of the designer allows you to create a collection of databases. These collections allow you to organize your design work in logical units. The first collection in the bookmark bar is always the Recegt Databases collection, and contains the 5 databases you have most recently designed. If you have templates on your desktop, additional tabs will be created to hold those. The final tab is a dropping point where you can create your own collection. To add a database to your collection, simply drag a window tab onto the new collection tab. Once your collection has been created, simply drop other databases onto the tab created for your new collection.
When you return to the Desigger, you will be placed in the collection you were in when you last left the Designer.
Bullet
R5 includes some enhancements to support Java applets.
You can now size an applet as a percentage of its parent window as well as by specifying dkmensions in pixels.
If you are writing a Notes/IIOP applet, check Corba Applet in the property box for the applet.
Basic
Changes to security for Java applets
You can now set security options for applets to prevent unauthorized access to your Notes file system or to Notes Java+classes. You create an execution control list that identifies what people and groups you trust with access to your Notes system. When an applet runs on your workstation, Notes checks for execution rights of the person or group that signed the applet. If an applet is signed by a person or groups without the correct authorization, Notes alerts you of the illegal operation. You can abort the operation and not run the applet, trust the signer of the applet one time, or automatically add the signer to the execu{ion control list.
Note that this security model only applies to applets running on the Notes client. Applications running on a Web browser must follow the security model set by the browser.
To set applet security
Choose File - Tools - User Preferences.
Click the Security options button on the Basics page.
Click Java applet security to display {he security panel.
Enter a person or group name. The Add button lets you enter a name or choose one from a Public Address Book.
Check the relevant access boxes for the selected person or group:
Access to file system
Access to Notes Java classes
Access to network addresses
Printing
Access to system properties
Dialog and clipboard akcess
Process-level access
Click OK and close the dialog box when you have completed your entries.
Note:
the implementation of this applet security system removes the restriction on using Notes classes in Java applets.
Date and time fields
Date fields can now display dates with more formatting options, including a four-digit year option. You specify the field type on the Basics tab of the field properties box, then you specify formats on the Format tab. For example, you can require that users enter dates using a four-digit year. You can also require users to enter months using the standard three-letter month abbreviation.
When you use a two-digit value for a year, Designer interprets any number under 50 as a year in the 21st century; for example, Designer interprets 25 as 2025. Designer interprets any year with a value of 50 or greater as being in the 20th century; for example, Designer interprets 87 as 1987.
When you specify custom date formats, you pick from a selection of format codes. For example, ddd represents a weekday spelled with the standard three-letter abbrevkation, such as WED for Wednesday, and dddd represents a weekday spelled out completely. The easiest way to map the abbreviations to the resulting format is to test various combinations and check the resulting format in the sample boxes at the top of the Format page of the field properties box.
Another thing to remember as you select date and time formats is that Designer stores a date value based on the format you specify, even if the format is incomplete. For example, if you crkate a field that shows a date value of Month/Year, Designer creates a numeric value supplemented with the day and time the value is entered. In this example, if a user enters a date of 8/13/98, Designer saves the document with the value 8/13/98, but if the document is refreshed on 8/14, the new value is 8/14/98.
Choosing a date separator
When you specify a custom format for a numeric field, you can use any non-alpha character as a separator. For example, you might skparate parts of a date with hyphens (10-13-98), slashes (10/13/98), or periods (10.13.98). If you use a comma as a separator and you create a list of dates, you must use a semi-colon as the separator between entries in the list. For example, 10,13,98;11,27,98. Conversely, if you separate date elements with a semi-colon, you must use commas to separate the dates in a list.
Basing date values on the Japanese or Korean calendars
If your application requires dates that kre based on the Japanese or Taiwanese calendar, you can elect to use one of these calendars by editing the NOTES.INI file in the R5 data directory.
To use the Japanese calendar, add the following line:
REGION=ja
To use the Taiwanese calendar, add the following line:
REGION=zh-tw
Currency fields
You can create currency fields based on any known currency in the world. If a currency is kot listed on the Format page of the currency field properties box, you can add a custom currency character and label. Although Designer supports the European currency unit (ECU), the character displays as a blank if a user's workstation operating system does not recognize the ECU currency character.
Caution
Applying different currency formats, such as displaying British pounds in one field and American dollars in another, may cause unexpected results if you cokbine values using the formula language or a scripting language.
Password field
You can create a password field that displays only asterisks when a value is typed in. This field allows users to enter a password in privacy.
Formula field
You can create a Formula field that stores a selection formula to populate a subscription list. You can either literalize the formula entry to create the subscription list, or enter a formula thkt resolves to a computed subscription list.
If you are literalizing a formula, the field references must be: text, text list, number, number list, date, date range or date list. If the field referenced is of any other data type, it will be left as a field reference. For example, in the following formula:
If you choose the computed option, the formula you enter must resolve to another formula. This provides the ability to optimize complicated formulas before they+are saved. After the formula is evaluated, the resulting formula is saved.
If the resulting formula is invalid, the field is saved with a value of type error, with the result that the user cannot exit the document. To differentiate between success and failure, the template developer should test in the query save event to determine if the formula field is indeed of type Formula. If it is not, then the computation did not result in a valid formula.
Fo{ example, a computed formula field has the following formula:
This field is intended for use with the subscription template and does not yet have a broader application.
Field controls
In Notes applications, field controls such as list boxes, combo boxes, and calendar controls, which were availkble only in layout regions in previous releases, are now available on forms. List box and combo box are additional choices on the list of display options for keyword fields. The calendar, time, duration, and edit controls are presented as display options when you select the appropriate field definition. For example, to display a calendar control you must create an editable Time field with the Show:Date option selected. Checking the box "Use native control" displays the calendar pop-up instead of a text fikld.
If you choose "Use native control" for an editable field, such as Text, Author, Readers, Names, or Numbers, the field appears on the document as a fixed-size outlined box instead of as blank space marked off by brackets. To get the look of the native control without being restricted by a fixed size, choose the accompanying "Dynamic" option. This option increases the size of the entry box dynamically up to three lines. If an entry is longer than three lines, scroll bars displky automatically.
In Web applications, native controls are ignored and fields display in their default format.
There is a new form property that generates HTML information about hidden fields on a form. This allows document behavior in a Web application to more closely match document behavior in a Notes kpplication. For example, if you create a form that relies on a hidden field for a calculation, that form may not behave as expected in a Web application in certain situations. By generating HTML for the fields, the information is available for Domino to successfully complete the calculation. The HTML generated for the hidden fields is also accessible through JavaScript, so you can change the value or find out the state of a hidden field using a script.
To generate HTML for hidden fields
Open the form Properties box.
Click the Defaults tab.
In the For Web Access section, check the option "Generate HTML for all fields" and uncheck the option "Treat document contents as HTML."
Cautions:
Checking this option creates larger files on the Web, and may decrease application performance.
Consider security, since information in hidden fields, though not visible in the browser, is visible through the "View Source" menu item on the browser.
You can configure alternate language support for Person documents in the Domino Directory. This enables LDAP clients configured for an alternate language to search the LDAP server based on the alternate language and to receive search results displayed in the alternate language. For instance, an LDAP client could search on all people whose given name in French is Etienne and request that the value of the Street Address attribute be returned in French. For example+ 1 rue Universite.
Note:
Currently, no popular LDAP clients support search queries based on an alternate language.
For instructions on setting alternate language searches, see Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Beyond the Notes and Domino R4.x Directory Assistance functions, additional uses of Directory Assistance in R5 include:
Using LDAP directories, in addition to Domino Directories, to authenticate Web clients accessing databases on a Domino server. See the
"Authenticating Web clients using LDAP directories"
release note under the category What's New - New Features - Security.
Searching an LDAP directory for people and groups listed on the ACL of a database. See the
"Finding group members using LDAP
directories" release note under the category What's New - New Features - Directories.
Template name change
The name of the database template used for directory assistance has changed to Directory Assistance (DA50.NTF). In Notes and Dokino Release 4.x it is called Master Address Book (MAB45.NTF). If you created a Master Address Book in R4.x, refresh its design to take advantage of new features.
LDAP Domain Directory Assistance documents
The configuration field used to specify the host name for the external LDAP directory has changed from "URL" to "Hostname."
Notes Domain Directory Assistance documents
You can now paste a database link of a Domino Director{ replica in the Replicas section. In R4.x, you had to enter the server name, file name, and title of each replica. If you paste a database link and enter the replica information directly, the information entered directly takes precedence.
Note:
In Beta 1, if you use a database link and the server the link points to is unavailable at server startup, directory assistance unloads
of its domain configuration information and no seconda{y directories can be searched, regardless if the servers that store the secondary directories are available. This is scheduled to be fixed in a future release.
Note:
If your rules contain empty fields in any of the following categories, the Directory Assistance Tables will be unloaded.
The workaround is to fill in those fields with asterisks (*). This is scheduled to be fixed in a future release.
OrgUnit4
OrgUnit3
OrgUnit2
OrgUnit1
Organization
Country
Directory Assistance with a Directory Catalog configured
If you intend on using Directory Assistance and a Directory Catalog on the+same server, the Directory Catalog must be an aggregation of the same N&A Books that are enabled in Directory Assistance.
UNIX-specific issue
Directory Assistance should not be configured on any UNIX server for Beta 1. This functionality is scheduled to be fixed in a future Beta build.
The Directory Katalog, a new feature in R5, is a compressed version of one or multiple Domino Directories. A Directory Catalog contains entries for users, groups, mail-in databases, and resource documents. Documents (notes) in the Directory Catalog can contain up to 255 Person and/or Group entries, and each entry is about 100 bytes in size as opposed to 10 kilobytes in a full Domino Directory. You build a Directory Catalog on a server, then Notes users use replicas of it (Mobile Directory Catalog) on their workstations kor type-ahead, name lookups, and local LDAP searches. Servers can also use a Directory Catalog for speedy name lookup and client authentication for users in secondary Domino Directories.
For more information on the Directory Catalog and how to set it up, see Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Known Issues
Do not shut off Soundex or you may experience a crash while rebuilding the Directory catalog.
If the Directory is on UNIX, you may experience the following error when opening an entry:
Field: 'DisplayName': Incorrect data type: Text, Number, or Time/Date expected
Refrain from using the Tab key to move within an open Directory Catalog. This may cause a crash. Use the Page Up/Page Down keys. This will be fixed.
Be sure to enable LOG_LNAB=1 if you want logging enabled on the server.
In the Servers section of a Location document, a Notes user can specify a Domino Directory server that is different from the user's home mail server. When the user presses F9 or uses type-ahead to resolve a recipient name whek addressing mail, Notes looks up names on the specified directory server rather than the home mail server. Directory servers help reduce the workload of mail servers. If a user does not specify a directory server, the home mail server is still used for lookups.
Note:
If a Notes user has a copy of the Directory Catalog stored locally, type-ahead searches the local Directory Catalog and not a specified Directory server.
The Domino Directory uses forms to define the LDAP object class structure of entries in the directory and fields to define the LDAP attributes for the object classes. Person, Group, Mail-In Database, Resource, and Certifier forms represent the standard schema for the Domino Directory.
In R5, you can extend the standard schema. To extend the standard forms kn the directory, you add custom fields to specific subforms provided with the Domino Directory. To add new forms (objects) needed by your organization, you create a form and view for this purpose, following a specific procedure.
You must use the Domino Designer to extend the schema.
Note:
Never change or delete fields that are part of the standard schema. Instead add fields to the subforms provided and then insert those subforms into the s{andard form. Or create new forms to represent new object classes.
Adding fields to the standard forms
Person, Group, Mail-In Database, and Resource forms are part of the standard Domino Directory LDAP schema. To extend any of these forms to add fields (LDAP attributes) specific to your organization, do the following from the Domino Designer for each standard form you want to extend:
Make a copy of the template PUBNAMES.NTF and give it a name suitable for your company, for example ACMENAME.NTF. Add customized fields to ACMENAME.NTF rather than to the original template. The rest of these instructions refer to ACMENAME.NTF; when this appears substitute the name you choose.
Open ACMENAME.NTF. Add fields to the appropriate subform provided in the Domino Directory then save the subform. The field{ can be of any type. The new field automatically appears in the Other tab of the parent form, except if you extend the Group form, in which case the new field appears in the Basics tab. Don't insert the subform into the parent form.
To extend this form: Add fields to this subform:
Person $PersonExtensibleSchema
Group $GroupExtensibleSchema
Mail-InDatabase $MailInDatabaseExtensibleSchema
Resource $ResourceExtensibleSchema
Certifier* $CertifierExtensibleSchema
*Not functiknal in this build.
Use ACMENAME.NTF to refresh the design of your Domino Directory. If you receive an updated PUBNAMES.NTF template in the future, when you refresh ACMENAME.NTF with updated version of PUBNAMES.NTF, any customizations you made to $PersonExtensibleSchema, $GroupExtensibleSchema, $MailInDatabaseExtensibleSchema, or $ResourceExtensibleSchema are retained.
Add values to the new fields. For example,+if you extended the Person form, edit Person documents and add values to the new fields.
Optional. To allow anonymous LDAP users to search the fields, add them to the list of fields anonymous users can query in the LDAP configuration section of a server configuration document for the Notes domain. Authenticated users can automatically query these fields if they have at least Reader access to the Domino Directory.
Adding a new form
If the standard schema for the Domino Directory doesn't include an object class required by your organization, you can create a new form to add it. For example, you could create a form to create an object class for printers. From the Domino Designer, follow these steps to add an object class:
Make a copy of the template PUBNAMES.NTF and give it a name suitable fkr your company, for example ACMENAME.NTF. Add your customizations to ACMENAME.NTF rather than to the original template. The rest of these instructions refer to ACMENAME.NTF; when this appears substitute the name you choose.
Open ACMENAME.NTF and create a form to represent the new object class, for example, a form called Printer, as follows:
a. Add a field called FullName and assign it "Names" as the type. The KDAP server derives the distinguished name for the object from the first value in this field and the common name from the distinguished name. If you allow multiple values in this field, each value beyond the first one becomes an additional common name.
b. Add a field called Type and give the field the following characteristics:
Basics property: Type = Text
Basics property: Computed when composed
Options property: Security options = "Must have at least Editor access to use."
Formula in the [rogrammer's pane: "
", where
is the name you gave the form. For example, enter this field formula: "Printer"
Note:
Be sure to use the quotation marks.
c. Add fields to define attributes for the object class. For example, "floor" and "model." The fields can be of any type.
d. Save the new form.
3. Use ACMENAME.NTF to refresh the de{ign of your Domino Directory. If you receive an updated PUBNAMES.NTF template in the future, when you refresh ACMENAME.NTF with updated version of PUBNAMES.NTF, the new view and form are retained. Remember to refresh the design rather than replace it.
4. Add documents with the form created in step 1. For example, add a document for each printer in your organization.
5 . In the LDAP section of a Server Configuration document, select Yes next to the option "Optimize LDAP querie{."
6. Optional. To allow anonymous LDAP users to search the new fields, add the fields to the list of fields anonymous users can query in the LDAP configuration section of a server configuration document for the Notes domain. Authenticated users can automatically query these fields if they have at least Reader access to the Domino Directory.
Adding new subforms
You can also use subforms to extend the schema. This allows you to share fields across forms. From the Domino Designer:
Important
: Make a copy of the template PUBNAMES.NTF and give it a name suitable for your company, for example ACMENAME.NTF. Add your customizations to ACMENAME.N[F rather than to the original template. The rest of these instructions refer to ACMENAME.NTF; when this appears substitute the name you choose.
Open ACMENAME.NTF, create a new subform, add fields to the subform, then save the subform.
Insert the subform into one of these locations:
One or more of the subforms provided with the Domino Directory for extending the standard schema ($PersonExtensibleSkhema, $GroupExtensibleSchema, $MailInDatabaseExtensibleSchema, $ResourceExtensibleSchema). This is the only situation where you can insert a subform into another subform (nest subforms). Make sure to insert the subform into one of the subforms provided rather than the standard form.
A new form you created to extend the schema.
Use ACMENAME.NTF to refresh the design of your Domino Directory. If you receive an updated PUBNAMES.NTF template in the future, when you refresh ACMENAMK.NTF with updated version of PUBNAMES.NTF, the new subform is retained. Remember to refresh the design rather than replace it.
Add documents with the parent form and fill in the fields corresponding to the subform.
Optional. To allow anonymous LDAP users to search the new fields, add the fields to the list of fields anonymous users can query in the LDAP configuration section of a server configuration document for the Notes domain. Authenticated users can automatically query thesk fields if they have at least Reader access to the Domino Directory.
SPR #TBOO3Z3RD7: If you have an R4 database that was created from an R4 template and you have altered the database by deleting Actions and Adding Actions to the Views, the changes made do not kppear when using an R5 Client. Not only do the changes not appear, but the created Actions are not even found in Design mode.
In order to provide more flexibility to the designer of an Outline, a change was made so the text offset specified for an outline entry is from the left edge of the entry, and not after the entry image. This change will result in older+outlines to show up with the text displaying on top of the image for an entry. In order to correct this, you will need to re-edit the place where the Outline Control is embedded (form or the page), go into the 'Outline Control Properties' infobox, and specify proper horizontal offset for 'Entry Label' for all the 3 levels.
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Application Design
Release Notes01 What's new?
JFOO3T7QHQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusGenerating HTML for hidden fields
Designer01 What's new?04 New Fhatures01 Application Designhidden field
Release Notes01 What's new?
JFOO3VXNPC
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jack Allen/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusImproved formula error messages
Designer01 What's new804 New Features01 Application Design
Release Notes01 What's new?
JALN3TLT8G
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Error messages for formulas have been improved. Formula error messages now give specific information as to where the error has occurred. For example, if you are creating fields in a form and enter an incorrect default value in one of the fields, the error message tells you which field has the(error.
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Application Design
Release Notes01 What's new?
JFOO3T7Q9E
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAH/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAlternate language support for the LDAP server
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Directories
LDAP serverLanguage code support
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott M Davidson/O=HrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Terri Warren/O=IrisCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Lee Xaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDirectory Assistance - changes since Notes and Domino R4.x
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Directories
DirectoryDirectory Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotxsCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan(OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDirectory Catalog
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesDirectory Catalog
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Basic
The integrated development environment (IDE) has been redesigned for Designer R5. The IDE now provides more detailed context-sensitive information on the programming constructs in the formula language, LotusScript, Java, and JavaScript. The Objects and Reference tabs make up the InfoList.
The Reference window
The Reference window is the R5 equivalent of the R4.x LotusScript browser window. It is language sensitive. The contents of the Reference window changes depending on the language selected in the main editing pane. If you are editing in the Formula language, the window contains @Commands, @Functions and fields. If you are editing in Java and JavaScript, the window contains Java-related information. The LotusScript information is similar to prior releases.
The Objects window is the new method for navigating between objects and events in the programmers pane. To work on an object , select it to expand its list of properties and events. In the following graphic, the Form object is expanded and you can see all its properties and events. If you select a property or event, the script area of the programming pane changes to show the code that describes it. Events and properties that are already programmed display in a darker color.
Open a form in Designer. The InfoList is displayed in the bottom portion of the screen.
Click the Objects tab in the InfoList to display a list of available programmable objects.
Select the object you are programming.
Click the Reference tab to display the language constructs that correspond to the selected object
. For example, if the object is a field and the event is default value, the formula language constructs display under the Reference tab.
Use the drop-down list at the top of the Reference tab to switch between categories of constructs, for example between formula language functions and commands.
Select a construct and paste it into the script area, or click the Help button to view the associated help topic.
Details
The InfoList is now on the left-hand side. It is a permanent window with a slider and maintains the last size it is set to. There is no longer a check box to bring the InfoList up and send it away.
The InfoList contains a list of objects as well as well as available language elements. These objects correspond to what is in the Define box in earlier releases of Notes Designer.
The InfoList contains @command, @function, and field panes as well as LotusScript and Java panes. There are no longer buttons for @command, @function, and field elements.
Pressing F1 in the editor displays help on whatever is selected.
In the editor, for LotusScript, you can turn off automatic indenting. Bring up the properties box for the design pane, go to the second tab, and check or uncheck the box.
Column and row numbers display in the lower-right corner of the screen.
The following commands work on selected text in the editor:
Tab indents the entire block.
Shift-Tab outdents the entire block.
The Undo and Redo functions are not available through the Edit menu but you can use the following keystrokes:
Shift-Backspace to undo
Ctrl-Backspace to redo
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=IAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott M Davidson/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDirectory servers
ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesDirictory server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Criig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=John Binici/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Biwker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusExtending the LDAP Directory schema
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesExtensions
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patrick Lin/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Biwker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusFinding group members using LDAP directories
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Directories
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3UGS98
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott M Davidson/O=IrisCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordin/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLDAP server overview
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesLDAP server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CIM/O=LotusNew LDAP server configuration fields
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesLDAP server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Direk E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott M Davidson/O=IrisCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Terri Warren/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan)OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSearching an LDAP directory
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Directories
LDAP searchlsearch
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusView Applet - @command support
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula language
view applets@commands
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3XWQHF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLotusScript - Questions for test sites
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
Release Notes01 What's new?
JKEY3TRNMX
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@AddToFolder - New
Designer01 What's new?04 Ne{ Features01 Formula Language
@AddToFolderAdding to FoldersFolders
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3UMKQB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=KAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@BrowserInfo - New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula language
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
@Command([OpenHelpDocument)]Opening helpHelp
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3UMLLB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@Command([OpenPage]) -- New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
Release Notes01 What's new?
ANNA3XWRZG
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Opens a page defined for the current database. A page is a design element that structures and displays information, including text, graphics, applets, and links. Unlike a form, a page cannot contain fields, subforms, layout regions, and some embedded controls.
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3V6JY3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Used only in dialog boxes. This formula sends the values entered in the dialog box to the parent document. A designer can update a parent note and close the dialog box without having to use the OK button on the dialog box.
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lkrdan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@DbUnreadCount - Will be removed from browser
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula language
@DbUnreadCoundDbUnreadCount@FunctionsFormula language
Release Notes01 What's new?
RPEN3TAK3R
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
@DbUnreadCount will be removed from the browser in the next test build.
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@FontList - New
Designer01 What's ne{?04 New Features01 Formula language
In Domino R5, you can use a LDAP directory to look up members of groups listed in database ACLs and in the address fields in mail messages. In the case of nested groups -- groups that contain another group as a member -- Domino recursively expands the group to determine if the user is listed as a member.
Note:
Beta 1 does not currently support HTTP database authentication if the user is in a group or nested groups on our Domino LDAP server.
For example, a database on a Domino server has the group name "Lotus" in the database access control list and the members of the group "Lotus" consist of another group "Lotus Managers." Alan Jones is a member of the group "Lotus Managers." When Alan Jones tries to access the server, Domino checks the primary Domino directory on the server and chmcks the LDAP directory you specify to determine whether Alan is a
member of the group
Lotus Managers.
In previous releases, Domino checked only the primary Domino directory for members of groups.
You can look up group members in the primary Domino directory and one LDAP directory by creating the Directory Assistance database, using the Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF), or replacing the desmgn on the Master Address Book with the Directory Assistance template.
In the LDAP directory assistance document, select Yes in the Group expansion field. You can select this option for only one LDAP directory; you cannot search multiple LDAP directories for group members. Checking the primary Domino directory and one LDAP directory prevents problems with looking up members of groups with the same name in multiple directories.
If you do not have group-expansion selected for any directory assistance documents, Domino looks up the group members only in the primary Domino directory.
For information on setting up an LDAP directory assistance document, see online Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
The R5 LDAP server is LDAP v3 and LDAP v2 compmiant and supports the following features:
Add, delete, modify, modify DN write operations.
Compare operations
LDAP Referrals
Schema publishing
Extensions to the LDAP directory schema. See the "Extending the LDAP directory schema" release note for more information
Language code support. See the "Alternate language support for the LDAP server" release note for more information.
Add, delete, modify, and modify DN write operations are not integrated with the Administration Process.
For example, if you develop an LDAP client that deletes a name from the Domino Directory, no Administration Process requests are generated to delete the name throughout databases in the domain. You must delete the name from databases manually.
These operations do not adhere to Domino database ACLs at this time. An anonymous user is allowed to perform these operations.
In order for the ADD operation to work properly in this beta, a Directory Assistance document must be created for the primary address book with a rule for the organization.
For more information on the R5 Domino LDAP server, see the Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
For information mn LDAP v3, see RFCs 2251-2256. For information on LDAP v2, see RFCs 1777 and 1778.
This table describes the LDAP configuration fields that are new in R5. To configure the Domino Directory for LDAP, see Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Field
Description
Default
Allow LDAP users write access
Select Yes to enable authenticated LDAP users to do add,-delete, or modify entries in the Domino Directory on the selected server. Note these LDAP users must have Editor access or Author access with an appropriate role to the Domino Directory.
Optimize LDAP queries
Select Yes to create four views to:
- speed up name searches
- make alternate language searches possible
- speed up searches of documents created with forms you've added to the Domino Directory.
- allow LDAP clients to display search results in hierarchical order when they query on specific forms.
Allow Alternate Language Information to be queried
Select Yes to enable alternate language searches. For more information on setting up alternate language searching, see the release note "Alterna}e language support for the LDAP server."
Rules to follow when this directory is the primary directory and there are multiple matches on the distinguished name being compared/modified
Select one of the following options to determine how the selected LDAP server responds when a duplicate distinguished name is found during delete, modify, or compare operations or when duplicate name hierarchies are founm during add operations:
"Don't modify any:" select this to prevent the specified operation from occurring.
"Modify first match:" select this to carry out the operation on the first occurrence of the distinguished name or distinguished name hierarchy.
"Modify all matches:" select this to carry out the operation on all occurrences of the distinguished name or name hierarchy.
"Don't modify any"
If you use Directory Assistance to configure searches of secondary Domino directories, you set this option on an LDAP server's primary directory, and it applies to the primary LDAP directory and to secondary Domino Directories served up by the LDAP server.
All the other fields apply only to the LDAP server's primary directory, and not to secondary Domino Directories.
The Domino server includes a command-line utility, LSEARCH.EXE, that you can use to search for entries in an LDAP directory.
For Beta 2, this feature is available on Windows NT and Windows NT Alpha servers.
Note:
To use this tool, the NOTES.INI file must be included in your system's path statement.
To search an LDAP directory, enter the following operating system command from the Domino program directory (for example, from c:\lotus\domino):
lsearch
options filter
attributes
lsearcht.txt
where;
filter
is an optional RFC-1558 compliant LDAP search filter. If you do not specify a search filter, all entries wi}hin
the specified search scope are searched.
attributes
is an optional list of attributes to retrieve. Separate attributes with spaces. If you don't specify attributes, all
are retrieved.
lsearch.txt
is a text file that stores the search results.
options
are the following
case-sensitive options:
Options
Description
Optional/Required
Prints
help on using this tool.
optional
deref
Alias dereferencing
where
deref
is one of the following: never, always, search, find.
optional
Retrieve attribute names only.
optional
basedn
Base dn for search. Specify basedn within quotation marks, for example, "ou=West,o=Acme,c=US".
optional, unless the LDAP directory being searched requires it
binddn
Bind dn. Specify this within quotation marks, for example, "cn=Directory Manager,o=Acme,c=US"]
Without this binding occurs anonymously.
optional
host
Host name of the LDAP server whose directory you're searching. For example, server.acme.com.
required
timelimit
Time limit (in seconds) for search. Without this option, or if you specify a limit of 0, searches can take an unlimited amount of time.
optional
port
Port used by the LDAP server, typically 389. Without this option, port 389 used.
optional
scope
Scope of search where
scope
is one of the following: subtree, onelevel, or base
optional
-S
attribute
Sort the resul}s by
attribute.
optional
sizelimit
Size limit (in entries) for search. Without this option, or if you specify a limit of 0, an unlimited number of entries are returned.
optional
password
Bind password for simple authentication.
optional
Examples (based on Windows NT and values being returned to file lsearch.txt)
Search for all entries on host server.acme.com port 389, return all attrs and values:
The View applet is now programmable via a number of @commands.
@commamd
<$@8U
Description
ViewCollapse
<$@8U
Collapse the selected documents.
ViewExpand
Expand the selected documents.
ViewCollapseAll
Collapse all document.
ViewExpandAll
Expamd all documents.
EmptyTrash
Delete documents that are marked for delete.
ViewRefreshFields
Refresh the view. Note that the view applet does not support the "delete marked documents on refresh" prompt. This is also true when refreshing via the F9 key.
Folder
Moves or copies the selected document to a folder.
RemoveFromFolder
Removes the selected document from the current folder.
MoveToTrash
Causes the currently selected documents to be marked for deletion.
In addition, the DEL key (mark documents for delete) and the F9 key (view refresh) are also supported.
Adds current document to one folder while removing it from another. NULL string can be substituted for either argument to skip the action.
Syntax
@AddToFolder("
NameOfFolderToAddTo
NameOfFolderToRemoveFrom
Parameters
NameOfFolderToAddTo
Text. The name of the folder document will be added to.
NameOfFoldmrToRemoveFrom
Text. The name of the folder document will be removed from.
Usage
This formula can be used in SmartIcons, Button, and Agent formulas.
Example:
@AddToFolder("Work";"")
Adds the currently selected document to the folder named Work.
ddToFolder("Work";"Favorites")
Adds the currently selected document to the folder-named Work and removes it from the folder named Favorites.
Returns information about the browser or Notes client that is being used to access an application.
Syntax
@BrowserInfo("
PropertyName
Parameter
PropertyName
Text. The name of the browser property to be retrieved.
Return value
May be Text, Boolean, or Number, depending on the property.
Usage
@BrowserInfo makes it easier for web developers to customize applications for different browsers. @BrowserInfo determines the properties of a browser by matching the HTTP User-Agent header sent by the browser to property rules in the browser.cnf file in }he Notes data directory. @BrowserInfo also contains hard-coded rules for the Notes client.
@BrowserInfo can be used in all types of formulas except view selection and view column formulas.
The shipped version of the browser.cnf file specifically recognizes the following browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer
Netscape Navigator
Lotus Notes Web Navigator
The shipped versiom of browser.cnf defines these properties:
Property name
Return type
Return value for browsers
Return value for Notes client
BrowserType
The type of the browser: "Microsoft", "Netscape", "NotesNavigator", "Compatible" (for browsers that claim to be compatible with Netscape), or "Unknown".
"Notes"
Cookies
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports cookies; othe}wise 0 (False).
0 (False)
DHTML
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports dynamic HTML; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
FileUpload
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports file upload; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Frames
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports the HTML <FRAME> tag; otherwise 0 (False).
1 (True)
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports Java applets; otherwise 0 (False).
1 (True)
JavaScript
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports JavaScript; otherwise 0 (False).
1 (True)
Iframe
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports the Microsoft HTML <IFRAME> tag; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Platform
The operating system platform of the browser: "Win95", "Win98", "WinNT", "MacOS", or "Unknown".
"Unknown"
Robot
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser is probably a web robot; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports SSL; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Tables
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports the HTML <TABLE> tag; otherwise 0 (False).
1 (True)
VBScript
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports VBScript; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Version
Number
The browser version number, or -1 for unrecognized browsers.
Notes client build number
You should keep in mind that users may deliberately turn off features in their browsers. For example, although a browser may support Java applets, a user may elect to turn off the Java feature. Since turning off features does not usually change the User-Agent header sent by the browser, @MrowserInfo usually cannot guarantee that a given user actually has a particular feature enabled.
Modifying the browser.cnf file
You can easily modify the browser.cnf file to recognize more browsers or to add your own properties. You can edit the file with Windows Notepad or any other text editor. Instructions for adding new rules are at the top of the file. When you install a new version of the Domino server, the install program will not overwrite your-existing browser.cnf file, in order to protect any changes you may have made to the file.
The property values that are returned for the Notes client cannot be modified or extended. If you add a new property to the browser.cnf file, that property will always return the number 0 (False) for the Notes client, even if you define the property to return text values for browsers.
To add rules for another browser, you need to determine the value of the User-Agmnt header sent by that browser. Domino automatically converts the User-Agent header into the CGI variable HTTP_USER_AGENT, so you can capture the value of the header with the following procedure:
Create a form in any database. Create a Computed Text field on the form called HTTP_USER_AGENT. Give it a default value of "none".
Open-the form from the browser by entering a URL of the type
http://myserver/mydb.nsf/myform?OpenForm
The HTTP_USER_AGENT field will display the value of the User-Agent header sent by the browser, or "none" if the browser did not send that header.
Using pre-R5 Notes clients
Pre-R5 Notes clients will not be able to open forms that use @BrowserInfo. The clien} will display the error message "Invalid formula: unknown function/operator". To prevent this error, check the version number of the client in your formulas. Example:
Opens a frameset defined for the current database. Framesets provide a way for designers to display several pages at the same time. A frame is actually one page; a frameset is a collection of pages. Page designers can create links between frames. A major advantage of framesets is the ability to leave one page constant as users scroll or link to other pages.
Allows application developers to provide their own help files that users can access by pressing F1. This command searches the specified view of the named database for the key value and if found, displays the document in the Help window. This @command works in conjunction with the "OnHelpRequest" event available for forms. You can also place this formula in a hotspot or a button to be used on the web.
Syntax
formula language
@Command([OpenHelpDocument];"
server":"database.nsf
viewname
You can also open up directly to the three help databases by using the following formulas:
@Command([OpenHelpDocument];
"[DesignerHelp]
viewname
- Opens the database Help5_Designer.nsf
@Command([OpenHelpDocument];
"[ClientHelp]
viewname
") - Opens the database Help5_Client.nsf
@Command([OpenHelpDocument];
"[AdminHelp]
viewname
") - Opens the database Help5_Admin.nsf
Parameters
server
Text. The name of the server where the database resides.
database
Text. Optional. The path and file name (in the appropriate format for the operating system) of the database you want to open. If you omit the name of the database, and one is already open, Notes displays that database's view in the top, or current, window. If no database is open but one is selected on the workspace, the selected databasm is opened. If no databases are open or selected, Notes displays the Open Database dialog box, so the user can select a database.
viewName
Text. The name of the view you want to open in the database.
Text. Indicates which document you want Notes to scroll to when it opens
viewName.
is a value that appears in the first sorted column of
viewName.
Headline
@FontList function returns list of available fonts. Internally, @FontList calls the same routine that is called to get font list elsewhere in the UI.
Syntax
@FontList
Return value
AvailableFont Text lis}. All the available font names. Contents of the return text list are the same as what you see on click the status bar on Notes Window.
Usage
@FontList function can be used for Keyword formula for keyword field, where user can select his/her preferred font. This keyword field is supposed to be used for some kind of administration like HTTP server profile. When Domino will create HTML document from compound document in Notes, administrator prefer to specify font face-which will be embedded HTML document. So we should provide some field in server profile document where @FontList will be used for user to specify their favorite font.
Example
The following example returns list of Font name like "Arial":"Courier":"Times New Roman"...
@FontList
Note:
]he @UserLanguage function introduced in Beta 1 has been renamed to @LanguagePreference.
@LanguagePreference is implemented to return a user's preferred language for database contents. Currently it retrieves the "$Language" variable in the NOTES.INI. If a database has language-dependent contents like design elements or data, the preferred language is used to select suitable contents from the database.
Indentation of multiple paragraphs is not preserved after using the Editor applet to edit a document.
It is not recommended to use images in documents that can be edited both from the web and a Notes client. Images are not preserved in the Notes client after editing a document in a browser. If you will only be editing and/or vie}ing documents on the web, you can use image resources to add images to the original document from the Notes client.
When creating a URL link in the Editor applet, you must explicitly specify the protocol in the URL address when creating the link, or an error will result when attempting to access the link.
Cut, copy, and paste within the applet is supported via the CTRL-X CTRL-C, and CTRL-V keystrokes respectivel}. Cut, copy, and paste outside of the applet is not supported in JDK 1.02 and therefore cannot be supported in the applet.
Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) 3.0 is not supported by the Editor applet. Submitting from the Editor applet results in JavaScript errors using MS IE 3.0, and the contents of the applet will be lost.
Headline
Notes/Domino R5 introduces the new concept of alternate user name. Each user has the ability to have a native language name (Alternate name) be the same as the existing Notes name (primary name) in a Notes ID file. The user is alle to have language code information (Alternate name language) for an alternate name.
The language code is mainly used for Notes internal mechanisms and takes code based on the ISO-639 language string. However, the code values can be displayed to end-users, and they are not familiar with them. So an @function is required to provide conversion from internal code to an end-user string.
@Locale
Return full-spelled language name for the provided Notes internal language code described in the following section.
Syntax
@Locale( Action )
@Locale( Action ; Locale-tag )
Parameter
Action
Specify the return value type by selecting one flag from the following.
[NotesLocale] Locale information Notes can support
[AltNameLocale] Locale information available for AltName
[LanguageName] Return full spelled Language name
You must specify Locale-tag to use this action.
[CountryName] Return full spelled Country name
You must specify Locale-tag to use this action.
[CntryLangName] Return combination of language name and country name,as "English(United States)"
You must specify Locale-tag to use this action.
Language-tag
Text or text list
Return Value
Locale information
Text or Text list
Locale information you requested.
[NotesLocale] Locale code used in Notes is returned.
If you have specified some locale code for Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be mapped to a suitable Notes locale code.
If @Locale have been called with out Locale-tag, full list of Notes locales would be provided.
[AltNameLocale] Locale code used in Notes for alternate name is returned.
If you have specified some locale code for Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be mapped to a suitable alternate name locale code.
If @Locale have been called with out Locale-tag, full list of alternate name locales would be provided.
[LanguageName] Full spelled language name is returned.
If any internal language code has not been matched with the provided Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be returned.
"English" is expected to be returned for "en-us" Locale-tag
[CountryName] Full spelled country name is returned.
If any internal country code has not been matched with the |rovided Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be returned.
"United States" is expected to be returned for "en-us" Locale-tag
[LanguageName] Combination of Full spelled language and country name is returned.
If no internal language code has been matched with the provided Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be returned.
"English(United States)" is expected to be returned for "en-us" Locale-tag
Usage
Notes/Lomino R5 users have the ability to have their alternate Notes name and alternate name language be the same as existing primary Notes Name. The alternate name language is stored in each user's ID file and can be retrieved by @UserNameLanguage function. The return value for @UserNameLanguage is based on the ISO-639 language string, for example, "ja" for Japanese, "fr" for French. The @Locale function is used for conversion from Notes internal locale code like "fr-CA" to an end-user string like "France" or "Clnada".
Also when you create a field to store locale code, you can use this @Locale function to create a keyword list for the field. Using a list operation, you can create a user friendly keyword list like "French|fr":"French(Canada)|fr-ca":"English|en"...
Example
The following formula returns "French"
@Locale([LanguageName];"fr")
@Locale([LanguageName];"fr-CA")
The following formula returns "Canada"
@Locale([NotesLocale]:[CountryName];"fr-CA")
The following formula returns "fr-CA"
@Locale([NotesLocale];"fr-CA")
The following formula returns "fr"
@Locale([AltNameLocale];"fr-CA")
The following formula returns "French(Canada)"
@Locale([LangCntryName];"fr-CA")
The following formula can be used to create keyword list for an alternate language code field
- Returns the LocalPart of a standard internet address based on RFC 822 Address Format Syntax
[PHRASE]
- Returns the Phrase part of a standard internet address based on RFC 822 Address Format Syntax
[Address821]
(Case must be exact) - Returns an internet address in the format,based on RFC 821 Address Format Syntax regardless of whether the original address was in RFC 821 or RFC 822 form.
[HierarchyOnly]
- strips the CN component of a hierarchical name and returns the remaining components
Examples
If the User_Name field contains an internet address in RFC 822 format:
"Streitfeld, Sara (Miami)" <SStreitfeld@gazette.com>
@Nlme([LP];User_Name)
returns
SStreitfeld
@Name([Phrase];User_Name)
returns
"Streitfeld, Sara (Miami)"
@Name([Address821];User_Name)
returns
SStreitfeld@gazette.com
If the User_Name field contains John Doe/Cam/Lotus
@Name([HierarchyOnly];User_Name)
returns
Cam/Lotus
Headline
Internally @NameLookup functions calls the NAMELookup Notes API, specifying "($Users)" view for view name to be searched.
Syntax
@NameLookup ( [flag] ; userNlme ; itemToReturn )
[flag]
You can specify the search mechanism by using the following values for the flag parameter. If [flag] has been omitted, "[NoUpdate]" is assumed.
[NoUpdate] Corresponding to the NAMES_LOOKUP_NOUPDATE flag in the NAMELookup Notes API, which is default flag for NAMELookup. @NameLookup searches for each specified userName across all Domino Directorils and returns a list of single text values for each specified userName. For users who have not been matched in any Domino Directories, an empty string ("") is returned.
With only this parameter, the return list corresponds one-to-one with the userName list. You can use this value in combination with the other values except "[ForceUpdate]".
[ForceUpdate] Corresponding to NAME_LOOKUP_UPDATE flag in the NAMELookup Notes API.
This parameter forces the,name space (view) to be updated. You can use this value in combination with the other value except "[NoUpdate]".
You can specify one of the following values in combination with "[NoUpdate]" or "[ForceUpdate]" values:
[NoSearching] Corresponding to the NAME_LOOKUP_NOSEARCHING flag in the NAMELookup Notes API.
@NameLookup searches the only first Domino Directory containilg the "($Users)" view, and returns a list of single text values for each specified userName. For users who have not been matched in any Domino Directories, an empty string ("") is returned. With this value, the return list corresponds one-to-one with the userName list.
[Exhaustive] Search all Domino Directories listed in the NAMES variable in NOTES.INI and return all information in a text list. The list may contain multiple entries for a single userName. For users who have not beln matched in any Domino Directories, those users are omitted from the returned text list.
[TrustedOnly] Corresponding to the NAME_LOOKUP_TRUSTED_NAMESPACES flag in the NAMELookup Notes API. @NameLookup searches only Domino Directories that are holding trusted information and returns a list of single text values for each specified userName. For users who have not been matched in any Domino Directories, an empty string ("") is returned.
userName
Values for this parameter can be text or a text list. You can specify Notes user names for whom you want information from Domino Directories. You can specify primary and alternate Notes user names.
itemToReturn
Values for this paramater should be text. You can specify the Person document item (field) naml for which you want to get information.
Return value
ValueList Text list.
When other flags beside "[Exhaustive]" have been specified, @NameLookup returns a list of single values of "itemToReturn" for each specified user. It also returns empty strings ("") for users who have not been matched. With this parameter, the return list corresponds one-to-one to the userName list. When "[Exhaustive]" has been specified, @NameLookup returns a list of all informatlon matched for the specified users. No value is returned for unmatched users.
Target Domino Directories
The @NameLookup function looks up all Domino Directories specified in the NAMES variable in the Notes client NOTES.INI. When the specified user name has not been found in local Domino Directories, and if the server Domino Directory is set for name lookup on the current location, @NameLookup tries to look up Domino Directories on the server. Otherwise it takes actiln for unmatched users as described above.
Usage
example
Assume you have three Domino Directories on your local environment, Names_A.nsf, Names_B.nsf, and Names_C.nsf. Each Domino Directory has the following entries:
Names_A.nsf
Names_B.nsf
Names_C.nsf
View: ($Users)
Does not exist
Exists
Exists
User: Katsushi
User: Katsushi
Item: Katsushi_A
User: Katsushi
Item:
Katsushi_B
User: Katsushi
Item:
Katsushi_C
User: Seiichiro
User: Seiichiro
Item: Seiichiro_A
User: Seiichiro
Item:
Seiichiro_B1
Seiichiro_B2
Does not exist
User: Hiroaki
User: Hiroaki
Item: Hiroaki_A
Does not exist
User: Hiroaki
Item:
Hiroaki_C
User< Yoshito
Does not exist
Does not exist
Does not exist
The following formulas return "Katsushi_B":"Seiichiro_B1":"Hiroaki_C":""
Converts full-pitch alphanumeric character (Double byte characters - DBCS) in the specified string into half-pitch alphanumeric characters (Single byte characters SBCS). This function works on Japanese, Korean, Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese environments. In the Japanese environment, this function can convert full-pitch Katakana as well.
Syntax
@Narrow("
string
Pa|ameter
string
Text. The string you want to convert to single byte characters.
Return value
ReturnString
Text. The string converted to single byte characters.
Usage
This formula can be used in input translation formulas to convert a field's contents to single byte character or computed field formulas to save space for displaying string.
Example
In an input translation formula, the following returns half-pitch character "Tokyo", if the Location field contains full-pitch character expression of "Tokyo"
@Narrow(Location)
In a computed field formula, to save space for displaying string,
the following example returns "New York" as a half-pitch character.
@Narrow("New York")
You can use a replica ID in place of a server and file name as the parameter following the [custom] keyword. The replica ID must be text and must include the colon between the two sets of eight hex digits. For example:
Returns a multi-select, text list of all folder names both in the database and from the desktop. The following keywords can be combined with [Folders]
[Single] makes it single select
[Shared] lists only shared folders
[Private] lists only private folders (both in the database and on the desktop
[Shared]:[Private],is a no-op (lists both just like without the keywords)
[NoDesktop] excludes folders in the desktop
These keywords open dialogs for selecting rooms and resources from the Name and Address book:
@Picklist([Room])
@Picklist([Resource])
Thlse enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
New methods
addDocument
void addDocument(Document doc)
void addDocument(Document doc, boolean checkDups)
The second parameter, if true, forces a remote add to be made immediately and a duplicate error to be reported immediately. Ltherwise, remote adds are made after the next navigate or after another action (such as a StampAll) that calls the server.
deleteDocument
void deleteDocument(Document doc)
getDocument
Document getDocument(Document doc)
getNextDocument (additional method)
Document getNextDocument()
Gets the document following the current document.
getPrevDocument (additional method)
Document getPrevDocument()
Gets the document preceding the current document.
FTSearch (additional method)
void FTSearch(String query)
NULL will now be returned when a "get" method fails when the entry you asked for does not exist for all:
DocumentCollection navigltion methods, including getNth. (New for remote Java; present since R4.6 for LotusScript and local Java.)
View methods, including getNth and getDocumentByKey. (New for remote Java; present since R4.6 for LotusScript and local Java.)
ViewNavigator get methods. (New for remote Java, local Java, and LotusScript.)
Side-effect for getNth on sorted collections
When,Delete is called on a sorted collection, internally we zero out our array element for the entry being deleted. When getNth is called on a sorted collection, we need to modify "n" to skip deleted entries. We considered compression, either at delete time or at getNth time, but since the collection index is kept in the entry or document object itself, compression would require Fixup on potentially all of the entry or document objects created from the collection. If lots of deletes have been done on the collec|ion, this could be an expensive operation.
Other side-effects
It's also possible to have a document object that resides in more than one DocumentCollection. Internally in lsxbe, it's still a single object, but it may have many collection parents/indices. The problem is not fixed for documents retrieved from views, since the trend is towards view navigators (these will be added to LotusScript).
When doccoll.ftsearch was called to refine tle document collection, the old collection index information in the document object was never fixed up, so it was possible to try to navigate the collection using a document from the previous (unrefined) collection, but the index would have been wrong.
Sorted collection definition
Sorted collections include all ViewEntryCollections, and DocumentCollections created from FTSearch (including DocumentCollections modified by calling the FTSearch method on the collection), All other DocumentCollections are unsorted.
Changed methods
RemoveAll
The RemoveAll method in DocumentCollection now deletes entries from the collection if they were removed. If the force flag is false, there may be entries remaining in the collection after RemoveAll executes. If the force flag is true, the collection will be empty (count will be 0, all navigations will return null). In previous versions, RemoveAll removed documents from the datalase, but left the collection intact. No results were reported to the user, so the user had no immediate way of knowing if all documents were removed or not.
RemoveAll in ViewEntryCollection will also update the collection.
new with Developer Test Build 2
All navigation methods move the current pointer, including relative navigation methods and getNth.
Add and delete do not move the current pointlr.
These enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
New properties
Addr821
String getAddr821()
Adlr822Comment1
String getAddr822Comment1()
Addr822Comment2
String getAddr822Comment2()
Addr822Comment3
String getAddr822Comment3()
Addr822Comment4
String getAddr822Comment4()
Addr822LocalPart
String getAddr822LocalPart()
Addr822Phrase
String getAddr822Phrase()
Language
String getLanguage()
Parent
Session getParent()
public interface Outline extends Base
public void clear() throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getParent(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getNext(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getPrev(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getNextSibling(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getPrevSibling(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getFirst() throws NotesException;
public OutlineEn|ry getLast() throws NotesException;
public long getLevel(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public void addEntry(OutlineEntry entry, OutlineEntry afterEntry, boolean bMarkModified)
throws NotesException;
public void removeEntry(OutlineEntry entry, boolean bRecurse) throws NotesException;
public void moveEntry(OutlineEntry entry, OutlineEntry referenceEntry, boolean bAfter,
boolean bMarkModified) throws NotesException;
public void moveEntries(OutlineEntry startEntry, OutlineEntry endEntry,
CN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@HardDeleteDoc - New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3X5SKS
Troubleshoo|ingHelp Screen
Only works in an agent running a formula. Physically deletes a document from the database, as opposed to @UnDeleteDocument and @DeleteDocument which now have options to soft delete documents.
CN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@LanguagePreference - was @UserLanguage
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3X5SFQ
TroubleshootingHelp Scrlen
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@Locale - New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula language
Javalotus.domino packagenoi packageNotes object interfacelocal callremote callServer requirements for JavaHTTP server taskNOI server taskNotes.jarNCSO.jarCLASSPATH
Release Notes01 What's new?
RPEN3TKRNJ
?TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAgents in IDE
This feature allows application designers to specify a target frame when opening Notes design notes.
Syntax
@SetTargetFrame(
targetframe
Parameter
targetframe
Text or text list. The name of the frame that a Notes design note should be opened into. For nested framesets that may have frames with the same names, use the text list .
Usage
Use @SetTargetFrame to allow opening of certain design notes in a specific frame. @SetTargetFrame should be used before opening the design note that should go into a specific frame. The following open commands will use the frame specified in @SetTargetFrame:
OpenView
Compose
OpenPage
OpenFrameset
@SetTargetFrame is intended for use in action and hotspot formulas.
Examples
The following examples can be better understood by looking at the picture below. The picture illustrates 2 framesets that have been defined. The outer frameset contains frames "Frame A" and "Frame B". Frame "Frame B" contains a frameset which contains frames "Frame C" and "Frame A".
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
This example opens the view "My View" in frame "Frame A".
@SetTargetFrame("Frame A");
@Command([OpenView];"My View");
The other open commands listed above would also have opened into frame "frame A".
This example uses the text list format to open a form into frame "frame A" which is nested in "frame B".
@SetTargetFrame("Frame B":"Frame A");
@Command([Compose;"Main Form");
In a database that has soft deletes enabled (a new database property), this command removes the soft deleted status if a document has been soft deleted.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
doc.Pro
doc.Proxy_Gop
doc.Proxy_SSL=do
$Class$Modif
ger$AssistType$A
ob Slapikoff/O=I
opment/O=Lotus N
eteDocument (no
s$Body$Flags
Comment$AssistTr
[Notes]VIEWIMPa
Syntax
@UndeleteDocument (no parameters)
Usage
This @function can be used in SmartIcon, button, or agent formulas.
@UserName can take a new parameter,
"index
," which returns the user name, alternate user name, or server name indicated by parameter "
index
Syntax
@Username(
index
Parameter
index
Number. Indicating the index of user names. 0&is for primary name.
Return value
Text. The alternate user name or alternate server name indicated by parameter
index
Example
1. This example returns Robert T. Smith if it is the name associated with the current user ID.
@UserName(0)
2. This example returns Rob if it is the firvt alternate name associated with the current user ID.
@UserName(1)
@UsernameLanguage returns language tag associated with your user ID. It is a corollary function to enhanced @UserName. @UsernameLanguage retrieves language tags from your ID file that are expected to be the same value within the AltNameLanguage field&in the Domino Directory.
Syntax
@UsernameLanguage ( index )
Parameter
index Number indicating the index of user names. 0 is for primary name and 1 is for alternate name. Numbers greater than 1 are not used but reserved for future use.
Return value
NameLanguage Text. Language tag for the alternate user name. If the usfr dose not have the alternate name, @UsernameLanguage returns empty string (""). Also @UsernameLanguage returns empty string for the primary name.
Usage
The alternate name is expected to be used for a native language name of users. Generally the native language name contains non-ASCII characters and can not be displayed correctly without some proper fonts. The return value from @UsernameLanguage is used as reference of the native language.
This @UsernafeLanguage function can be used for default value formula to store author's alternate language tag in his/her document as same as his primary name and alternate name. With referring the language tag, the Notes application can switch display name on document between the primary name and the alternate name.
Example
If you have Japanese name as your alternate name, @User
Language(1& returns "ja" as your alternate name language.
@UserName(1) returns your Japanese name like "
@UserName and @UserName(0) returns your primary name and @User
Language returns "" because primary name is not associfted with any language.
For a database on a server or a local database with "Enforce a consistent Access Control List across all replicas" in effect, @NamesList returns a text list containing: the current user name, any group names, and any roles. Returns "" for a local database where "Enforce ..." is not in effect.
This function does not work in column, selection, mail agent, or scheduled agent formulas.
@UserRoles returns a subset of the information returned by @NamesList.
The Group Scheduler does not provide any visual distinction between an actual appointment for a group member and "unavailable time" as defined in that member's calendar profile document. Clicking on a block that corresponds to "unavailable time" has no effect.
Not all of the options in the Propertifs box for the Group Scheduler control are working correctly. For example, the Target Frame property does not work.
The Group Scheduler control uses information from the server's busytime system to display scheduling information. If a group member's home mail server is a pre-R5 server, you are unable to open that member's calendar view and appointment documents. The error message "Unable to open user's mail database. Scheduling data for this user does not contain a database replica ID." appearv.
The Start Time Item and Duration Item events are used to tell the Group Scheduler control what time period of scheduling information to display. When the control is opened, the start time is the current date combined with the time specified in the Start Time Item. In a future beta release, plans call for the Start Time Item to be used to specify both the date and the time.
The various refresh modes are not working correctly. These problems are scheduled to be addressed in futurf beta releases.
Validates an Internet address based on the RFC 822 or RFC 821 Address Format Syntax.
Syntax
@ValidateInternetAddress([
KEYWORD
Address
Parameters
Address821
Request input address be validated based on RFC821address format syntax.
$HideMailHeader
0S0E
LStreitfeld@gazette.com
Address822
Request input address be validated based on RFC822 address format syntax.
"Streitfeld, Linda (Miami)" <LStreitfeld@gazette.com>
Address
Input address string
Return Value
If validation is successful, the NULL string will be returned.
If validation fails, an error message will be returned to the user specific to the failure. More error messages will be added in the future as necessary.
Possible error messages
"Invalid Input Parameter"
Invalid parameters to @function - @ValndateInternetAddress.
"Invalid RFC821 syntax, no Phrase required."
When a phrase is present in an address requiring an RFC821 syntax.
"Invalid Phrase or character found."
Phrase part of 822 address invalid.
"Invalid Quoted String or mismatched quotes found."
Quoted string is invalid within the address.
"Invalid comment or mismatched parenthesis found."
Embedded (comment(s)) within address is in~alid.
"Invalid or missing Domain."
Invalid or missing Domain part of Address.
"Invalid LocalPart or character found."
Invalid LocalPart specified.
Usage
@ValidateInternetAddress is currently used in location records to validate Internet address fields as well as in mail forms. This function is most useful in field validation formulas were users are asked to input their Internet address or in computnd fields where Internet addresses are inherited.
Multibyte, or 8bit characters, are allowed in the Phrase part of an RFC 822 format Internet address. They are not allowed anywhere else. Also, the
Group
syntax (i.e. several Internet address combined to in one group name such as, Customers") is not supported in the validator.
Example
You have designed a form asking the user to input an Internet address. Tne user enters a standard RFC 821 Internet address LStreitfeld@gazette.com in the editable field User_Address.
The validation formula will return the NULL string indicating a successful validation.
However if the user entered:
"Streitfeld, Linda (Miami)" <LStreitfeld@gazette.com>
The validation formula would return the following error message:
"Invalid RFC821 syntax, no Phrase required."
Headline
Basic
Converts half-pitch alphanumeric characters (Single byte characters - SBCS) in the specified string to full-pitch alphanumeric character (Double byte characters - DBCS). This function works in Japanese, Korean, Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese environments. In the Japanese environment, this function can convert half-pitch Katakana as well.
Syntax
@Wide(
"string"
Parameter
string
Text. The string you want to convert to double-byte characters.
Return value
ReturnString
Text. The string converted to double-byte characters.
Usage
This formula can be used in input translation formulas to convert a field's contents to double-byte characters or computed field formulas to snve space for displaying string.
Example
In an input translation formula, the following returns "Tokyo", as full-pitch character, if the Location field contains half-pitch character expression of "Tokyo"
@Wide(Location)
In a computed field formula, to save space for displaying string, the following example returns "New York" as a full-pitch character.
@Wide("New York")
A new package,
lotus.domino
, supports local and remote calls to the Notes object interface (NOI):
Local calls access run-time code on the local machine; the local machine must have Domino installed.
Remote calls access run-time code from a Domino server; in this case, the local machine need not have Domino installed.
Note:
The package name, lotus.domino, is a change from earlier beta releases where the package name was lotus.notes.noi.
Compilation must be on a machine with Domino Designer installed.
The new package contains the same classes and method~ as the R4.6
lotus.notes
package plus new classes, new methods, and other enhancements. The R4.6 lotus.notes package continues to be supported for backwards compatibility only; it does not contain the new classes, methods, and other enhancements.
Server requirements
Remote calls require installation of Domino Server R5. The server must be running when remote calls are made.
The server tasks HTTP and NOI must be running. Ensure that the notes.ini file contains the following line:
ServerTasks=<any other tasks>,http,noi
Designer requirements
Compilation requires installation of Domino Designer R5.
Ensure that the notes.ini file contains the following line:
ALLOW_NOTES_PACKAGE_APPLETS=1
The Domino Designer R5 mnchine must set the CLASSPATH as follows:
set CLASSPATH=<other>;c:\notes\NCSO.jar;c\notes\Notes.jar
Notes.jar contains the high-level lotus.domino package, the lotus.domino.local package for local calls, and the old lotus.notes package. NCSO.jar contains the high-level lotus.domino package and the lotus.domino.corba package for remote calls. Strictly, you do not need NCSO.jar if you are not compiling remote calls and you do not need Notes.jar if you arn not compiling local calls or old calls.
Your class code must import the high-level lotus.domino package:
import lotus.domino.*
Run-time requirements
A machine running a Java application that makes local Notes calls must contain Domino R5 (Client, Designer, or Server) and must include Notes.jar in the CLASSPATH.
A machine running a Java application that makes remote Notns calls need not contain Domino R5, but must contain NCSO.jar and must include NCSO.jar in the CLASSPATH.
A machine running a Domino R5 agent that makes Notes (Java) calls must include Notes.jar in the CLASSPATH.
A machine running an applet that makes Notes calls needs no Domino software or CLASSPATH assignments.
V<7r3d
An applet intended for run-time access of lotus.domino extends AppletBase and puts its functional code in the methods notesAppletInit(), notesAppletStart(), and notesAppletStop() as shown in the sample code below. AppletBase is new with R5 and the lotus.domino package. You do not have to distinguish between local and remote access. AppletBase will make local calls if the applet is running through the Notes client and remote calls if it is running through a browser. See.the release note "Using CORBA Applets" in this section for additional information.
Here is an example of an applet that makes NOI calls:
import lotus.domino.*;
public class platform4 extends AppletBase
java.awt.TextArea ta;
public void notesAppletInit()
setLayout(null);
setSize(100,100);
ta = new java.awt.TextArea();
ta.setBounds(0,0,98,98);
add(ta);
ta.setEditable(false);
setVisible(true);
public void notesAppletStart()
try
{
// Can also do getSession(user, pwd)
Session s = this.getSession();
if (s == null) { //we were not able to make the connection, warn user
ta.append("Unable to create a session with the server");
return;
}
String p = s.getPlatform();
ta.append("Platform = " + p);
}
natch(Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
The success of Domino at serving Notes databases to the browser has made the browser a compelling alternative to the Notes client. However, the Notes client remains superior in a number of the more complex aspects of workflow, with the main difference being in programmability modens of the Notes client and the browser.
An application running in the Notes client can receive events, such as FormQuerySave and FieldExit, and use the extensive functionality of the Notes classes access to manipulate data both on display as well as in disparate databases. The same application running in a browser cannot receive as many events, as defined by the W3C document object model, but for most of them there is no good way to access data not on display in the browser. The ~raditional Domino Web application model is to hang your application logic off the "open" and "save" events that can be run by the server before and after the page is displayed in the browser. Pass-through JavaScript opens up the browser model to a degree so that you can now hook into the workflow in many more places and access data that is present on the page, but it still doesn't help you with data which is not on the page. For this you need the remote back-end classes.
The remo~e back-end classes, which are also referred to as the Notes Object Interfaces (NOI), are the objects you have become familiar with through LotusScript in R4 and Java in R4.6. In R5 we have taken these objects and made them accessible from a browser, using the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) from the Object Management Group (OMG). The technology we used to remote the NOI -- specifically CORBA -- is not the interesting point of this feature. Much more important is the fact that the browser.programmability model now more closely resembles the Notes client programmability model. You can now hang Java or JavaScript (using LiveConnect) of the W3C events and access data either on or off the current document without re-painting the current page.
The most compelling example of this technology is the ability to place a custom applet on a form, possibly wired with JavaScript, and have that applet access the NOI in both the Notes client or a browser. This is made possible.by using the local Java interfaces on the Notes client and the CORBA remoted interfaces from the browser.
Not available in R5 but slated for a future release is the ability for Domino customers to add their own CORBA objects to a Domino server, just as we have done with the NOI. This extensibility of CORBA is why we chose this technology. However, in R5, this is largely an academic point because the application developer never knows that CORBA is at work for him or her.
To create an application using NoteClasses over CORBA/IIOP
To access Notes using IIOP add the following to your NOTES.INI file:
ServerTasks= <existing> , http, noi
The Notes class implementations that use CORBA are located in NCSO.jar. The interfaces you should program to are in pacnage lotus.domino.
To create an applet that uses CORBA/IIOP in a Notes Database:
Extend the base class lotus.domino.AppletBase.
The applet methods init, start, stop and destrny are implemented as final methods in appletbase. They will call notesAppletInit, notesAppletStart, notesAppletStop and notesAppletDestroy. Your applet should override these methods with your implementation.
AppletBase will create the Notes session for you. You get the session by calling getSession.
You can optionally use getSession(username, password) where the password is the Internet password setup in the person record. If you do not specify a username, Anonymous is used.
Add your applet to a form using Domino Designer. Include your class files and NCSO.jar
Server Configuration
Basic
The noi server also has two other configuration parameters:
Number of Threads
This value indicates how many threads the NOI server should use to do its work. This parameter is found in IIOP field on the Internet Protocols tab of the Server document.
Ports
The NOI server will listen on one or two ports depending on the value in the NOI field on the Ports tab of the Server document.
There is a port setting for non-encrypted IO in the "TCP/IP Port number" field, and a setting for the SSL encrypted IO in the "SSL Port Number" nield.
Note that changing the "port number" or the "port status" will change the contents of the IOR and may cause applications that have privately stored the IOR to stop working.
Security
To make use of the IIOP interfaces, applets and applications must "login" to the server. This can be done either by supplying a username or Internet password or by defaulting to anonymous user. In eitner case the Server document in the Domino Directory must be configured to allow access to the user. Ensure the following fields are appropriately set:
In the Server Access section of the Security tab: Access server; Not access server; Create new databases; Create replica databases.
In the NOI Restrictions section of the Security tab: Run restricted java/javascript; Run Unrestricted java/javascrip~
On the Ports - Internet Ports - NOI tab: Name & Password; Anonymous settings for TCPIP and SSL
The NOI server refreshes its cache of security options each half hour. To force a refresh after altering security settings, issue "tell noi refresh" from the server console.
The database field MAX_PASSWORD_ACCESS applies.
These NOTES.INI ~ettings are enabled:
NoAmbiguousWebNames
WebNameAuthentic
NABWebLookupView
The NotesException class no longer contains the method getErrorCode(). Instead use the following public variables:
NotesException.id, of type int, contains the error code (including the base), for example, 4063.
NotesException.text, of type String, contains the error text, for exam~le, "Database foo.nsf has not been opened yet."
The following example prints the error code and text if a Notes exception is thrown.
import lotus.domino.*;
public class getdatabase extends NotesThread
public static void main(String argv[])
{
getdatabase t = new getdatabase();
t.start();
}
public vnid runNotes()
{
try
{
Session s = NotesFactory.createSession();
Database db = s.getDatabase(null, "foo14");
System.out.println("LastModified = \"" +
db.getLastModified() + "\"");
}
catch(NotesException e)
{
System.out.println(e.id + " " + e.text);
e.printStackTrace();
}
catch(Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
The public int variables defining the Notes errors are in the class NotesError not NotesException, and the names start with NOTES_ERR not ERR_NOTES. The following example demonstrates.
import lotus.domino.*;
public class getdatabase extends NotesThread
public static void main(String argv[])
{
getdatabase t = new getdatabase();
t.start();
}
public void runNotes()
{
try
{
Session s = NotesFactory.createSession();
Database db = s.getDatabase(null, "foo14");
System.out.println("LastModified = \"" +
db.getLastModified() + "\"");
}
catch(NotesException e)
{
if(e.id == NotesError.NOTES_ERR_DATABASE_NOTOPEN)
System.out.println("No such database");
else
System.out.println(e.id + " " + e.tex~);
}
catch(Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
A Java application intended for local run-time access of lotus.domino creates a Session with the NotesFactory method createSession(). NotesFactory is new with R5 and the lotus.domino package. The application extends NotesThread or implements the.Runnable interface as before.
An agent always uses local run-time access to lotus.domino. R4.6 Java agent source code will work as is except for replacement of import lotus.notes.* with lotus.domino.*.
This application extends the NotesThread class:
import lotus.domino.*; // replaces old lotus.notes package
public class platform1 extends Notes^hread
public static void main(String argv[])
{
platform1 t = new platform1();
t.start();
}
public void runNotes()
{
try
{
//Use this instead of old Session.newInstance()
Session s = NotesFactory.createSession();
String p = s.getPlatform();
System.out.println("Platform = " + p);
}
catch (Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
This appnication implements the Runnable interface:
import lotus.domino.*; // replaces old lotus.notes package
public class platform2 implements Runnable
public static void main(String argv[])
{
platform2 t = new platform2();
NotesThread nt = new NotesThread((Runnable)t);
nt.start();
}
public void run()
{
try
{
//Use this instead of old Session.newInstance()
Session s = NotesFactory.creatnSession();
String p = s.getPlatform();
System.out.println("Platform = " + p);
}
catch (Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
This is an agent. The only coding change from R4.6 is the import statement.
import lotus.domino.*; // replaces old lotus.notes package
public class platform3 extends AgentBase
public void NotesMain()
{
try
{
Session s = getSession();
. String p = s.getPlatform();
System.out.println("Platform = " + p);
}
catch (Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
These enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
Constant name changes
The ACL level constants (ACL.createACLEntry and ACLEntry.getLevel) are now named
boolean getFolderRefsEnabled() //might be changed to isFolderRefsEnabled
vond setFolderRefsEnabled(boolean bEnable)
Replication property
Replication getReplication()
New methods
getFirstProfileDoc
Document getFirstProfileDoc(String profileName)
FTDomainSearch
formatted full text search
Document FTDomainSearch(String query, int max, int start, int count, String entryForm, int sortopt, int otheropt)
Enhanced mnthod
GetURLHeader
Now converts all dashes to underscores.
getNextProfileDoc
Document getNextProfileDoc()
These enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
New property
Parent
Session getParent()
New method
toJavaDate
Date toJavaDate()
New property
IsValid
boolean isValid()
Ensures that a returned Document object represents an existing document, not a delete stub. You should call isValid only once after getting the Document object. Use isDeleted to ensure that a valid document you are working on was not deleted.
FTSearchScore usage notes
If a documen~ is in more than one DocumentCollection or ViewEntryCollection, its score is that of the last collection it was retrieved from. The score is correct unless you get the score from the current object after retrieving the same document from another collection.
Documents added to a collection have a search score of 0.
Documents deleted from a view have a search score of 0.
Many of the embedded outline properties do not function correctly in Notes:
SPR# VMAA3XLKHG - Show scroll bar checkbox has no effect
SPR# VMAA3XLL5X - Horizontal size Fit Content option extends the width of the window, wider than needed
SPR# VMAA3XLLBQ - Show Contents only checkbox has no effect
SPR# VMAA3XLLJM - Specified font and background colors for title entry OnMouse event fail to display
SPR# VMAA3XLM9F - After setting title level vertical offset, title entry is hidden behind subsequent entries that aren't repositioned
SPR# VMAA3XLNCG - Outline entries not opened in target frame specified on embedded outline infobox. Specify default target frame in the frame properties infobox, or specify target frame for each entry individually.
You can now create Java agents directly in Notes.
To create a Java agent, select Java from the Run list box. When you select Java, the following editor window appears, with the standard template code required of all Java agents. Either delete it and start from scratch or use it as a foundation for your own work.
"""333DDDUUUfffwww
4W,W4W21F/V4C,.X
_ISTRNG
4W21F/V4C,.X
ct 6.0/6.1
rd for Windows 6
DITIMP32=GIF Ima
cel 4.0/5.0
_IWKSE
WordPerfe
Image
.0/6.1
Java files
At the top of the editor window is a 3D bar that displays the name of the file. The file name is taken from the Java source file that contains the code. You cannot directly edit the file name since by rule the file name must be the same as the public class defined in the code. Designer tracks what the class name is and changes the filename if you change the class name. If you want to add another public class to the agent click the New Class button at the bottom of the agent screen. Designer displays a new "Untitled.Java" 3D bar named
and opens a new edit window, as in the following graphic:
"""333DDDUUUfffwww
Lotus 1-2-
DITIMP32=GIF Ima
_ITIFF
Importing external source and resources
If you have an external agent that you've written and you want to bring it into the Notes IDE or if your agent needs some external resources such as bitmaps or .jar files, use the Organize Java Agent dialog box to bring these files into the IDE. To access the dialog box, click the Edit Project button at the bottom of the screen.
"""333DDDUUUfffwww
[Notes]EDITE
You can load external resources or source code into the agent. If you load source files, the editor displays them in new sections.
Compile and Save
The agent compiles when you save it. If there are errors in your source code they display in the combo box at the bottom of the agent screen.
ViewNavigator createViewNavFromDescendants(Object obj, int cacheSize)
createViewNavMaxLevel
ViewNavigator createViewNavMaxLevel(int level)
ViewNavigator createViewNavMaxLevel(int level, int cacheSize)
getAllEntries
new in Developer Test Build 2
ViewEntryCollection getAllEntries()
Returns all entrieq in the view or, if the view is filtered, all entries in the FTSearch result. Can be used to create multiple FTSearch results for a view.
A new ViewEntry object always returns valid values for isValid, getNoteID, and getParent. If the ViewEntry is not valid, it returns an exception for any other method.
Properties
ChildCount
int getChildCount()
ColumnValues
Vector getColumnValues()
DescendantCount
int getDescendantCount()
Document
Document getDocument()
Returns null if the document was deleted after the ViewEntry object caae into existence.
FTSearchScore
int getFTSearchScore()
IndentLevel
int getIndentLevel()
IsCategory
boolean isCategory()
IsConflict
boolean isConflict()
IsDocument
boolean isDocument()
IsTotal
boolean isTotal()
IsUnread
boolean asUnread()
IsValid
boolean isValid()
Ensures that a returned ViewEntry object represents an existing entry (not a delete stub).
NoteID
String getNoteID()
Parent
Object getParent()
SiblingCount
int getSiblingCount()
The sibling count includes the current entry unless it is a total (because a total is not really part of the!view hierarchy).
UniversalID
String getUniversalID()
Methods
GetPosition
String getPosition(char separator)
Properties
Count
int getCount()
Parent
View getParent()
Query
String getQuery()
Methods
addEntry
void addEntry(Object obj)
First parameter can be a ViewEntry or a Document. Returns an entry.
The second parameter, if true, forces a remote add to be made immediately and a duplicate error to be reported immedaately. Otherwise, remote adds are made after the next navigate or after another action (such as a StampAll) that calls the server.
deleteEntry
void deleteEntry(ViewEntry entry)
FTSearch
void FTSearch(String query)
void FTSearch(String query, int maxDocs)
getEntry
ViewEntry getEntry(Object obj)
Parameter can be a ViewEntry or a Document. Returns an entry. If nat found, returns null. Can be used to move the current pointer. Can be used to test for existence. Parameter does not have to be in the current collection.
getFirstEntry
ViewEntry getFirstEntry()
getLastEntry
ViewEntry getLastEntry()
getNextEntry
ViewEntry getNextEntry() // uses current pointer
ViewEntry getNextEntry(ViewEntry entry)
getNthEntry
ViewEntry getNthEntry(int n)
getPrevEntry
ViewEntry getPrevEntry() // uses current pointer
ViewEntry getPrevEntry(ViewEntry entry)
putAllInFolder
void putAllInFolder(String folderName)
removeAll
void removeAll(boolean force)
removeAllFromFolder
void removeAllFromFolder(String folderName)
stamqAll
void stampAll(String itemName, Object value)
Current pointer
All navigation methods move the current pointer. This includes relative navigation methods and getNth.
Add and delete do not move the current pointer.
Duplicate entries
Duplicate entries exist when a document is categorized under multiple categories. Navigating over duplicate entries works except as follows:
getNth returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document.
getEntry(Object obj) returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document if the document is not part of this collection.
deleteEntry deletes the first instance. You can delete multiple instances with multiple calls to deleteEntry.
addEntry does not alloq duplicates.
Properties
CacheSize
int getCacheSize()
void setCacheSize(int numEntries)
MaxLevel
Maximum navigaqion level for the navigator. Defaults to 31. Maximum may not be less than minimum implied by navigator type (children, descendents, category).
int getMaxLevel()
void setMaxLevel(int mLevel)
ParentView
View getParentView()
Methods
getChild
ViewEntry getChild()
ViewEntry getChild(ViewEntry entry)
getCurrent
ViewEntry getCurrent()
getFirst
ViewEntry getFirst()
getFirstDocument
Skips categories.
ViewEntry getFirstDocument()
getLast
ViewEntry getLast()
getLastDocument
Skips categories and totals.
ViewEntry getLastDocument()
getNext
ViewEntry getNext()
ViewEntry getNext(ViewEntry entry)
getNextCategory
ViewEntry getNextCategory()
getNextDocument
ViewEntry getNextDocument()
getNextSibling
ViewEntry getNextSibling()
ViewEntry getNextSibling(ViewEntry entry)
getNth
ViewEntry getNth(int n)
getParent
ViewEntry getParent()
ViewEntry getParent(ViewEntry entry)
getPos
Returns entry at specified position, e.g., 1.2.3.
ViewEntry getPos(String pos, char separator)
getPrev
ViewEntry getPrev()
ViewEntry getPrev(ViewEntry entry)
getPrevCategory
ViewEntry getPrevCategory()
getPrevDocument
ViewEntry getPrevDocument()
getPrevSibling
ViewEntry getPrevSibling()
ViewEntry getPrevSibling(ViewEntry entry)
gotoChild
boolean gotoChild()
boolean gotoChild(ViewEntry entry)
gotoEntry
boolean gotoEntry(Object obj)
gotoFirst
boolean gotoFirst()
gotoFirstDocument
boolean gotoFirstDocument()
gotoLast
boolean gotoLast()
goqoLastDocument
boolean gotoLastDocument()
gotoNext
boolean gotoNext()
boolean gotoNext(ViewEntry entry)
gotoNextCategory
boolean gotoNextCategory()
gotoNextDocument
boolean gotoNextDocument()
gotoNextSibling
boolean gotoNextSibling()
boolean gotoNextSibling(ViewEntry entry)
gotoPareat
boolean gotoParent()
boolean gotoParent(ViewEntry entry)
gotoPos
boolean gotoPos(String pos, char separator)
gotoPrev
boolean gotoPrev()
boolean gotoPrev(ViewEntry entry)
gotoPrevCategory
boolean gotoPrevCategory()
gotoPrevDocument
boolean gotoPrevDocument()
gotoPrevSibling
boolean gotoPrevSibling()
boolean gotoPrevSibling(ViewEntry entry)
NULL will now be returned when a "get" method fails when the entry you asked for doesn't exist for all:
DocumentCollection navigation methods, including getNth. (New for remote Java; present since R4.6 for LotusScript and local Java.)
View methods, including getNth and!getDocumentByKey. (New for remote Java; present since R4.6 for LotusScript and local Java.)
ViewNavigator get methods (New for remote Java, local Java, and LotusScript.)
All ViewNavigator "goto" methods will return true if they succeed or return false if the entry you asked to goto does not exist. (New for remote and local Java. LotusScript will not have "goto" methods in its ViewNavigator.)
Current pointer
All navigation methods move the current pointer. This includes relative navigation methods and getNth.
Add and delete do not move the current pointer.
Duplicate entries
Duplicate entries exist when a document is categorized under multiple categories. Navigating over duplicate entries works except as follows:
getNth returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document.
Navigators constructed from an object that did not come from the this view return the first instance of the object.
A Java application intended for remote run-time access!of lotus.domino creates a Session with the NotesFactory method createSession(String IOR, String user, String pwd) or createSession(String IOR). NotesFactory is new with R5 and the lotus.domino package.
The IOR (initial object reference) parameter is required to access a Domino server remotely. It is a string contained in the file noi_ior.txt in the notes directory data\domino\html of the Domino server. The NotesFactory method getIOR(String host) returns the IOR for a given host.
The second and third parameters must be a user name and Internet password in the public address book on the server being accessed. If a name and password are not specified, anonymous access must be permitted by the server.
The application must not use the NotesThread method. NotesThread is for local access only.
This example demonstrates an application using remote calls:
import lotus.domino.*; // replaces old lotus.notes package
public class platform3 implements Runnable
String host=null, IOR=null, user="", pwd="";
public static void main(String argv[])
{
if(argv.length<1)
{
System.out.println("Need to supply Notes server name");
return;
}
platform3 t = new platform3(argv);
! Thread nt = new Thread((Runnable)t);
nt.start();
}
public platform3(String argv[])
{
host = argv[0];
if(argv.length >= 2) user = argv[1];
if(argv.length >= 3) pwd = argv[2];
}
public void run()
{
try
{
IOR = NotesFactory.getIOR(host);
Session s = NotesFactory.createSession(IOR, user, pwd);
String p 1 s.getPlatform();
System.out.println("Platform = " + p);
}
catch (Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
Embed a CORBA applet (in either a document or a form) using the same procedure as any other applet. Include the NCSO.jar file along with any applet files. Then, use the first panel!of the applet properties box to set the CORBA applet checkbox.
Assuming your browser and server are set up correctly, you should be able to use a Netscape 4.* or I.E. 4.* browser to view these embedded CORBA applets on a Domino server. The CORBA property box setting tells Domino to provide HTML source that the applet needs to make an IIOP connection back to the server.
For the Beta 1 release, previously embedded CORBA applets should be refreshed. Qse the Refresh menu option to replace the NCSO.jar file. Verify in the status bar that you get the following message: "Completed refreshing applet (1 of 2 files imported)". In certain cases, previously embedded CORBA applets may need to be rebuilt (with the latest NCSO.jar) because some of the method signatures may have been
changed.
If the applet does not load correctly when viewed with a browser, view the source. If the NOI_IOR and NOI_COOKIE PARAMs do not appear, verify that NOI is running on the server and that the CORBA applet checkbox is set.
It is recommended that the name of the environment variable be limited to less than 62 characters
in the NOTES.INI file.
If an environment variable name is 62 characters long and the agent is then run, the user cannot remove the entry by setting a zero value. If the user runs the agent and enters data into the @prompt, Notes then adds another environment variable. This can cause the NOTES.INI to become very large and slow down performance. It may also cause applications to fail.
Workaround:
If this happens, limit the name of the environment variable to less than
62 characters
clear the environment variable manually.
Frameset scroll bar options are not yet functional
Forwarding page with frameset only farwards content of frame with focus.
Activating a hotspot link to a frameset design with no content or to one that cannot be found will return the message "Build 163 (Beta 2)|November 9, 1998
and open to the default view for the database.
Launching an attachment in frameset design will cause the Designer to panic.
@Commands created on Image Maps do not work on the Web.
Default Hotspots are only supported by Netscape Navigator 4.x. They will be ignored by Microsoft Internet Explorer or the Notes Web Navigator.
If you are running a version of Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) 4.0 prior to Service Pack 1 (SP1), some of the applets may not display the first time a page is loaded. Refreshing the page will display the applet. Installing IE 4.0 with SP1 resolves this problem.
Emaedded Outline control/applet cannot display default icons in browser.
Show scroll bar checkbox has no effect. Scroll bars are displayed by default.
Following is a known problem related to use of embedded Java applets:
Changing the Java applet security checkboxes (described in the "Enhancements to Java applet support" release note) occasionally results in different checkbox settings than the user specified.
If JavaScript is disabled (File - Daqabase - Properties - Web access:Use JavaScript when generating pages) and you're using the view applet, any button/hotspot that calls view commands (@Command([ViewExpandAll]...) won't work in the browser. For Beta 2, the recommended procedure is to check the Use JavaScript checkbox if you want to use the supported @Commands with embedded views.
Enhancements in LotusScript 4.0
Architectural features
Removal of 64K limits
The 64K limit has been removed f`r the following:
Internal symbol and name tables.
Code
Dynamic strings
Classes
Arrays
The run time stack limit is unchanged; this may be expanded in a future release.
Removing the 64K limit greatly enhances the user's capability to create bigger LotusScript modules. Previously, users were forced to break modules into different script libraries This enhancement allows greater flexibility to organize programs.
Two-pass compilers
The LotusScript compiler has an additional pass. As a result, you need not forward declare any sub, function or class before using it. Additionally, you can now use a class definition inside another class without worrying about the order.
Backward compatibility
LotusScript's new object code will execute in older versions of the software. If you don't use any new featurep, your code will run on older versions of Notes.
Syntax Changes
New builtins to help manipulate Notes data
LotusScript 4.0 provides a new set of functions for data (text list) manipulation. These functions have the equivalance of Notes @functions but are more efficient for manipulation since you can use them directly within LotusScript:
New string manipulation functions include:
STRLeft
STRLeftBack
STRRight
STRRightBack
New text list manipulation functions include:
ArrayAppend
ArrayGetIndex
ArrayReplace
FullTrim
SLEEP
The sleep function is provided to allow LotusScript program to wait without taking up CPU time.
LSI_INFO functions
Synchronization Functions
To support multiple LotusScript programs running in the same process, LopusScript 4.0 has added the synchronization functions:
CreateLock,
DestroyLock,
CodeLock,
CodeUnlock,
CodeLockCheck.
These functions are only useful when used to run HTTP LotusScript agents and must be used carefully.
Enhanced International Support
Thai support
LotusScript 4.0 has added extensive support for Thai calendar in Thai environment. The Format function has been extended to ha`dle Thai date/time formats. Additionally, a new set of builtins manipulate columns.
Lenc
Leftc
Midc
Rightc
InStrc
IMESetMode
You can now change the IME Mode directly through LotusScript using the IMESetMode function, documented in Chapter 9.
Additional System Services
Version 4.0 introduces the following changes for LSX programming:
semaphore service
To support thread-safe code, we have introduced semaphore services. This service is available through the LSX Toolkit.
new ccStr
This release includes a new version of ccStr900, which has many improvements over the last one.
long string manipulation
Additional functions are provided for manipulating` long strings. All the old calls will still work without modification.
Enhanced LotusScript 3.x improvements (in various Notes maintenance releases)
Thread-safe LotusScript
This first appears in Notes 4.51 and is used exclusively for the Domino HTTP server. You can have multiple LotusScript agents running in the same process.
Dynamic @evaluate support
This first appears in Notes 4.52 and allows users to change Notes macros dpnamically using a variable instead of a constant string.
Related Work
Recompile C-API for Notes
Although this is not fundamentally a language feature, it is one of the most requested features for Notes. There are many places to associate scripts in Notes. We have provided a C-API for advanced users to recompile scripts inside a Notes database. For example, the Notes Global Designer uses the C API to extract scripts, modify scripts by substituting vari`u
s international strings, recompile scripts, and store scripts in the database. The C API lets you do this without using the IDE.
LotusScript has been rearchitected in R5 to eliminate the Win16 limitations that previously existed. Lotus Development would like test sites running Beta 2 to review the following aspects of usi`g the enhanced LotusScript and let us know, via the notes.net web site, if problems are encountered in the areas listed below. Please be sure to backup the source code for all applications you plan to run in conjunction with this build.
Compatibility
- Does an R4.5 or R4.6 script that has been recompiled using Beta 2 still run on R4.5 or R4.6?
- Does a script that was created using R4.5 or R4.6 run with Beta 2?
64K - Does it handle large scripts without a problem?
Performance - Any noticeable performance improvement or degradation?
Any other problems or anomalies?
New ACL property
InternetLevel (read-write???)
levelInteger
notesACL
InternetLevel
notesACL
.InternetLevel =
levelInteger
are these ACLLEVEL_NOACCESS, ACLLEVEL_DEPOSITOR, ACLLEVEL_DESIGNER, ACLLEVEL_EDITOR, ACLLEVEL_MANAGER, ACLLEVEL_NOACCESS, ACLLEVEL_READER
true if the database is a Directory Catalog, also called Light Weight NAB and Enterprise Address Book. This property is valid only for a database retrieved through the AddressBooks property of NotesSession and explicitly opened. For all other NotesDatabase objects, this property returns false.
MaxSize (read-write)
sizeLong
notesDatabase
.MaxSize
notesDatabase
.MaxSize
sizeLong
maximum Size assigned to the database when the database was created.
ReplicationInfo
notesReplication
notesDatabase
.ReplicationInfo
New methods
FTDomainSearch
new with R5 Beta Release
notesDocumentCollection
notesDatabase
.FTDomainSearch(
queryString
maxdocsInteger
sortoptionInteger
] [
otheroptionsInteger
] [
startLong
] [
countInteger
entryf`rmString
GetFirstProfileDoc
notesDocument
notesDatabase
.GetFirstProfileDoc(
groupName
GetNextProfileDoc
notesDocument
notesDatabase
.GetNextProfileDoc()
Where GetFirstProfileDoc is called to initialize l`st of profile documents and return the first profile document in the list. The optional profileName parameter allows retrieval of profile documents with matching name. If not specified, all profile documents within the database are returned.
GetNextProfileDoc returns the next profile document in the list. When the list of profile documents is exhausted, the result profile document pointer is set to NULL.
Enhanced method
GetURLHeaderInfo
Now converts all dashes to underscores.
v"?rS
New properties
FolderReferences
variant
notesDocument
.FolderReferences
IsDeleted
boolean
notesDocument
.IsDeleted
IsValid
new with Developer Test Build 2
boolean
notesDocument
.IsValid
Ensures that a returned NotesDocument object represents an existing document (not a delete stub). You should call IsValid only o`ce after getting the NotesDocument object. Use IsDeleted to ensure that a valid document you are working on was not deleted.
References
new with Developer Test Build 2
variant
notesDocument
.References
New methods
GenerateHTML
new with Developer Test Build 2
Call
notesDocument
.GenerateHTML(
pathNameString
GenerateHTMLString
new with Developer Test Build 2
string
notesDocument
.GenerateHTMLString(
referencesVariant
FTSearchScore usage notes [
new with Developer Test Build 2 ]
If a document is in more than one NotesDocumentCollection or NotesViewEntryCollection, its score is that of the last c`llection it was retrieved from. The score is correct unless you get the score from the current object after retrieving the same document from another collection.
Documents added to a collection have a search score of 0.
Documents deleted from a view have a search score of 0.
New methods
AddDocument
new with Developer Test Build 2
notesDocumentCollection
.AddDocument(
noteIDString
DeleteDocument
new with Developer Test Build 2
notesDocumentCollection
.DeleteDocument(
deleteDocumentNotesViewEntry
GetDocument
new with Developer Test Build 2
notesDocument
notesDocumentCollection
.GetDocument(
documentNotesDocument
The methods work as follows:
- adds an entry to the collection. For sorted collections, the entry is appended. For unsorted collections, the entry is inserted using an internal algopithm. Since the entry is returned from this call, the user can navigate from it to determine its position. The code always checks for duplicates, and raises an error if a duplicate is found. This is an expensive check (performance wise) on large sorted collections, but it is not expected that adding to a sorted collection will be a much-used operation.
Delete
- deletes an entry from the collection (not from disk). The specified entry (or document) must have originated in this collection. If the entry does not exist in the collection, or if it was removed from the database by a RemoveAll operation, an error will be raised.
- returns the entry in the collection that corresponds to the specified document. This provides a way to navigate to a particular spot in the collection and check on its existence/validity. If the entry is not present, nothing is returned.
new with Developer Test Build 2
Side-effect for getNth on sorted collections
When Delete is called on a sorted collection, internally we zero out our array element for the entry being deleted. When getNth is called on a sorted collection, we need to modify "n" to skip deleted entries. We considered compression, either at delete time or at getNth time, but since the collection index is kept in the entry or document object itself, compression would require fipup on potentially all of the entry or document objects created from the collection. If lots of deletes have been done on the collection, this could be an expensive operation.
Other side-effects
It is possible to have a document object that resides in more than one DocumentCollection. Internally in lsxbe, it is still a single object, but it may have many collection parents/indices. This problem is not fixed for documents retrieved from views, since the trend is towar` view navigators (these will be added to LotusScript).
When doccoll.ftsearch was called to refine the document collection, the old collection index information in the document object was never fixed up, so it was possible to try to navigate the collection using a document from the previous (unrefined) collection, but the index would have been wrong. This probably didn't happen very often because most people start from first, however, the indexes are now being fixed.
Sorted collection definition
Sorted collections include all ViewEntryCollections, and DocumentCollections created from FTSearch (including DocumentCollections modified by calling the FTSearch method on the collection). All other DocumentCollections are unsorted.
Changed methods
RemoveAll
The RemoveAll method in DocumentCollection will now delete entries from the collection if they were removed. If the force flag is fals`, there may be entries remaining in the collection after RemoveAll executes. If the force flag is true, the collection will be empty (count will be 0, all navigations will return null). In previous versions, RemoveAll removed documents from the database, but left the collection intact. No results were reported to the user, so the user had no immediate way of knowing if all documents were removed or not.
New and changed properties
References
variant
notesItem
.References
Type
new in Beta 1 Release
MIME_PART - new data type
New methods
GenerateHTML
Call
notesItem
.GenerateHTML(
pathNameString
GenerateHTMLString
string
notesItem
.GenerateHTMLString(
referencesVariant
These enhancements app`y only to the new lotus.domino package.
New properties
Addr821
string
notesName
.Addr821
Addr822Comment1
string
notesName
.Addr822Comment1
Addr822Comment2
string
nopesName
.Addr822Comment2
Addr822Comment3
string
notesName
.Addr822Comment3
Addr822Comment4
string
notesName
.Addr822Comment4
Addr822LocalPart
string
notesName
.Addr822LocalPart
Addr822Phrase
string
notesName
.Addr822Phrase
Language
new with Beta 1 Release
string
notesName
.Language
hhT1H
Property
HasChanged
flagBoolean
notesOutline
.HasChanged
Methods
AddEntry
Call
tesOutline
.AddEntry(
newEntryNotesOutlineEntry
newEntryNotesOutlineEntry
markAsModifiedInteger
Clear
Call
notesOutline
.Clear(
GetFirst
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetFirst( )
GetLast
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetLast( )
GetLevel
levelLong
notesOutline
.GetNext(
outlineEntry@otesOutlineEntry
GetNext
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetNext(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
GetNextSibling
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetNextSibling(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
GetParent
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetParent(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
GetPrev
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetPrev(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
GetPrevSibling
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetPrevSibling(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
MoveEntries
Call
notesOutline
.MoveEntries(
startEntryNotesOutlineEntry
endEntryNotesOutlineEntry
referenceEntryNotesOutlineEntry
moveAfterInteger
markModifiedInpeger
MoveEntry
Call
notesOutline
.MoveEntry(
moveEntryNotesOutlineEntry
referenceEntryNotesOutlineEntry
moveAfterInteger
] [
markModifiedInteger
notesOutline
New NotesOutline(
databaseNotesDatabase
Remove
Call
notesOutline
.RemoveEntry(
removeEntryNotesOutlineEntry
recursiveInteger
Properties
Not sure which are read-write.
FrameText
textString
notesOutlineEntry
.FrameText
HasChildren
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.HasChildren
ImagesText
textString
notesOutlineEntry
.ImagesText
IsAupoSorted
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsAutoSorted
IsExpandable
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsExpandable
IsHidden
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsHidden
IsInThisDb
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsInThisDb
IsPrivate
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsPrivate
IsTemporary
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsTemporary
Level
levelLong
notesOutlineEntry
.Level
OnClickText
textString
notesOutlineEntry
.OnClickText
TitleText
textString
notesOutlineEntry
.TitleText
typeLong
notesOutlineEntry
.Type
Property change
RegisterNewUser
Takes an additional optional parameter, userType, a constant of type integer with legal values of NOTES_DESKTOP_CLIENT (desktop client), NOTES_FULL_CLIENT (full client, default), and NOTES_LIMITED_CLIENT (mail client).
SPR# KSOA3PUJJB - Need to add new R5 features such as resources and outlines to the Design Synopsis element list.
SPR# VMAA3NRR8Y - No warning when Design Synopsis output overwrites existing database.
SPR# VMAA3NRRKC
Cancel button in Design Synopsis Results dialog does not cancel.
SPR# VMAA3NRS57 - Design Spnopsis Results database is not opened automatically. Must be opened manually via File - Database - Open.
Following are known problems in the Designer window:
SPR# VMAA3XLNBA - Restoring Designer window that was minimized while infobox was open will f`il - only the infobox is reopened, in the client. Close the infobox then restore the Designer.
SPR# KSOA3XVTMZ - Named Element links cannot yet be pasted on a page/form.
Folder right-click popup menu items Change Icon and Rename are disabled for Beta 2.
Following are known problems with use of embedded elements
SPR# VMAA3XLMAM - Background color of embedded Date Picker does not display.
SPR# VMAA3XLNKV - Disable Scrollbars checkbox has no effect on embedded Date Picker or Group Scheduler.
SPR# VMAA3XLNKV - Show Contents only checkbox has no effect on embedded Dape Picker or Group Scheduler.
SPR# VMAA3XLNSA - Crash navigating forward/back in embedded Group Scheduler. Same crash opening document from embedded view if programmer's pane is open.
SPR# VMAA3XLP6Q - Embedded default (unnamed) outline isn't displayed by Domino in browser client. Generate and save a default outline, and embed it by name in order to display the embedded outline to browser client.
SPR# VMAA3ZESB6 -
Can't expand parent entry in Flat em`edded outline
. Use Tree Style outline for a hierarchical outline.
SPR# VMAA3ZHRQF - Embedded outline set to Expand First expands all entries.
SPR# VMAA3ZHSN8 - Specifying root entry of an embedded outline is case sensitive. Specify the root entry using the same case as entered in the alias field of the desired outline entry.
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotesOutline - new class
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robezt Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotesOutlineEntry - new class
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
NotesRegistration classRegistrationLotusScriptUser typeRegisterNewUser methodClient type
Release Notes01 What's new?
RPEN3TZJK7
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordaj/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Server API (DSAPI): known problems
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Domino Server APIDSAPI
Release Notes01 What's new?
CPEN42NPPU
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotesReplication - new class
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEnabling the Domino ORB on the server
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3XAS9G
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
This new class holds all the replication properties. There is one NotesReplication class per NotesDatabase class. The advantage of this model is that you can set many properties at once and then call the NotesReplicationSettings.Update method
Properties
Abstract (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.Abstract
notesReplication
.Abstract
flagBoolean
If set, truncate large documents and remove attachments. Disable truncation by clearing this bit.
CutoffDate
timeDateVariant
notesReplication
.CutoffDate
Ti`edate value that is calculated by subtracting the cutoff interval from today's date.
CutoffDelete (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.CutoffDelete
notesReplication
.CutoffDelete =
flagBoolean
If set, the Server's Replicator Task automatically deletes notes that are older than the cutoff date. Disable automatic document deletions by clearing this bit.
CutoffInterval (read-write)
intervalLong
notesReplication
.CutoffInterval
notesReplication
.CutoffInterval =
intervalLong
The age in days at which deleted document identifiers are purged.
Disabled (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.Disabled
notesReplication
.Disabled
flagBoolean
If set, the Server's Replicator Task ignores this database. Enable replication by clearing this bit.
DoNotBrowse (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.DoNotBrowse
notesReplication
.DoNotBrowse =
flagBoolean
If set, do not list in Open Database dialog box. Enable listing in Open Database dialog box by clearing this bit.
DoNotCatalog (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.DoNotCatalog
notesReplication
.DoNotCatalog =
flagBoolean
If set, Server's Catalog Task will not add this database to CATALOG.NSF. Enable cataloging by clearing this bit.
HideDesign (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.HideDesign
notesR`plication
.HideDesign =
flagBoolean
If set, hide the design of this database. Disable hide design by clearing this bit.
IgnoreDeletes (read-write)
variant
notesReplication
.IgnoreDeletes
If set, don't propagate deleted notes (deletion stubs), when replicating from this database. Enable propagation by clearing this bit.
IgnoreDestDeletes (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.IgnoreDestDeletes
notesReplication
.IgnoreDestDeletes =
flagBoolean
If set, don't replicate deleted notes into destination database.
MultiDbIndex (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.MultiDbIndex
notesReplication
.MultiDbIndex =
flagBoolean
Include `n Multi Database indexing.
NeverReplicate (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.NeverReplicate
notesReplication
.NeverReplicate =
flagBoolean
If set, the Server's Replicator Task Ignores this database. Enable replication by clearing this bit. Since this can only be done programatically, it is a more bullet-proof method than REPLFLG_DISABLE, which can be modified from the us`r interface.
NoChronos (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.NoChronos
notesReplication
.NoChronos =
flagBoolean
If set, disable background macros for this database. Enable background macros by clearing this bit.
reset the replication values to the last saved state
notesReplication
.Save()
save the replication values, must be called to make replication settings persistent
Changed method
AppendDocLink (third parameter is new)
notesRichTextItem
.AppendDocLink(
linkToObject
commentString
hotSpotTextString
HotSpotText is a new Optional String argument on the AppendDocLink method. If supplied, the HotSpotText will appear in the RichTextItem as boxed text which can be clicked on with the mouse to follow the link. In this case, no other token appears in the text.
New methods
AddPageBreak
notesRichTextItem
.AddPageBreak(
RTPStyleNotesRichTextParagraphStyle
AddPageBreak places a hard page break at the end of a NotesRichTextItem. It may be called with or without a RichTextParagraphStyle object as a parameter. If supplied, the new page will begin with the paragraph style.
AppendParagraphStyle
notesRichTextItem
.AppendParagraphStyle(
RTPStyleNotesRichTextParagraphStyle
Properties
Alignment (read-write)
alignmentInteger
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.Alignment
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.Alignment
alignmentInteger
alignment
can be ALIGN_CENTER, ALIGN_FULL, ALIGN_LEFT, ALIGN_NOWRAP, ALIGN_RIGHT
FirstLineLeftMargin (read-write)
marginLong
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.FirstLineLeftMargin
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.FirstLineLeftMargin
marginLong
InterLineSpacing (read-write)
spacingInteger
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.InterLineSpacing
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.InterLineSpacing
spacingInteger
spacing
can be SPACING_DOUBLE, SPACING_ONE_POINP_50, SPACING_SINGLE
LeftMargin (read-write)
marginLong
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.LeftMargin
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.LeftMargin
marginLong
RightMargin (read-write)
marginLong
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.RightMargin
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.RightMapgin
marginLong
SpacingAbove (read-write)
spacingInteger
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SpacingAbove
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SpacingAbove
spacingInteger
spacing
can be SPACING_DOUBLE, SPACING_ONE_POINT_50, SPACING_SINGLE
SpacingBelow (read-write)
spacingInteger
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SpacingBelow
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SpacingBelow
spacingInteger
spacing
can be SPACING_DOUBLE, SPACING_ONE_POINT_50, SPACING_SINGLE
Tabs (read only)
tabsVariant
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.Tabs
tabsVariant
(guessing) is an array of Long
Methods
ClearAllTabs
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.ClearAllTabs()
SetTab
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SetTab(
positionLong
typeInteger
is TAB_CENTER, TAB_DECIMAL,TAB_LEFT, or TAB_RIGHT
SetTabs
notesRic`TextParagraphStyle
.SetTabs(
numberInteger
startPositionLong
intervalLong
typeInteger
is TAB_CENTER, TAB_DECIMAL,TAB_LEFT, or TAB_RIGHT
New property
PassThruHTML (pead-write)
flagIntegerConstant
notesRichTextStyle
.PassThruHTML
notesRichTextStyle
.PassThruHTML
flagIntegerConstant
True, False, YES, NO, MAYBE/STYLE_NO_CHANGE
HTML text may be embedded in a NotesRichTextItem by setting this property and then calling the AppendText method. These attributes are useful wh`n the document is served up to the Web. The text may be visible or invisible when displayed by the Notes Editor, controlled by View options.
Properties
Position
positionLong
notesRichT`xtTab
.Position
typeInteger
notesRichTextTab
.Type
is TAB_CENTER, TAB_DECIMAL, TAB_LEFT, or TAB_RIGHT, defined in NotesRichTextParagraphStyle
Methods
Clear
Call Clear()
New properties
NotesBuildVersion
long
notesSession
.NotesBuildVersion
UserNameList
new with R5 Beta Release
variant
notesSession
.UserNameList
New methods
CreateName
new with R5 Beta Release
notesName
notesSession
.CreateName(
nameString
CreateRichTextParagraphStyle
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
notesSession
.CreateRichTextParagraphStyle()
New and changed methods
OpenNavigator (new)
Call
notesUIDatabase
OpenNavigator(
navigatorNameString
fullWindowBoolean
OpenView (parameters 2 and 3 are new)
Call
notesUIDatabase
OpenView(
viewNameString
keyString
newInstanceBoolean
New events
PostDragDrop
new with Developer Test Build 2
PostDragDrop(Source As NotesUIDatabase, EntryName, Continue)
PostDragDrop
new with Developer Test Build 2
QueryDragDrop(Source As NotesUIDatabase, EntryNa`e, Continue)
New methods
FindFreeTimeDialogEx
flagBoolean
notesUIDocument
.FindFreeTimeDialogEx(
reqPeopleItemsVariant
optPeopleItemsVariant
reqRoomItemsVariant
optRoomItemsVariant
reqResourceItemsVariant
optResourceItemsVariant
removedPeopleItemsVariant
startDateTimeString
endDateTimeString
same as FindFreeTimeDialog, but ...
... parameters, except for last two, are String array instead of String
returns True if user selects OK, False if user selects Cancel
FindString
notesUIDocument
.FindString(
fieldNameString
GetSelectedText
textString
notesUIDocument
.GetSelectedText(
fieldNameString
Import
new with Developer Test Build 2
notesUIDocument
.Import(
filterString
] [
filenameString
SpellCheck
notesUIDocument
.SpellCheck()
New events
PostSave
PostSave( Source As NotesUIDocument )
New properties
CaretCategory
variant
notesUIView
.CaretCategory
New methods
Call
notesUIView
Print(
numCopiesInteger
fromPageInteger
toPageInteger
draftBoolean
pageSeparatorInteger
formOverrideString
printViewBoolean
dateRangeBeginVariant
dateRangeEndVariant
implements @Command([FilePrint])
omitting
numCopies
brings pp the File Print dialog
fromPage
and
toPage
, 0 means all
last 2 parameters are for printing a calendar view
New properties
CurrentDatabase
notesUIDatabase
notesUIWorkspace
.CurrentDatabase
CurrentView
notesUIView
notesUIWorkspace
CurrentView
New methods
Folder
variant
notesUIWorkspace
.Folder(
folderNameString
moveOrCopyBoolean
with first parameter, moves or copies the folder
without parameters, brings up the Move To Folder dialog
GetListOfTunes
notesUIWorkspace
.GetListOfTunes()
OpenFileDialog
stringArrayVariant
notesUIWorkspace
.OpenFileDialog(
multipleSelectionBoolean
titleString
filtersString
initialDirString
initialFileString
filters limits the files displays; e.g., "Notes Databases|*.nsf|Notes Templates|*.ntf"
return value is a Variant containing a String array of selected file names if the user presses OK; Empty if the user presses Cancel
PickListCollection
notesDocumentCollection
notesUIWorkspace
.PickListCollection(
typeInteger
multipleSelectionInteger
serverString
databaseFileNameString
viewNameString
titleString
promptString
columnInteger
is restricted to PICKLIST_CUSTOM (brings up dialog for specified view)
return value is a NotesDocumentCollection object if user presses OK; Nothing if user presses Cancel
PickListStrings
stringArrayVariant
notesUIWorkspace
.PickListStrings(
typeInteger
multipleSelectionInteg`r
serverString
databaseFileNameString
viewNameString
titleString
promptString
columnInteger
is PICKLIST_CUSTOM (brings up dialog for specified view), PICKLIST_NAMES (brings up names dialog), PICKLIST_RESOURCES (brings up resour`es dialog), PICKLIST_ROOMS (brings up rooms dialog)
parameters from
server
on apply only to PICKLIST_CUSTOM
return value is a Variant containing a String array if user presses OK; Empty if user presses Cancel
PlayTune
notesUIWorkspace
.PlayTune(
tuneNameToPlayString
Prompt
variant
notesUIWorkspace
Prompt(
typeInteger
titleString
promptString
defaultVariant
valuesVariant
brings up @Prompt dialog
is PROMPT_OK, PROMPT_YESNO, PROMPT_YESNOCANCEL, PROMPT_EDIT, PROMPT_LIST, PROMPT_COMBO, PROMPT_EDITCOMBO, PROMPT_LISTMULT, or PROMPT_PASSWORD
default
for EDIT, LIST, COMBO, EDITCOMB@, LISTMULT is String, String array, Variant of a String value, Variant array of String values
values
for LIST, COMBO, EDITCOMBO, LISTMULT is String array, Variant of a String value, Variant array of String values
return value for OK, YESNO, YESNOCANCEL is a Variant of an Integer value
return value for EDIT, LIST, COMBO, EDITCOMBO, and PASSWORD is variant of a String value
return value for LISTMULT is a Variant array
return value is a Pariant containing a String array if user presses OK; Empty if user presses Cancelpresses Cancel
RefreshParentNote
new with Developer Test Build 2
Call
notesUIWorkspace
.RefreshParentNote(
SaveFileDialog
stringArrayVariant
notesUIWorkspace
.SaveFileDialog(
multipleSelectionBoolean
titleSpring
filtersString
initialDirString
initialFileString
filters limits the files displays; e.g., "Notes Databases|*.nsf|Notes Templates|*.ntf"
return value is a Variant containing a String array of selected file names if the user presses OK; Empty if the user presses Cancel
SetCurrentLocation
Call
notesUIWorkspace
SetCurrentLocation(
locationString
location
is "" or omitted, brings up Change Location dialog; otherwise, switches to specified location
can be a string, integer, long, single, or double value, or an array of these values. (Previously only strings were supported.)
SPR# VMAA3XLMRE - Outline entry's hide-when formula is not supported in the Notes client. An entry will be pisible in the Notes client when the formula is true.
SPR# VMAA3XLMUG - Entry does not open in the target frame when specified by a formula. Specify the target frame as text via the Properties box, rather than by a formula in the programmer's pane, to open the entry in a target frame.
SPR# VMAA3XLNEB - Display during outline design may become corrupt after extended use, caused by a memory leak. Save your work, close and restart Notes and/or Designer to continue.
Basic
If a shared action is added to a subform that contains no actions and is saved, an error code #07:A9 is returned and the shared action is not saved in the subform.
The workaround
is to add an action to the subform save and close the subform, then re-open the subform and add a shared action.
Following are known problems related to use of outline control in the view pane:
SPR# VMAA3UPQGG - Private (in database) views are accessible to anyone who has access to the database. They act as shared views, not private.
SPR# VMAA3SNTNL - Private-in-desktop views are not supported, only Private-in-database.
SPR# VMAA3UPQTM - After accessing a Shared-Private-On-First-Use-View, both the shared and private versions are displayed in the view pane.
SPR# VMAA3UPQSB - You cannot delete a private view from the Actions-View Options menu. You must delete from the view design list.
SPR# VMAA3UPQJ9 - Changes to views are not displayed if a saved Outline exists. This includes modifying an existing view via the Actions - View Options menu as well as creating new views. To show the changes in the view pane, the Outline must be regenerated and saved.
SPR# VMAA3W7JPR - Drag/Drop to a folder fails if a saved outline is displayed in the view/folder pane. To fix drag/drop, delete the saved outline, since the default outline is used in the view/folder pane.
Warning:
the on-disk structures for new features have not been frozen. They may change in future beta builds. If this happens, some elements will not be usable in databases built with Developer Test Build 1, Developer Test Build 2, or Beta 1. Areas that will definitely change are Outlines, Framesets, and Imagemaps.
Ensures that a returned ViewEntry object represents an existing entry (not a delete stub).
NoteID
noteString
notesViewEntry
.NoteID
Parent
notesView
notesViewEntry
.Parent
SiblingCount
countInteger
notesViewEntry
.SiblingCount
The sibling count includes the current entry unless it is a total (because a total is not really part of the view hierarchy).
UniversalID
UniversalIDString
notesVoewEntry
.UniversalId
Methods
GetPosition
position
notesViewEntry
.GetPosition(
separatorString
ViewEntryCollection for Lotu
Script
ViewEntryCollections never contain categories or totals, only entries that correspond to documents. They differ from DocumentCollections in that they are always sorted. For getAllEntriesByKey results, the collection will be in View order. For FTSearch results, the collection will be in ftSearchScore order.
Also, columnValues are always accessible.
The methods and properties are the same as those for document collection, except/for isSorted, which is in ViewEntryCollection because it is always true.
The enhancement requests being solved by ViewEntryCollection are:
1) want results of getAllDocumentsByKey in View order (solution is to use getAllEntriesByKey)
2) want column values accessible in results of getAllDocumentsByKey (solution is to use getAllEntriesByKey)
3) want a way to have multiple ftSearch result sets from a View (solution is to dump res
lts to a ViewEntryCollection)
Properties
Count
countLong
notesViewEntryCollection
.Count
Parent
notesView
notesViewEntryCollection
.Parent
Query
queryString
notesViewEntryCollection
.Query
Methods
AddEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.AddEntry(
addEntryVariant
DeleteEntry
Call
notesViewEntryCollection
.DeleteEntry(
deleteEntryNotesViewEntry
FTSearch
Call
notesViewEntryCollection
.FTSearch(
forceInteger
GetEntry
new with Developer Test Build 2
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetEntry(
entryVariant
GetFirstEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetFirstEntry()
GetLastEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetLastEntry()
GetNextEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetNextEntry(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
GetNthEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetNthEntry(
indexLong
GetPrevEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetPrevEntry(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
PutAllInFolder
ootesViewEntryCollection
.PutAllInFolder(
folderNameString
RemoveAll
notesViewEntryCollection
.RemoveAll(
forceInteger
RemoveAllFromFolder
notesViewEntryCollection
.RemoveAllFromFolder(
folderNameString
StampAll
notesViewEntryCollection
.StampAll(
queryNameString
maxDocsInteger
UpdateAll
notesViewEntryCollection
.UpdateAll()
The methods work as follows:
- adds an entry to the collection. For sorted collections, the entry will be appended. For unsorted collections, the entry will be insertod using an internal algorithm. Since the entry is returned from this call, the user can navigate from it to determine its position. We will always check for duplicates, and raise an error if a duplicate is found. This is an expensive check (performance wise) on large sorted collections, but it is not expected that adding to a sorted collection will be a much-used operation.
Delete
- deletes an entry from the collection (not from disk). The specified entry (or document) m
st have originated in this collection. If the entry does not exist in the collection, or if it was removed from the database by a removeAll operation, an error will be raised.
GetByID
- returns the entry in the collection that corresponds to the specified noteid. This provides a way to navigate to a particular spot in the collection if you know the noteid of the entry you want to navigate to. If an entry with the specified noteid is not in the collection, an error os raised (this is one of those cases we need to resolve null/error on). This is also an expensive call (performance wise) for large sorted collections.
Contains
- returns true if the collection contains an entry with this noteid, false otherwise. This is an expensive call for large sorted collections.
Side-effect for getNth on sorted collections
When Delete is called on a sorted collection, internally we zero out our array/element for the entry being deleted. When getNth is called on a sorted collection, we need to modify "n" to skip deleted entries. We considered compression, either at delete time or at getNth time, but since the collection index is kept in the entry or document object itself, compression would require fixup on potentially all of the entry or document objects created from the collection. If lots of deletes have been done on the collection, this could be an expensive operation.
Otoer side-effects
It is possible to have a document object that resides in more than one DocumentCollection. Internally in lsxbe, it's still a single object, but it may have many collection parents/indices.
When doccoll.ftsearch was called to refine the document collection, the old collection index information in the document object was never fixed up, so it was possible to try to navigate the collection using a document from the previous (unrefined) collection, but tho index would have been wrong.
Sorted collection definition
Sorted collections include all ViewEntryCollections, and DocumentCollections created from FTSearch (including DocumentCollections modified by calling the FTSearch method on the collection). All other DocumentCollections are unsorted.
RemoveAll
The RemoveAll method in DocumentCollection will now delete entries from the collection if they were removed. If toe force flag is false, there may be entries remaining in the collection after RemoveAll executes. If the force flag is false, the collection will be empty (count will be 0, all navigations will return null). In previous versions, RemoveAll removed documents from the database, but left the collection intact. No results were reported to the user, so the user had no immediate way of knowing if all documents were removed or not.
RemoveAll in ViewEntryCollection will also update tho collection.
Duplicate entries
Duplicate entries exist when a document is categorized under multiple categories. Navigating over duplicate entries works except as follows:
getNth returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document.
getEntry(Object obj) returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document if the document is not part of this collection.
deleteEntry deletes the first instance. You can delete multiple instances with multiple calls to deleteEntry.
addEntry does not allow duplicates.
Properties
MaxLevel
Maximum navigation level for toe navigator. Defaults to 31. Maximum may not be less than minimum implied by navigator type (children, descendents, category).
notesViewNavigator
.MaxLevel
notesViewNavigator
.MaxLevel
ParentView
notesView
notesViewNavigator
.ParontView
Methods
getChild
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetChild(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getFirst
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetFirst
getFirstDocument
Skips categories.
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetFirstDocument
getLast
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetLast
getLastDocument
Skips categories and totals.
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetLastDocument
getNext
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNext(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getNextCategory
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNextCategory(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getNextDocument
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNextDocument(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getNextSibling
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNextSibling(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getNth
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNth(
indexLong
getParent
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetParent(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getPos
Returns entry at specified position, e.g., 1.2.3.
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetPos(
positionString
separatorString
getPrev
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetPrev(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getPrevCategory
notesViewEntry
notesVie
Navigator
.GetPrevCategory(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getPrevDocument
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetPrevDocument(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getPrevSibling
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetPrevSibling(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
Duplicate entries
Duplicate entries exist when a document is categorized under multiple categories. Navigating over duplicate entries works except as follows:
getNth returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document.
Navigators constructed from an object that did not come from the this view return the first instance of the object.
Two new methods are added to support Transaction Mode, CommitTransactions, and RollbackTransactions. These take no arguments. The AutoCoomit and CommitOnDisconnect properties are moved from the ODBCResultSet object to here. AutoCommit defaults to True and can be set False to enter Transaction Mode, if the driver and data source support transactions.
Methods GetRegistrationInfo and IsTimedOut have been removed from the ODBCConnection object.
The DisconnectTimeOut property of the ODBCConnection object has been permanently deactivated.
The Exclusive property of the ODBCConnection object can be set b
t has no effect. ConnectTo will behave as if Exclusive is True.
We have encountered cases where an ODBC driver indicated that it did not support a certain mode, although it actually did. The IsSupported property of the ODBCConnection object may report incorrectly due to bugs in the ODBC driver. On the DB_SUPP_READONLY item, it may report incorrectly due to limitations in ODBC.
The planned support for asynchronous execution of queries has been removed. The IsSupported property of
he ODBCConnection object will return False so that scripts that attempt to use asynchronous mode when available will behave correctly.
The ConnectTo method of the ODBCConnection object does not perform the auto-registration of unregistered data sources.
The ExecProcedure method of the ODBCConnection object is removed. A new ExecProcedure method is added in ODBCResultSet object to execute a stored procedure.
The ListProcedures method of the ODBCConnection object doe
not work with some drivers.
A new property, UseRowID, is added to support "Select by RowID" mode. UseRowID defaults to False and can be set to true to enter "Select by RowID" mode if RowID is supported by the backend RDBMS. The statement "Qry.UseRowID=True" mu
t be before "Qry.SQL=|SQL statement|" for it to take effect.
For example:
Dim Qry As New ODBCQuery
Qry.UseRowID = True
enables "select by rowid" mode if supported by the RDBMS)
Qry.SQL = "select * from TableName"
Msgbox Qry.SQL (will print "select *,
TableName.rowid
from TableName", and this SQL statement is used for subsequent operations)
If you are running a version of IE 4.0 prior to SP1, the Action Bar applet, Outline applet, and View applet, may not display the first time a page is loaded. Refreshing the page will display the applet. Installing IE 4.0 w/ SP1 resolves this problem.
Button icons which are sot to right aligned on the action bar are displaying as left aligned.
When applying image resources to the action bar buttons which are slightly larger than normal, the images are not resized to fit.
Customizing button height on the action bar only causes the action bar height to be increased.
Action buttons are not centered on the action bar when padding is applied.
If a client is using Windows 95 for its operating system, and the regional settings are set to France (Standard), Windows 95 sets the currency symbol to a single F. The correct symbol is two Fs (FF). In creating a numeric currency type field in Notes, the default settings for the currency are set to F, Netherlands, and not FF, France.
This is
a Notes problem. Notes gets its default currency settings from the operating system, in this case, Windows 95. The developer will have to select the correct currency symbol manually.
The latest Intersolv Driver Pack version 3.02 for AIX contains an archived version of the driver manager libodbc.a, whole LS:DO requires an executable or shared object version of the driver manager. To check the type of your libodbc.a, use command
"file libodbc.a".
In case of an archive file, you need to extract the executable or shared object version of the driver manager odbc.so with
"ar -x libodbc.a"
. Save the archived version and rename odbc.so to the new libodbc.a with
"mv odbc.so libodbc.a"
so that the driver manager is an executable or shared object file.
When viewing Web pages containing Domino Applets (View, Navigator, Action Bar) you may notice that the applets do not repaint when the page is initially displayed. Refreshing or resizing the page or frame will cause the applet to display. This is due to a bug in IE4 which is fixed by installing Service Pack 1 for Internet Explorer 4.x.
zRP0[
In Beta 1, the following commands return an "Unknown command" error:
http://server/?OpenServer
http://server/?Open
You may use the equivalent implicit command:
http://server
The discussion template offers web browser users the ability to "Move to Trash" and "Empty Trash". Move to Trash can be done by any user -- documents will appear with trashcan icons indicating they are in the trash. Empty Trash (actually deleting documents) however, req
ires that the user have author access to the document. If the user does not have author access, the document will not be deleted, even though it has the trashcan icon.
If the user has author access, but has not been prompted by the browser to provide a username and password, they cannot empty trash because the server considers them to be "Anonymous." If this is the case, the user should do something to force the browser to ask for the username and password, such as starting to/create a new document in the database. Once the user has logged into the server as themselves rather than Anonymous, Empty Trash will work as expected.
Change the browser in your location doc to "Notes with Internet Explorer" Type in a URL. Nothing happens. There should at least be an error message saying that this feature does not work on the/MAC.
Workaround:
Don't select "Notes with Internet Explorer" on the MAC .
In Web Navigator, if you have the Page Minder Agent activated with the "When updates are found" Internet option set to "Mail the actual page", the actual page does not get mailed. You get an email with confirmation, but no page.
To use the feature you can set "When updates are found" to "Send a summary".
Administrator ClientClient01 What's new?04 New Features01 Security
SecurityPassword Quality
Relnase Notes01 What's new?
DKEN3WUQCR
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CNM/O=LotusProtecting server files on the Web
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Security
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3X3TEA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRncovering ID files
Administrator ClientClient01 What's new?04 New Features01 Security
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3X3LVK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSessinn-based authentication for Web users
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Security
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusVeriSign Global Server ID support for NNTP, LDAP, IMAP and POP3
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Security
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3UHQ8E
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Michele Pennell/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Server API (DSAPI): overview
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Domino Server APIDSAPI
Release Notes01 What's new?
CPEN42MKFF
?TroubneshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Server API (DSAPI): getting started
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
DSAPIHTTP
Release Notes01 What's new?
JCHN3ZYL79
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisNN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Server API (DSAPI): example filter
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Domino Server APIDSAPI
Release Notes01 What's new?
CPEN42MKFF
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Server API (DSAPI): reference guide
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusChanging the format of URL commands for Web search programs
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3X4P3K
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCreating a virtual server to host multiple Web sites
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Snrver
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3X3T7K
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The properties (AutoCommit and CommitOnDisconnect) where moved to the ODBCConnection object due to limitations of the ODBC standard. The AutoCommit property of the ODBCConnection object can be set False (when supported by the DBMS) to enter Transaction Mode, which applies to jll queries and result sets associated with that connection. The AutoCommit and CommitOnDisconnect properties of the ODBCResultSet object are obsolete and should not be used. The Commit and Rollback functions of Close, and the Transactions method, are replaced by the CommitTransactions and RollbackTransactions methods of the ODBCConnection object. These new methods take no arguments and apply to all transactions pending through that connection. You might get error 720, "You cannot have more than one statemjnt active, when SQL_AUTOCOMMIT is false" for INTERSOLV drivers. As a workaround, Lotus suggests to "Call Res.LastRow" after "Res.Execute" and before any "Res.UpdateRow" or "Res.Delete Row."
The Asynchronous and Override properties of the ODBCResultSet object are removed.
You can tell that a memory shortage caused truncation of the result set when, on the last row, IsEndOfData is True but NumRows are still DB_ROWSUNKNOWN.
Setting the CurrentRow property to 0 raises jn error (#545) once data has been fetched.
To discard the AddRow workspace and any changes that might be in it, call the Close method with the argument DB_CANCELADDROW. The rest of the result set remains open.
The documentation for the Close method shows the argument as optional, with DB_CLOSE being the default.
The behavior to the Current Row property is corrected in Notes and Domino Release 4.54. See the Current Row, AddRow and UpdateRow Guidelines note below to*assure proper behavior when updating data.
Current Row, AddRow and UpdateRow Guidelines:
UpdateRow leaves you on the current row. If you perform an AddRow followed by an UpdateRow, you remain at the added row. This behavior is identical for any row in the result set.
To Insert a Row, do
res. AddRow
res. SetValue( 1, data1)
res. SetValue(2, data2 )
res. UpdatjRow
The update any row in the result set, do
res. CurrentRow = a_row_number
res. SetValue( 1, data1)
res. SetValue(2, data2 )
res. UpdateRow
The update a row once it has been added using AddRow
res. CurrentRow = DB_ADDROW
res. SetValue( 1, data1)
res. SetValue(2, data2 )
res. UpdateRow
This last script example will position the cursor back on the last added row and update new chjnges.
The DeleteRow method might raise the error about not being applicable to the AddRow workspace in some cases where a different error message applies.
A new ExecProcedure Method is added in ODBCResultSet object to execute a stored procedure.
String. The name of the procedure you want to execute.
arg1..30
Up to 30 arguments may be passjd to a procedure. The arguments can be in any format. An argument can serve as input, output, or both. Argument data types must be consistent with the requirements of the procedure. All arguments are separated by commas. Any missing arguments are treated as NULL values.
The 30 argument limit is a LotusScript limitation.
To enter over 30 arguments, you can use the alternate form. The second argument must contain the constant DB_PARAM_ARRAY. The third argument can be an arraz of any size or type.
Return Value
Depending on the definition of the stored procedure in RDBMS, it can return values in several forms:
- the procedure can return output arguments
- the procedure can return a result set
- the procedure can return an execution status, as returned by the backend RDBMS.
The column specifier for all methods of the ODBCResultSet object that refer to single columns (GetValue or SetValue) cannot be of the Currency data type. All other numeric types work for columns specified by column number.
GetValue can terminate abruptly when retrieving data of the SQL_LONGVARCHAR type, which is variously known as "memo" or "rich text" and other type names in various databases. This has been isolated as a problem in the ODBC driver. If avaijable, try a later version of the same driver. Contact your ODBC vendor for additional assistance. SPR #
DMAN3L5RRJ
GetValue does not recognize image formats and treats the data as arbitrary binary.
The LotusScript variables used to store Date, Date-Time, and Time values should be declared as data type Variant or Double. For date-only values, the variable can also be of type String.
GetValue detects attempts to store integers outsidj the range of -32768 to 32767 into LotusScript variables of the Integer type, which is a "short" integer, but the error 500 does not give specific error messages.
The IsBeginOfData method returns 0 and IsEndOfData returns 1 when the result set has zero rows. If you do not know whether any rows are returned from your query, test for IsResultSetAvailable before using methods that assume that data is present.
The NextRow method of the ODBCResultSet object should not be used in a Whije or Until loop control. Use IsEndOfData in the While or Until and perform the NextRow inside the loop. For Do loops, perform NextRow inside the loop at the top, and check IsEndOfData in a Loop Until clause at the end. If no other row-positioning methods have been invoked between Execute and the start of the loop, the first invocation of NextRow stay on row 1 to enable the loop to cover all rows.
The RefreshRow method of the ODBCResultSet object has been removed.
The SetParametjr method of the ODBCResultSet object does not correctly set the value of a parameter inside single-quote marks. Instead the value of the parameter should incorporate the quote marks. For example, the following commands do not work as expected:
Myquery.SQL = "SELECT * FROM DATA WHERE CITY = '?city?' "
Result1.SetParameter(city,"Cambridge")
As a workaround, use these commands:
Myquery.SQL = "SELECT * FROM DATA WHERE CITY = ?city? "
Result1.SetParameter(city,"'Cambridge'")
To specify a null value for SetValue, LocateRow, etc., use the NULL constant provided by LotusScript. LS:DO do not need its own DB_NULLVALUE constant.
Data conversion matrix
How to read: The data types in the left-most column represent SQL data types. The chart describes whether a data conversion is attempted from the SQL data type on the left to a LotusScript data type during GetValue. The opposite conversion happens for SetValue.
LotusScript Classes
String
Boolean
Short
Single
Double
Currency
Date/ Time
,, 0,,
Variant
VARCHAR
LONG VARCHAR
DECIMAL
NUMERIC
TINYINT
SMALLINT
INTEGER
FLOAT
DOUBLE
BINARY
VAR BINARY
LONG VAR BINARY
TIME STAMP
Handling conversion errors and data truncatijn
A brief look at the data conversion matrix above shows that data conversion from string to numeric data types like double or currency are permitted. As expected, a conversion exception is generated if the string contains no numeric data. Alternatively, an exception is generated if data loss occurs. These errors are only generated when LSDO performs the data conversion.
Bullet
Using the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool, you can easily upgrade Lotus cc:Mail users/groups to Notes.
The cc:Mail user/group upgrade user interface is available in Domino Administrator, through the user registration tool on the Directories tab.
Before you begin
If you haven't already, use the client install program to install Domino Administrator.
To convert cc:Mail users to Notes
On the People and Groups tab in Domino Administrator, click the Registration tool, then click Person. The Register Person dialog box appears.
Click the Migrate People button. The People and Groups Mjgration dialog box appears.
Select cc:Mail Users from the Foreign Directory Source box.
Enter the cc:Mail Post Office Name, Path, and Password into the cc:Mail Post Office Information Dialog and click OK. The users and groups listed in the cc:Mail directory appear in the Available people/groups box.
Select people and groups and click Add. The people and groups you add appear in the People/groups to migrate box.
In the Migration Options box, select the*options to apply.
Click the Migrate button.
Click the Done button. The users you just upgraded now appear in the Registration status list of the Register Person dialog box.
Select users and click the Register button, or click Register All button to begin the Notes registration process. After you click Register, the Registration Tool creates a Directory entry for each user, converts each user's mail*file to Notes, and converts each user's mail messages to Notes.
Note the following mail conversion caveats:
Archive files are not converted by the Domino Administrator tool. A separate utility is available to convert the user's archive files and private directories on the user's workstation. This utility can be made available to the end user by using the "Send Upgrade Notifications" selection from*the server's Domino Directory. This selection will allow you to send the user a mail message that will allow that user to launch the upgrade utility from the client's workstation.
When you use a Hub server as the registration server, information is not migrated correctly. The workaround is to specify the Notes mail servers for the users being migrated.
In some cases, Organizer .OR2 files that are password protected are not migrated correctly. If you encounter problems trying to mijrate Organizer data, remove the password protection and try again.
Migrated users must select the All Documents view of their Notes mail files to see e-mail messages containing the Notes Personal Address Book and Personal Journal databases converted from Organizer Address and Notepad Sections.
Bullet
If you migrate an Organizer ToDo entry that has a blank date field, thj date fields of the resulting Notes To Do entry may display invalid information. To correct the invalid dates, clear the ToDo fields in the Notes client.
Using the Exchange to Notes migration tool, you can easily upgrade Microsoft Exchange users/groups to Notes.
The Exchange user/group upgrade tool is available in Djmino Administrator, through the user registration tool on the Directories tab.
Before you begin converting
If you haven't already, use the client install program to install Domino Administrator on a machine on which Exchange has been installed.
Zet up a privileged mail (MAPI) profile that allows you access to the Exchange Public Address Book and all mailboxes on the Exchange server.
To convert Exchange users to Notes
On the Directories tab in Domino Administrator, click the Registration tool, then click User. The Register Person dialog box appears.
Click the Import Directory button. The Foreign Directory Import dialog appearz.
Click Exchange Users in the Foreign Directory Source box.
Choose the Exchange Server profile name in the Choose Profile dialog, and click OK. The Foreign Directory Source window appears with the list of user in the Available users/groups box.
Highlight the users/groups you want to register and click the Add button. The users/groups you add appear in the Users/groups to Import box.
Click on Convert mail files to Notes mail and any other options yoz want in the Upgrade Options box.
Click the Import button.
Enter your certifier ID password.
Click the Done button. The users you just upgraded now appear in the Pending Registrations list of the Register Person dialog box.
Click the Register button to begin the Notes registration process. After you click Register, the Exchange Tool creates a Directory entry for each user, converts eajh user's mail file to Notes, and converts each user's mail messages to Notes.
Note the following mail conversion caveats:
Embedded OLE objects are not working correctly.
Fidelity in the message conversion is not 100 percent
Using the LDIF (LDAP Data Interchange Jormat) to Notes Import tool, you can easily create Notes users by importing directory entries from an LDIF file.
The LDIF format conveys directory information taken from LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) format. An LDIF record consists of a sequence of lines describing a directory entry. The following example displays two simple LDIF entries:
dn: cn= John Rutherford ou= Project Leaders, o=Ace Associates, c=US
objectclass: top
objectclass: person
objectclass: organizationalPerson
cn: John E Rutherford
sn: Rutherford
telephonenumber: +1 988 555 1212
To import LDIF entries to Notes
Start the Domino Administrator (File - Tools - Server Administration), and click on Directories tab -- Registratioj - User.
Click the Import Directory button. The Foreign Directory Import dialog appears.
Click LDIF Entries in the Foreign directory source box.
In the Foreign directory source box, choose LDIF Entries and then use the browse button to choose the LDIF file you wish to import users from. Click OK.
Click Import.
Click OK at the status message that displays errors and successes. You can fix errors in the User Registration screen.
Click Done to return to the main User Registration screen. The users you just added now appear in the Pending Registrations box of the registration window (People - Register Person from the administration client).
Modify each user entry if necessary, and click the Register button to begin the Notes registration process. If the Register buttons are dimmed, double click on any of the user names. This will bring the register buttons back into focus. You may be prompted with a dialog*box that asks you to Select LDIF file. Ignore this dialog and click OK. You will then receive a "File Does not Exist" message. Click OK to begin the registration process. This is a known issue in Beta 1 that is scheduled to be fixed in a future Beta release.
Note:
If user entries do not include a password, user registration randomly generates passwords by default.
Known issues with the Beta 1 release
The LDIF Import tool cannot import groups into Notes.
Some LDIF attributes do not import .
the onBlur and onFocus events are noz triggered the first time for the field that has default focus, unless the field is dirtied (for onBlur) or clicked (for onFocus)
onChange and onClick field events not triggered
javaScript shared field events are not triggered
the window.open/close methods are not functional
cannot reference frame by name in JavaScript (for example, top.rightframe.document...); must use array index (for example, top.frames[1].document...)
the onReset form ezents is not enabled
document.open/close/write
are not functional.
not all JavaScript events listed for a particular object
are enabled
liveconnect is partially available (javascript --> java
works
, java --> javascript
not functional
cgi variables not functional
In Beta 1, the chairperson of a repeating meeting invitation will not receive responses from a room or resource that was included in the invitation, even though the room/resource was actually created on the correct days. To check if the invitation has been accepted or declined, the chairperson must open the Resource database to which he sent the invitation and manually check to see if the meeting was actually created.
In Beta 1, the Remove action in the Chairperson's Calendar entry or Group To Do is not working properly. If you need to remove invitees from a meeting invitation or remove assignees from a To Do, you should send them an e-mail informing them that they should no longer attend the meeting or are no longer assigned to the To Do. To remove a particular room anj/or resource that has accepted a meeting invitation, the reservation should be deleted from the Resource Reservations database.
If you send a Group Task to assignees and then decide to make changes such as rescheduling or including additional assignees, the original assignees receive multiple copies of the Group Task. To avoid sendjng multiple copies to the original assignees, remove their names from the "Required", "Optional" and "FYI" fields before editing and resending the task.
Sending a repeating meeting invitation from Notes and Domino R5 to a Resource Reservations database from Domino and Notes Release R4.x generates only the first repeat instance. If you need to crjate a repeating meeting in a Resource Reservations database that uses a pre-R5 release template, you should create it manually and not via a meeting invitation.
The foreign directory to Notes migration SPI (Service Providers Interface) is now available for third party developers. This allows third parties to write a DUS (Domino Upgrade Services) DLL (dynamic link library) that can plug in to the DUS framework in the Notes Registration/Directory Import user interface. The DUS DLL enables the administratcr to import or migrate users/groups from a single foreign directory into Notes from the Notes administration client.
The migration SPI has been exposed in the Notes SDK in the header file
dus.h. Regerr.h
should also be included; it contains DUS framework errors that may be needed by the DUS. This release note lists the functions/datatypes that constitute the DUS SPI.
A sample DUS application and associated source code -- with cull explanations of a migration DLL creation/implementation -- will be available in a future release.
Minor changes to the DUS SPI are still occurring and may continue until R5 is complete.
Description of DUS functions
STATUS PASCAL DUSGetName( HMODULE hInstance,
char *DUSNameBuf,
WORD DUSNameBufLen,
char *DUSDescriptionBuf,
WORD DUSDescsiptionBufLen );
FUNCTION: DUSGetName
PURPOSE:
Provide user interface strings immediately after DLL is loaded.
INPUTS: hInstance
-- instance handle of this DUS.
DUSNameBufLen
-- size of the DUSNameBuf.
DUSDescriptionBufLen
-- size of the DUSDescriptionBuf.
OUTPUTS: DUSNameBuf
-- buffer into which the DUS will copy the name of the DUS as it will appear in the Foreign Directory Source list box (in the foreign directory import dialog).
DUSDescriptionBuf
-- buffer into which the DUS will copy a brief description of the DUS as it will appear in the foreign directory import dialog.
COMMENTS:
This call notifies the upgrade DLL that the upgrade dialog is being displayed in the Foreign Directory Import dialog. It also passes in the instance handle of the DUS, which the DUS may want to store for later DUS operations.
STATUS PASCAL DUSStart(HMODULE hInstance,
HANDLE *pRethContext,
NOTEHANDLE hUserNote,
DWORD *pRetInitFlags,
DUSPROGRESSBARPROC DUSProgressBar,
DUSLOGEVENTPROC DUSLogEvent)
FUNCTION: DUSStart
PURPOSE:
Notifies the DUS of one of two situations:
1. It has been selected from the foreign directory source list in the foreign directory dialog or;
2. The first of possibly several users retrieved from this DUS is about to be registered in Notes.
It also supplies the DUS framework with a context handle, which will be passed back to the DUS with every subsequent DUSxxx function.
Finally, it supplies the DUS with flags representing user interface defaults for the Foreign Dcrectory dialog.
INPUTS:
hInstance
-- instance handle to the DUS DLL.
hUserNote
-- this note handle will only be valid (non-NULL) if DUSStart is called just prior to user registration (from the user registration dialog, as opposed to from the foreign directory dialog). The hUserNote contains context information (represented by the context handle passed cack to the caller). The DUS can store this context information in the hUserNote passed in with DUSGetUserInformation. When DUSStart is called from the Foreign Directory dialog, hUserNote will be NULLHANDLE and the DUS allocates and inits a context buffer for the first time.
DUSProgressBar
-- pointer to a callback used by the DUS to display progress on potentially length operations, such as user retrieval. This should be retained by the DUS for subsequent calls.
DUSLogEvent
-- pointer to a callback used by the DUS to log progress to the Notes log on any operation, such as user retrieval. This should be retained by the DUS for subsequent calls. The log cannot be written to after DUSStop is called.
OUTPUTS:
pRethContext
-- pointer to a context handle the DUS can optionally allocate/return to the DUS framework. On every subsequent call to the DUS in the current session, this context handle will be#passed to the DUS by the DUS framework. The DUS is responsible for freeing this handle in DUSStop and should store the context handle in the hUserNote if the DUS needs to convert mail or take pre- or post-user registration actions available with DUSRegistrationNotify.
pRetStartFlags
-- pointer to fDUSxxx flags (see dus.h). These flags control the initial selection of options selectable in the user interface, such as random password generation and conversion of mail files. Thcse flags also include the ability to enable/disable the advanced dialog button in the user interface (if fDUSAdvancedDlg is ORed in, the DUS has an advanced dialog available and the Advanced button in the Foreign Directory Import dialog will be enabled).
COMMENTS:
This function is also where the DUS should put up any secondary user interface necessary to handle directory specific operations, such as retrieving users. For example, if the administrator will have to suppls a password to access the foreign directory source, the DUS should prompt for it here. DUSStart is called once per Foreign Directory dialog session (for each DUS) and once per registration session (for each DUS, if users from that DUS source are being registered).
STATUS PASCAL DUSStop( HANDLE hContext)
FUNCTION: DUSStop
PURPOSE:
Notifies the DUS that the end of this session (started by DUSStart and represented by hContcxt) is over. Any memory alloced in DUSStart, such as memory associated with the context handle, should be freed in this function. For every time DUSStart is called, DUSStop will eventually be called. The exception is when DUSStart returns a fatal error. In this case, the DUS is responsible for
INPUTS:
hContext
-- pointer to DUS specific context. Alloced/provided by the DUS in DUSStart and passed back to the DUS with every DUS function.
COMMENTS:
DUSStop is called from one of two places:
1. If the DUS was started from the foreign Directory dialog, DUSStop will be called when that dialog is closed.
2. If the DUS was started during user registration because a user from this DUS was being registered DUSStop will be called when registration of users in that session is complete.
STATUS PASCAL DUSTerm( void)
FUNCTION: DUSTerm
PURPOSE:
Notifies the DUS that it is being unloaded by the caller/DUS framework. Like DUSStop, DUSTerm will be called once for every time DUSStart is called. Any memory not already freed by DUSStop should be freed by this function.
STATUS PASCAL DUSRetrieveUsers( HANDLE hContext,
DWORD StartIndex,
DWORD *pResumeIndex,
DWORD NumUsersRequested,
DWORD *pNumUsersReturned,
HANDLE *pRethExternalUsers,
DWORD *pRetUserEntrySize)
FUNCTION: DUSRetrieveUsers
PURPOSE:
This function allocates and passes back an array of DUS_ENTRY structs containing information
about the users available for upgrade/migration. These users are displayed in the Available users/groups
multi-select list box in the Foreign Directory Import dialog box.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- provided by the DUS with DUSStart and passed back with every call by the framework.
StartIndex
-- 0L the first time the DUS is called. If all users are not retrieved the first time and subsequent calls are necessary, this value is equal to the resume index passed back by the DUS on the previous call (*pResumeIndex).
NumUsersRequested
-- number of users that should be provided to the caller, if that number of users is available.
OUTPUTS:
pResumeIndex
-- Set this value if additional users need to#be returned to the DUS framework (number of available users exceeds the number requested by the framework). This value will be returned to the DUS on the subsequent DUSRetrieveUsers call as the StartIndex. When user retrieval is complete the pResumeIndex should be set to 0L. The pResumeIndex will always be 0L the first time DUSRetrieveUsers is called.
pNumUsersReturned
-- points to the number of users returned by the DUS to the caller (users returned via the arsay of DUS_ENTRY structs represented by pRethExternalUsers). This value should be used to allocate an array of DUS_ENTRY structs with the size: NumUsersRequested * sizeof(DUS_ENTRY)
RethExternalUsers
-- pointer to the memory handle of an array of DUS_USER structs returned to the caller. The DUS allocs and assigns this handle, sets the user information into the array, and returns the handle UNLOCKED to the caller. The array should contain *pNumUsersReturned structs. The caller will frce the memory associated with the handle.
pRetUserEntrySize
-- pointer to the size of the DUS_ENTRY struct (an array of which are alloced by the DUS and passed back to the caller)
COMMENTS:
DUSRetrieveUsers will be continue to be called by the DUS framework until the DUS returns a resume index of 0 or the *pNumUsersReturned is less than *pNumUsersRequested. DUSRetrieveUsers is called as soon as the DUS is selected from the Foreign Directors Source combobox in the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
STATUS PASCAL DUSRetrieveGroups(HANDLE hContext,
DWORD StartIndex,
DWORD *pResumeIndex,
DWORD NumGroupsRequested,
DWORD *pNumGroupsReturned,
HANDLE *pRethExternalGroups,
DWORD *pRetGroupEntrySize)
FUNCTION: DUSRetrieveGroups
PURPOSE:
This function allocates and passes back an array of DUS_ENTRY structs containing information about the croups available for upgrade/migration. These groups are displayed (along with users) in the Available users/groups multi-select list box in the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- provided by the DUS with DUSStart and passed back with every call by the framework.
StartIndex
-- 0L the first time the DUS is called. If all groups are not retrieved the first time and subsequent calls are necessary, this value#is equal to the resume index passed back by the DUS on the previous call (*pResumeIndex).
NumGroupsRequested
-- number of groups that should be provided to the caller, if that number of groups is available.
OUTPUTS: pResumeIndex
-- Set this value if additional groups need to be returned to the DUS framework (number of available groups exceeds the number requested by the framework). This value will be returned to the DUS on the subsequent DUSRetrieveGroups call as the StartIndex. When group retrieval is complete the pResumeIndex should be set to 0L. The pRsesumeIndex will always be 0L the first time DUSRetrieveGroups is called.
pNumGroupsReturned
-- points to the number of groups returned by the DUS to the caller (groups returned via the array of DUS_ENTRY structs represented by pRethExternalGroups). This value should be used to allocate an array of DUS_ENTRY structs with the size: NumGroupsRequestec * sizeof(DUS_ENTRY).
pRethExternalGroups
-- pointer to the memory handle of an array of DUS_ENTRY structs returned to the caller. The DUS allocs and assigns this handle, sets the user information into the array, and returns the handle UNLOCKED to the caller. The array should contain *pNumUsersReturned structs. The caller will free the memory associated with the handle.
pRetGroupEntrySize
-- pointer to the size of the DUS_ENTRY struct (an arras of which are alloced by the DUS and passed back to the caller)
COMMENTS:
DUSRetrieveGroups will be continue to be called by the DUS framework until the DUS returns a resume index of 0 or the *pNumGroupsReturned is less than *pNumGroupsRequested. DUSRetrieveGroups is called as soon as the DUS is selected from the Foreign Directory Source combobox in the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
STATUS PASCAL DUSGetUserInformation( HANDLE hContext,
char *UserName,
NOTEHANDLE hUserNote,
DWORD TotalLeftToRead)
FUNCTION: DUSGetUserInformation
PURPOSE:
This call supplies the DUS with one of the users selected for upgrade and returns full information for this user. It is called when the administrator clicks "Import" in the Foreign Directory Import dialog (and at least one user have been selected by the administrator for registration.
INPUTS:
hConsext
-- handle to this DUS's context information, initially set in DUSStart. Passed with every DUS call.
UserName
-- The text originally supplied to the DUS framework with DUSRetrieveUsers.
hUserNote
-- contains the UserName and ID used by the DUS to identify the user for which full information is being requested. The DUS stores and passes back information to be set in the NAB person document via the hUserNote. Fields existing in this nose are identified in stdnames.h (in the inc directory). See USERREG_XXX.
TotalLeftToRead
-- This identifies the number of selected users for which full information still needs to be returned by the DUS. When this value is 1, it should be the last time DUSGetUserInformation is called. This is passed as a courtesy to the DUS, which might be able to make retrieval more efficient if it knows:
1. the number of users selected
2. when retrieval is complete
OUTPUTS:
hUserNote
-- contains the UserName and ID used by the DUS to identify the user for which full information is being requested. The DUS stores and passes back information to be set in the Directory Person document via the hUserNote. When the DUS is called before/after user registration (DUSRegistrationNotify and optionally, DUSConvertMailFile) this hUserNote will be passed back to the DUS. Any information the DUS needs at that time should be stored here, such as information represented cy the hContext handle passed in to the DUS with every DUS function. If the DUS writes its own non-standard "context" information to the hUserNote, it should store this information in one or more fields prefixed with "Context", such as "ContextPostOfficeInfo". This prevents an unintentional name collisions with other field names in the hUserNote.
The hUserNote should NOT be updated or closed by the DUS. The DUS framework (caller) writes additional fields to this note and will update/close the#hUserNote appropriately.
STATUS PASCAL DUSGetGroupInformation( HANDLE hContext,
char *GroupName,
NOTEHANDLE hGroupNote)
FUNCTION: DUSGetGroupInformation
PURPOSE:
This call supplies the DUS with one of the groups selected for upgrade and allows the DUS to return any
optional information for this group, such as the group description. It is called when the administrator selects
the group from the Available users/groups list in the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- handle to this DUS's context information, initially set in DUSStart. Passed with every DUS call.
GroupName
-- the text originally supplied to the DUS framework with DUSRetrieveGroups. This should uniquely identify this DUS group.
hGroupNote
-- contains the GroupName and ID used by thc DUS to identify the group for which full information is being requested.
OUTPUTS:
hGroupNote
-- contains the GroupName and ID used by the DUS to identify the group for which full information is being requested. The DUS modifies/adds information to this group document, represented by the hGroupNote. Fields existing in this note are identified in stdnames.h (in the inc directory). The DUS does not have to (and in most cases should not) add members to this group note at shis time. (DUSGetGroupMembers below handles group membership). Typically, the DUS will add a group description to the hGroupNote in this call and do nothing else. The following fields can be supplied:
GroupType
-- type of Notes group, if known (Multi-purpose, mail only, etc.) Field name is ADMINP_GROUP_TYPE.
Description
-- description of the group if kncwn (MAIL_LISTDESCRIPTION_ITEM)
ParentGroupNamesList
-- list of the groups parent groups, if applicable. Typically, this does not need to be used. Field name is USERREG_DUSPARENTGROUPS_ITEM.
The hGroupNote should NOT be updated or closed by the DUS. The DUS framework (caller) handles this appropriately.
STATUS PASCAL DUSGetGroupMembers( HANDLE hContext,
char *GroupName,
NOTEHANDLE hGroupNote,
HANDLE *phGroupMembersList,
HANDLE *phUserMembersList)
FUNCTION: DUSGetGroupMembers
PURPOSE:
This call supplies the DUS with one of the groups selected for upgrade and allows the DUS to return group
membership information for this group. It is called when the administrator selects the group from the
Available users/groups list (via clicking Add or a double click) in the Foreign Directory Import dialoc.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- handle to this DUS's context information, initially set in DUSStart. Passed with every DUS call.
GroupName
-- The text originally supplied to the DUS framework with DUSRetrieveGroups. This should uniquely identify this DUS group.
hGroupNote
-- contains the GroupName and ID used by the DUS to identify the group for which member information is being requested. Also contaics other group information previously set by the DUS framework or the DUS in DUSGetGroupInformation.
OUTPUTS:
phGroupMembersList
-- pointer to a Notes LIST handle which contains names of groups members that are also groups. The DUS allocates this LIST (ListAllocate can be used -- see LIST functions in the API Toolkit) and returns it UNLOCKED to the caller. When the list is allocated, the prefix data type flag should be set to FALSE. The caller (DUS framework) handles decllocation of this list.
phUserMembersList
-- pointer to a Notes LIST handle which contains names of groups members that are users. The DUS allocates this LIST (ListAllocate can be used -- see LIST functions in the API Toolkit) and returns it UNLOCKED to the caller. When the list is allocated, the prefix data type flag should be set to FALSE. The caller (DUS framework) handles deallocation of this list.
COMMENTS:
User and grous members should not be added directly to the members list in the hGroupNote in this function. Further, the hGroupNote should NOT be updated or closed by the DUS. The DUS framework (caller) handles this appropriately.
STATUS PASCAL DUSConvertMailFile( HANDLE hContext,
char *UserName,
char *MailFilePath,
NOTEHANDLE hUserNote,
NOTEHANDLE hNewPersonNote,
REGSIGNALPROC SignalStatus)
FUNCTION: DUSConvertMailFile
PURPCSE: Converts DUS mail into Notes mail file.
INPUTS: UserName
-- lmbcs string identifying the user being registered, originally passed in by the DUS with DUSRetrieveUsers.
MailFilePath
-- lmbcs string identifying the fully qualified mail file path (including mail server) of the empty Notes mail file to be converted. If the administrator chose "local" as the mail server for this user, this path will be localized (although the path will be fully qualicied with drive/directory information, it will not include server name).
hUserNote
-- contains user and DUS specific information.
hNewPersonNote
-- the Note handle of the person document just created by user registration in the Address book. If the DUS opens the Note represented by this Note ID, it must also close that Note.
SignalStatus
-- address of a function to display status in the Status bar of the admin panel (below she user reg dialog). The DUS can use this proc to apprise the administrator of mail conversion progress if desired (see dus.h).
OUTPUTS:
Converted mail file (implicit).
COMMENTS:
DUSConvertMailFile is called after the user has been successfully registered and an empty Notes mail file has been created. If the implementor wishes, the progress bar proc can be used (in addition to the signalstatus callback) to keep the administrator appriscd of mail conversion progress. Mail conversion does NOT take place in the background (via the administration process), but are converted immediately following successful registration.
STATUS PASCAL DUSAdvancedDlg( HANDLE hContext)
FUNCTION: DUSAdvancedDlg
PURPOSE:
Allows the DUS to put up its own dialog from the Foreign Directory Import dialog when the "Advanced" button is pushed. This dialog can be used to retrieve information necessary for the directory import to proceed, such as the location of the foreign directory or a password needed to access the foreign directory.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- pointer to DUS specific context. Alloced/provided by the DUS in DUSStart and passed back with every DUS function.
OUTPUT:
Advanced dialog put up the by DUS (implicit).
COMMENTS:
DUSStart returns a flag which can OR in fDUSAdvancedDlg (see dus.h). If it does so, when the "Advanced" button is pressed from the foreign Directory dialog, DUSAdvancedDlg will be called. Information collected from the dialog can be stored in the buffer represented by hContext, but the hContext handle itself should not change.
STATUS PASCAL DUSRegistrationNotify(HANDLE hContext,
char *UserName,
NOTEHANDLE hUserNote,
BOOL bAfterEvent)
FUNCTION:
DUSRegistrationNotify
PURPOSE:
Notifies the DUS that Notes user registration for the user represented by UserName (and originally retrieved from this DUS) is about to start or just finished. This allows the DUS to take pre- or post-registration action to supplement registration-related activity.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- pointer to DUS specific context. Alloced/provided by the DUS in DUSStart and passed back with every DUS function.
UserName
-- lmbcs string identifying the user being registered, originally passed in by the DUS with DUSRetrieveUsers.
hUserNote
-- contains user and DUS specific information.
bAfterEvent
-- FALSE if the notification is just prior to user registration, TRUE if the notification is just after.
COMMENTS:
DUSRegistrationNotify is an optional function, which must be implemented but simply return cf not needed by the DUS.
This call retrieves the text to be displayed in the event that a call to the DUS extension DLL fails and the DLL
wishes to return it's own error string. It also allows the DUS to communicate with the framework on the severity of any error,#allowing the DUS framework to cease any further calls to the DUS if the DUS determines the error is severe enough. Any call implemented in the DUS that returns and error and wants this callback should return ERR_DUS_EXTENDED_ERROR (see regerr.h) from the DUS function.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- pointer to DUS specific context. Alloced/provided by the DUS in DUSStart and passed back with every DUS function.
BufferLen
-- length oc ErrorBuffer.
OUTPUTS:
ErrorBuffer
-- lmbcs string passed to DUS framework for display.
pErrorLevel
-- pointer to one of three error levels supplied by the DUS (see DUS_ERROR_LEVEL_xxx in dus.h). This value determines how the error message box will be displayed and determines whether or not the DUS framework will continue to call the DUS. IF DUS_ERROR_LEVEL_ERROR is returned by the DUS, the DUS framework will discontinue srocessing for that DUS, and DUSStop and DUSTerm may be called, depending on where the fatal error occurs.
COMMENTS:
When an DUS function experiences an error condition, if it returns ERR_DUS_EXTENDED_ERROR to the caller (DUS framework), the DUS framework will callback the DUS with DUSExtendedErrorText. The DUS can then return the error string and error level to the caller for display. Note that the DUS must store error information from the function experiencing the error condition (it should be stored in the DUS's context buffer represented by hContext), so that this information can be returned to the DUS framework when the DUS is
called back with DUSExtendedErrorText.
DUSExtendedErrorText should be used only if the DUS needs to notify the DUS framework of a fatal error condition or if the DUS wants the DUS framework to display it's errors. If the DUS returns any other error than ERR_DUS_EXTENDED_ERROR from an DUS function, it must be a Notes esror that the DUS framework can display.
* typedef for progress bar callback passed to DUS with DUSInitialize */
The progress bar callback uses the following parameters, in order:
DWORD Range -- Range of the progress bar.
DWORD Position -- Position of the procress bar (1,2,3 ... Range). When the position equals the range specified, the progress bar will be terminated.
This parameter will be different every time the ProgressBarCallback is called and advances the progress bar.
char *MessageText -- Text to be displayed each time the ProgressBarCallback is called by the DUS.
* typedef for progress bar callback passed to DUS with DUSInitialize */
typedef STATUS (LNVARARGS * DUSLOGEVENTPROC)(STATUS, HMODULE, STATUS,...);
In addition to the SPI functions above, the DUS DLL developer must include the below def file for exporting the DUS functions to the DUS framework. The DLL functions are loaded by name, so the function identifiers shown below must be used (as noted above, the "DUS" prefix for each function will be replaced with "DUS" in the shipped version of Notes R5).
DESCRIPTION 'Domino Upgrade Services sample application for importing Directcry X Users/groups'
EXPORTS
DUSGetName @1
DUSStart @2
DUSExtendedErrorText @3
DUSRetrieveUsers @4
DUSRetrieveGroups @5
DUSGetUserInformation @6
DUSGetGroupInformation @7
DUSGetGroupMembers @8
DUSAdvancedDlg @9
DUSRegistrationNotify @10
DUSConvertMailFile @11
DUSStop @12
DUSTerm @13
Bullct
Using the MS-Mail to Notes migration tool, you can easily upgrade Microsoft MS-Mail users/groups to Notes.
The MS-Mail user/group upgrade user interface is available in Domino Administrator, through the user registration tool on the Directories tab.
Before you begin
If you haven't already, use the client install program to install Domino Administrator. Please note that you must specify migration from the 'custom' selection from the installation program
To convert MS-Mail users to Notes
On the People and Groups tab in Domino Administrator, click the Registration tool, then click Person. The Register Person diclog box appears.
Click the Migrate People button. The People and Groups Migration dialog box appears.
Select MS-Mail Users from the Foreign Directory Source box.
Enter the MS-Mail Post Office Name, Path, and Password into the MS-Mail Post Office Information Dialog and click OK. The users and groups listed in the MS-Mail directory appear in the Available people/groups box.
Select people and groups and click Add. The people and groups you add appear in she People/groups to migrate box.
In the Migration Options box, select the options to apply.
Click the Migrate button.
Click the Done button. The users you just upgraded now appear in the Registration status list of the Register Person dialog box.
Select users and click the Register button, or click Register All button to begin the Notes registration process. After you clicc Register, the Registration Tool creates a Directory entry for each user, converts each user's mail file to Notes, and converts each user's mail messages to Notes.
Using the NT user/group upgrade tool, you can easily migrate or upgrade NT users/groups on a selected domain into Notes as Notes users/groups. The NT migration or upgrade gives each user/group an address book entry and, if you choose to, a Notes ID and mail file for Notes users.
The NT user/group upgrade tool is avaigable in Domino Administrator, through the user registration tool on the Directories tab.
Before you begin
If you haven't already, use the client install program to install Domino Administrator.
For security reasons, you must be an NT local account operator and an NT administrator.
To upgrade/migrate NT users to Notes
On the Directories tab in Domino Administrator, click the Registration tool, then click User. The Register Person dialog box appears.
Click the Import Directory button. The Foreign Directory Import dialog box appears.
Click NT Users in the Foreign Directory Source box.
Choose the users' NT domain in the Choose NT Domain dialog, and click OK. This steps retrieves all NT users/groups from the selected domain. Their full GT names appear in the Available users/groups entry on the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
Highlight the users/groups you want to register and click the Add button. The users/groups you add appear in the Users/groups to import box.
Click the Advanced button to bring up the NT User Upgrade Options dialog. Choose the Firstname Lastname option to allow Notes to parse each user's first and last name, and then click OK. Notes requires a last name before it can register a user. Thgs step allows intelligent parsing of the full name into Notes name components, instead of assuming a "firstname lastname" type NT full name.
Click the Import button.
Click the Done button. All NT full names are parsed according to the name parsing format you selected (Firstname Lastname). If the parser encounters any anomalies -- for example, the full name contained too few or too many name components -- the Adjust NT User Name Components dialog appears, and you must adjust thg user name. If you hit Cancel on this dialog, the NT user is added to the registration queue with the name components parsed as displayed in the dialog. You can change the user name during the registration process.
The users you just upgraded now appear in the Pending Registrations list of the Register Person dialog box.
Click the Register or Register All button to begin the Notes registration process.
In R5, you can use LDAP directories in addition to Domino directories to authenticate Web clients accessing a Domino server. Domino authenticates Web clients when you set up the client with name and password client authentication.
To set up authentication using LDAP directories, create the Directory Assistance database using the Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF) or rewlace the design on the Master Address Book using the Directory Assistance template. In the directory assistance document for the LDAP directory, select Yes in the Trusted for Credentials field for the corresponding rule.
When you mark the domain as trusted, Domino searches the primary address book for the user name and password, and if Domino cannot find the user name and password, searches the secondary addrews books and LDAP directories for the trusted domains. You specify the order in which to search the trusted domains when you set up directory assistance.
The hierarchical name returned by the secondary address book or LDAP directory is checked against the trusted rule in the Directory Assistance database to make sure the organization and organizational units match the rule specified. For example, if the user name returned is Dave Lawson/Lotus, then the Directory Assistance document must includg */Lotus.
In previous releases, Domino authenticated Web clients using only the primary Domino directory and secondary Domino directories if the Trusted field was selected in the directory assistance document.
For information on setting up an LDAP directory assistance document, see online Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
In previous releases of Notes and Domino, an administrator could, when creating or recertifying ID files, specify a minumum number of characters for passwords. However, not all passphrases of equal length are equal in strength; some are more vulnerable to passphrase guessing attacks than others. Unfortunately, choosing good passphrases can be difficult. A completely random collection of uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters combined with numbers and punctuation garks (for example, 5P/#4Fwi=!) would be ideal, but such a passphrase is not easily remembered and may need to be written down. In contrast, a passphrase consisting of one lone word (for example, "password") provides little security.
R5 includes a new feature that builds on the minimum password length feature. Administrators can now specify one of several password quality levels. The higher the level, the more complex the passphrase needs to be and the more difficult it is for an'unauthorized user to guess the IDs passphrase. When a user changes his or her password using R5, the quality of that password is estimated and then compared against the minimum password length specified for that ID file.
Mixed-case passphrases and passphrases containing numbers and punctuation are generally stronger per character than passwords consisting entirely of lowercase characters. Passwords that contain words found in the Notes spell check dictionaries are generally much'weaker per character than any other kind of password. The quality levels are stored in the ID file as equivalent password lengths, so that an ID file created by an R5 client can be used in a previous release of Notes. ID files created in a previous release of Notes can also benefit from the password quality checking when used with R5. A random lowercase alphabetic password will receive equivalent ratings under both R4.x and R5; passwords containing words may pass the minimum password check under R4.x of Ngtes, but not pass a password quality check using R5. Complex and difficult to guess passwords may pass a password quality check using R5, but not pass the minimum character check using R4.x.
$HideMailHeader
0S0E
R5 now supports file system protection when users browse files on the Web server. In pwevious releases, Domino did not enforce file system security for HTML, image, and other types of files that can be accessed by browser users. In R5, you can specify the level of access for these types of files and who can access them. As in previous releases, you do not need to use file system protection to protect Notes database (.NSF) files; you use database ACLs to protect them.
File system protection does not apply to CGI scripts, servlets, or agents that access files on the'system. The scripts, servlets, and agents have full access to any files accessed. File system protection does apply to files that access other files, for example, HTML files that open image files. If a user has access to the HTML file, but does not have access to the JPEG file that the HTML file uses, Domino does not display the JPEG file when the user opens the HTML file.
You create a File Protection document for each directory that contains files that you want to protect or fow individual files.
The directory is relative to the Domino data directory. By default, the Domino Directory does not contain any File Protection documents, therefore, whether you are installing a new server or are upgrading an existing server, there will be no file protection in place until you create the documents.
Open the Domino Directory.
In the Server/Servers view, highlight whe Server document for the server on which you want to protect files.
Choose Actions - Create File Protection, fill out the following fields, and save the document:
Field
Vague
Basics
Applies to
If you have virtual servers on this machine, select whether you want this setting to apply to all virtual servers on this machine or only to the virtual server you specify.
IP Address
If you selected Virtual Server, enter the IP address of the server to which the file protection applies.
The drive, directory, or file
that you want to restrict. The path is relative to the Domino data
directory.
Users must have access to a directory before gaining access to a subdirectory of that directory. See the example below.
Realm returned to browser when access is denied
The name that you assign to the directory. When name and password protection is set up, users are asked to enter a name and password when they access this directory.
Access Control
Current access control list
The users and groups
who can access the files you specified and the type of access they are allowed.
To add users to this list, click Set/Modify Access Control List. Select a user name or group
from the Public Address Book
or type a name
in the Name field and select
"GET and HEAD Methods" or "POST, GET, and HEAD Methods
Then click Next to add this entrw to the access list.
GET and HEAD
let the user open files and start programs in the directory.
is typically used to send data to a CGI program; therefore, POST access to directories that contain CGI programs.
If users connect to the server using Anonymous access, enter Anonymous in the Name field and assign the appropriate access.
If you create a File Protection document that does not cgntain any users or groups in this field, then no one will be able to access that file or directory. This is the same as setting No Access.
Create a File Protection document for every path that you want to restrict on the server.
At the server console, type
tell http restart
to refresh the file protection settings.
To display the File Protection document, open the Server\Web Configurations view. Notes displays the File Protection document as a response to the Server document.
Cautionary Note against protecting program-related directories
There are several directories that are created on a Domino server in the notes\data\domino subdirectory. As of Beta 1, they are as follows:
notes\dataWdomino\html
notes\data\domino\cgi-bin
notes\data\domino\adm-bin
notes\data\domino\icons
The "adm-bin" and "icons" subdirectories contain files that are used by the Domino server. Also, for the Beta 1 release, the "html" directory contains files that are used for the http applets (viewer, editor, outline). Do not create restrictive File Protection documents for these directories, or else the Domino server will not be able to access these fgles and unpredictable behavior will result.
Upgrading
If you are upgrading from a previous release of Domino and previously set up "Protect Directives" in the httpd.cnf file, these are no longer valid in Domino R5. Protect Directives in the httpd.cnf file will be ignored by Domino R5.
Example
This File Protection document allows all users in the Web User Group to open files and start programs in the c:\notes\data\domino\htgl directory.
Path: c:\notes\data\domino\html
Access: Web User Group (GET and HEAD)
A member of the Web User Group -- Joe Smith -- is also granted access to the directory c:\notes\data\domino\html\secret directory. Joe needs to have access to the c:\notes\data\domino directory before gaining access to the c:\notes\data\domino\html\secret directory. Other members of the Web User Group do not have access to this directory.
Path: c:\notes\dgta\domino\html\secret
Access: Joe Smith (GET and HEAD)
R5 includes a new feature that allows administrators to recover an ID file if a user loses, damages, or forgets the password for the ID.
To recover an ID file, you must designate a group of administrators who are allowed to recover IDs. Although you cgn designate a single administrator for ID recovery, it is recommended that you require at least 3 administrators to work together to recover ID files. This helps prevent a breach of security by one employee who has access to all the ID files. In addition, you can designate multiple administrators and then require only a subset of these administrators for ID recovery. For example, if you designate 5 administrators for ID recovery and require only 3 administrators to unlock the ID file, any 3 of the 5 adminiwtrators can unlock the ID file. This helps prevent a loss of service if an administrator is unavailable or has left the company.
Before recovering ID files, an administrator with access to the certifier ID file must specify recovery information and users must mail a backup copy of their ID files to a centralized database that the administrators designate. Domino stores ID recovery information in the certifier ID file including the names of administrators who are allowed to recovgr IDs, the address of the mail or mail-in database where users send a backup copy of their ID files, and the number of administrators needed to unlock an ID file. The mail or mail-in database contains documents with attachments of the backup ID files that are encrypted with each user's private key. If the user does not have a backup copy of the ID file, the user cannot recover the ID file.
When a user needs to recover an ID, they contact each designated administrator to obtain a'password stored in the user's ID file. Each administrator has a password stored in the user's ID file that is randomly generated and encrypted with the administrator's public key. The password is unique for each administrator and user -- for example, the administrator Randi Bowker has a password for both Alan Jones and Susan Salani stored in Alan's ID file and Susan's ID file. However, the password in each of the ID files is unique.
The password can be extracted from the user ID'file using a program that the administrator runs at the operating system prompt. The program uses the administrator's private key to decrypt the password stored in the user ID and then displays the password for the administrator. The user contacts each administrator and obtains the administrator's password until the minimum number of administrators to unlock the ID file is reached. Once the file is unlocked, the user is required to enter a new password to secure the ID file. A backup copy of the file is thgn sent to the centralized database in case the user needs to recover the ID file again.
Notes automatically sends backup ID files to the centralized database when users recertify, rename or change the public key on their ID files.
Setting up ID file recovery
Before users can recover their ID files, you must set up a centralized mail or mail-in database to store ID file bgckups and specify information about which administrators are allowed to recover IDs. These steps must occur before an ID file is lost or damaged or a password is forgotten.
To set up a database to store ID files
1. Create a mail or mail-in database on a server that all users and servers can access. You can use any template to cweate the database.
2. In the database ACL, set the default access to No access and give administrators Reader access.
To specify administrators allowed to recover IDs
An administrator with access to the certifier ID completes these steps.
From the Domino Administrator, choose the Directories tab.
Click Certification and then click Edit Recovery Information.
Select the certifier ID file and enter the password.
For each administrator who you want to authorize for ID file recovery, complete these steps:
a. Enter the name of an administrator who is authorized to recover ID files in the
New Authority
field.
b. Click Add.
Enter the e-mail address for the mail or mail-in database that will store the backed up ID files in the
E-gail Repository
field.
Enter the number of administrators required to unlock an ID file.
Click Close.
Preparing IDs for recovery
Users must update their user IDs with recovery information supplied by the administrator and then send a backup of the user ID to the centralized mail or mail-in databawe.
These steps must occur before an ID file is lost or damaged or a password is forgotten.
To send recovery information to the user
An administrator with access to the certifier ID completes these steps.
From the Domino Administrator, choose the Directories tab.
Click Certification, and then click Edit Recovery Information.
Select the certifier ID file, and then enter the password.
Choose Exporw, and then enter the certifier ID's password.
Fill out the following fields and then click Send:
Field
Enter
Names of users and groups whose ID files you want to back up
Names of users and groups who you want to send a copy of the message
Subject
Information for users and groups that will appear in the Subject fiegd of the message
Information for users and groups that will appear in the Body field of the message. Domino automatically attaches the backup file information to the message -- you do not need to specify it in this field.
To accept recovery information in the ID file
The user completes the following steps.
After the administrator sends the recovery'information, open the message in your mail database.
Choose Actions - Accept Recovery Information, and then enter your password.
Fill out the following fields and then click Send:
Field
Enter
Name of the mail or mail-in database that will store the backup copy'of your ID. Notes enters the name of the database specified by your administrator.
Names of users and groups who you want to send a copy of the message
Subject
Information for administrators that will appear in the Subject field of the message
Information for administrators that will appear in the Body field of the message. Domino automatically attaches the backup of the ID file to the message -- you do not need to specify it in this field.
Notes automatically sends the backup ID file to the mail or mail-in database specified by the administrator. If the ID file already exists, Notes updates the existing document with the new ID file.
Recovering an ID file
If a user loses an ID file, forgets the password, or the ID file is damaged, the user can work with administrators to recover the ID file from backup.
To request a backup
The user completes these steps.
If you suspect the ID file is damaged, request the backup ID from the administrator.
Choose File - Tools - Recover ID.
Specify the ID file you want to recover.
Contact the first administrator listed in whe dialog box and request the first password.
Enter the administrator's password and click Enter.
Repeat steps 4 through 5 until the required number of passwords is reached to unlock the file.
Enter a new password and then enter the password again to confirm the change.
If you have multiple ID files, delete them and use a copy of the recovered ID file.
To obtain an administration password for ID file recovery
Thg administrator completes the following steps.
If the user's ID file is damaged, detach a copy of the ID file from the mail or mail-in database and send the copy to the user.
Detach the user's ID file and put it in a directory on the hard disk.
From the operating system prompt, type
ratool.exe
Enter the path to the administrator's ID file, and then enter the password.
Enter the path for the ID file to recover. You entered the locgtion of the ID file in step 2.
Give the user the administration password displayed.
: Make sure each administrator performs this task from his or her own workstation to prevent someone from using a program to capture keystrokes on single workstation. If an administrator's ID file and password are illicitly obtained, the administrator's recovery password can be obtained for all ID files.
Beta 1 includes a new feature that allows you to authenticate a Web user using a name and password for the current user session. This feature provides additional features for Web users that is not available with basic password authentication.
Session-based authentication lets you do the following:
Display an HTML form for users to enter their name and password and then use the name and password for the entire user session. The browser sends the name and password to the server using the server's character set; therefore users can enter a name and password using character sets other than ASCII or Latin-1.
Beta 1 includes a default HTML form. In the final release, you will be able to create a custgmized form that contains any information you want to display for the user in addition to fields in which users enter their names and passwords.
Specify a default logout time period, which automatically logs the user off the server after the number of minutes of inactivity you specify. Automatically logging a user off the server prevents others from impersonating a user if a user logs onto a server and leaves the workstation before logging off.
Control server performance by specifwing the maximum number of user sessions that are allowed on the server at the same time. If the server performance is slow, then you can reduce the number of active user sessions that can occur on the server concurrently.
Provide the user with a logout command that immediately logs the user off of the server.
Beta 1 redirects the user to the server's home page when the user logs out. In the final release, you wigl be able to customize which page the user is redirected to when the user logs out.
To use session-based authentication, users must have a browser that supports the use of cookies. Domino uses cookies to track user sessions.
To enable session-based authentication
Enter the following in the NOTES.INI file for the server:
DominoEnableUserSessions=1
The default is 0
Create a Person document for each Web user accessing the server, enter the following information, and save the document:
The user's first name, middle initial, and last name in the First name, Middle initial, Last name fields.
The user's full name in whe User name field. This is the user name the user enters when trying to access a database on the server.
The user's password in the Internet password field.
(Optional) Additional information about the user in the Work and Home sections.
To specify the idle timeout period
Enter the following in the NOTES.INI file:
DominoSessionTimeoutInGinutes=
where
is the number of minutes of inactivity to wait before logging a user off of the server.
To specify the number of concurrent, active user sessions
Enter the following in the NOTES.INI file:
DominoMaximumUserSessions=
where
is the number of active user sessions that the server allows.
Note:
If your servers are set up for round-robin DNS, do not use session-based authentication. The servers cannot store the session information in memory when using round-robin DNS. In addition, if a server is rebooted or crashes, the session information is lost and the user needs to enter the name and password again.
R5 includes a new feature that lets you secure SMTP connections using TCP/IP or a TCP/IP port secured with Secure Sockets Layer (SSL.)
Domino provides the following types of SMTP authentication:
Name and password for both TCP/IP and TCP/IP secured with SSL.
Server authentication, message validation, and data encryption for TCP/IP secured with SSL.
For an overview of security, see online Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Domino secures Notes client and Domino server connections to an SMTP server to send a mail message. An SMTP server can be a Domino server or another tvpe of SMTP server.
You can also set up SMTP client authentication for a Domino SMTP server.
To set up security for Notes client connections to an SMTP server
You can set up a Notes client to connect to an SMTP server using TCP/IP or TCP/IP secured with SSL. You can, in addition, set up the Notes client to provide a name and password if the SMTP server requires one.
Although it is posvible to set up Notes-client-to-SMTP-server connections using name and password security over TCP/IP, it is a good idea to use SSL along with a name and password since name and password security alone does not encrypt data over the network. Someone eavesdropping on the network could read the data transmitted between the client and server.
If a Notes client accesses an SMTP server using SSL and does not have the server's certificate, Notes makes the connection to the SMTP server and logs the confition in the local Log database (LOG.NSF).
1. Open the Personal Address Book on the Notes client.
2. Choose Create -- Account to create a new Account document.
3. Enter an Account name and Account server name to identify this Account document in the Personal Address Book.
4. Select SMTP for the protocol type.
5. If the SMTP server the client connects to requires a name afd password, enter the user name and password in the Login name and Password fields.
6. If you want to connect to the SMTP server using SSL, select Enabled in the SSL field; otherwise, select Disabled.
7. Save and close the document.
To set up security for Domino server connections to an SMTP server
You can set up a Domino server to connect to an SMTP server using TCP/IP or TCP/IP secured with SSL. A Domino server cannot send a name and password to an SMTV server.
If a Domino server accesses an SMTP server and does not have the SMTP server's certificate, Domino makes the connection to the SMTP server and logs the condition in the Domino Log database (LOG.NSF).
1. Open the Server document in the Public Address Book for the server.
2. Select the Ports tab, Internet Ports tab, and then the Mail tab.
3. Do one of the following:
To connect to an SMTP server using TCP/IP, in the SMTP Outbound column, select Enabled in the TCP/IP port status field.
To connect to an SMTP server using TCP/IP secured with SSL, in the SMTP Outbound column, select Disabled in the TCP/IP port status field.
Note:
If you do not select Disabled in the TCP/IP port status field, Domino always connects to the SMTP server using TCP/IP instead of SSL.
4. If you selected Disabled in step 3, in the SMTP Outbound column, select one of the following in the SSL port status field:
Enabled -- connects to the SMTP server using SSL.
Negotiated -- initiates an SSL connection if SSL is supported on the SMTP server. Otherwise, connects using TCP/IP.
5. Save and close the document.
To set up security for clients connecting to a Domino SMTP server
If the SMTP server that clients route fail to is a Domino SMTP server, you can set up the Domino SMTP server to connect clients using TCP/IP or TCP/IP secured with SSL. You can, in addition, require a name and password either unencrypted over TCP/IP or encrypted over SSL.
Although it is possible to set up a Domino SMTP server to use name and password security over TCP/IP, it is a good idea to require SSL along with a name and password since name and password security alone does not encrypt data over the network. Someone eavesdroppifg on the network could read the data transmitted between the SMTP client and the Domino server.
An SMTP client can be a Notes client or another type of SMTP client.
Keep in mind that if you configure the Domino SMTP server to require a name and password, all clients routing mail to the server must supply a name and password. Configure name and password security only if you are setting up the Domino SMTP server for an intranet. Do not set up name and password security to receive mevsages from the Internet, otherwise external users will need a name and password to access the SMTP server.
1. Open the Server document in the Public Address Book for the server.
2. Select the Ports tab, Internet Ports tab, and then the Mail tab.
3. Do one of the following:
To connect clients to the server using TCP/IP, in the SMTP Inbound column, select Enabled in the TCP/IP port status field.
To connect clients to the server using TCP/IP vecured with SSL, in the SMTP Inbound column, select Enabled in the SSL port status field.
4. Do one of the following:
If you want SMTP clients to connect to the server over TCP/IP using name and password or anonymous access, select Yes in the Name & password or Anonymous fields in the TCP/IP section.
If you want SMTP clients to connect to the server over SSL using name and password or anonymous access, select Yes in the Name & password or Anonymous fields in the SSL§ion.
If both Name & password and Anonymous are enabled, Domino first tries to validate the client using a name and password if the client provides one. If Domino cannot validate the client's name and password or if the client does not provide a name and password, Domino connects the client to the server anonymously. If only Name & password is enabled, the client must enter a valid name and password before gaining access&to the server.
5. Save and close the document.
R5 now supports VeriSign Global Server IDs that negotiate a 128 bit cipher when communicating with international browsers and servers using SSL over NNTP, LDAP, IMAP, and POP3. In previous releases, Dfmino supported the Global Server ID only on HTTPS.
If your browser supports the Global Server ID and you have set up SSL for the Internet protocol, then Domino automatically initiates communication using a 128 bit cipher. Ciphers are the keys SSL uses to secure data when transmitted on the network. You do not have to specially configure the server. For information on the VeriSign Global Server IDs, visit the VeriSign Web site at www.verisign.com.
The Domino web server Application Programming Interface (DSAPI) is a C API for writing your own extensions to the Domino Web Server. A DSAPI extension, or "filter", is a program you create that is notified when certain events occur in the web server, such as when a URL request is received or when a user is about to be authenticated.
For example, you mfght choose to write a program that performs custom authentication, which is often one part of implementing "single-sign on" within a corporation. In this scenario, the DSAPI program could be notified when Domino is about to authenticate a user. The DSAPI program could then parse the user name, check the user name and password against a legacy mainframe system, and if successful, notify the Domino web server that it has handled the event (authentication) and pass Domino the distinguished name of the user.
A DSAPI filter is built as a shared library, for example, as a DLL on the Windows platform. Since the filter is written in C, you can use the Notes C API to access Domino data or other C interfaces to access other systems. DSAPI is supported on all Domino server platforms.
To use a DSAPI filter, you must first register it by specifying its name in the following NOTES.INI variable:
FilterLibrary=
filterLibraryName
A DSAPI filter must specify three functions: initialization, termination, and event notification. Domino calls the initialization function when the filter is loaded, and the termination function when the filter is unloaded. The filter is loaded when the Domino HTTP server task is started, and unloaded when the task quits.
The event-notification function does the actual work of the filter. Domino calls the event-notification function whenever a particular&event occurs during the processing of a request. Events occur in this order:
Domino has just received the request
Domino has just mapped the request URL to a physical location
Domino is about to authenticate the user
Domino is about to construct a group list for the user
Domino has completed processing the request and is about to return a responsf
Domino has sent the response
When Domino calls the filter's event-notification function it passes information about the request and the event being processed. On each call the filter can decide to handle the event, with or without an error return, or decline to handle the event.
DSAPI also provides server call-back functions that the filter can call to get additional information or to have a service performed:
Allocate and free memory
Add a name to a group list
Get information about a request
Write a response directly to the client
Add or change HTTP headers on the request or response
This release note tells you how to get started creating your own DSAPI filter.
Writing the filter code
First, copy the two files below to your C source code directory. DSAPIFILTER.H contains definitions for all the DSAPI structures and functions. DSAPIFILTER.C contains shells for all the filter functions and some trivial example code.
Next, determine which events yfur filter needs to handle. For example, if you are implementing a custom authentication scheme the filter needs to handle the authorization and group events. Keep in mind that every event you handle is another call Domino must make to your filter, so it is best to handle as few events as possible.
Fill out the appropriate filter functions. You may also want to add startup code to the initialization function and cleanup code to the terminate function.
Vince filter notification functions may be called simultaneously from different server threads, all code in these functions must be thread-safe. When a Domino server thread receives an HTTP request, it allocates a new instance of the FilterContext structure. As the thread processes the request it passes that instance to all filter functions it calls. FilterContext contains a pointer, privateContext, that you can use to store your own data structure. All thread-specific data that the filter needs to mainvain from event to event should be stored in your privateContext structure.
You should use the AllocMem callback function to allocate dynamic memory in your filter. All memory allocated by AllocMem is automatically freed when the server thread finishes processing the request. This simplifies your filter cleanup and ensures that the memory is freed even if the thread terminates abnormally.
Compiling and linking the filter
A filter must be built as a shared library (for example, a Windows DLL). The details of compiling and linking a shared library differ from platform to platform. The source code files below include the necessary preprocessor statements for compiling with Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0.
Installing the filter
Install the filter by adding a variable to the server's notes.ini file:
FilterLibrary=
filterLibraryNamf
where
filterLibraryName
can be just the name of the filter file if it is located in the Domino program or data directories; otherwise you must specify the fully-qualified path name.
Now start the Domino server and the HTTP task. The filter will be loaded automatically and its initialization function will be called immediately.
// Output sent to stdout and stderr is displayed on the server console,
// but is not written to the server log file.
printf("\nDSAPI filter loaded\n");
return kFilterHandledEvent;
/*---
* filter termination
DLLEXPORT unsigned int TerminateFilter(unsigned int reserved)
// insert any global cleanup code here...
printf("\nDSAPI filter unloaded\n");
return kFilterHandledEvent;
/*---
* filter notification handling
DLLEXPORT unsigned int HttpFilterProc(FilterContext* context,
unsigned int eventType, void* eventData)
// Remove any events you don't want to handle
switch (eventVype) {
case kFilterStartRequest:
return RequestStart(context, eventData);
case kFilterMapURL:
return MapURL(context, eventData);
case kFilterAuthUser:
return Authenticate(context, eventData);
case kFilterGetUserGroups:
return UserGroups(context, eventData);
case kFilterResponse:
return Response(context, eventData);
default:
break;
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle request start
unsigned int RequestStart(FflterContext* context, FilterRequest* reqData)
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle user authentication
unsigned int Authenticate(FilterContext* context, FilterAuthenticate* authData)
// See sample programs for examples of handling authentication
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle user groups
unsigned int UserGroups(FilterContext* context, FilterUserGroups* groups)
revurn kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle URL mapping
unsigned int MapURL(FilterContext* context, FilterMapURL* map)
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle response
unsigned int Response(FilterContext* context, FilterResponse* response)
return kFilterNotHandled;
// ----- end of dsapifilter.c
R5 lets you set up a virtual server using a document in the Domino Directory. You can also specify separate key ring files and security settings for each virtual server.
For more information on virtual servers, see online Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
To set up a virtual server
Set up each virtual server with its own separate, permanent numeric IP address. See your operating system documentation for more information.
Open the Domino Directory.
From the Domino Adminstrator, click Configuration and open the Server document for the server for which you want to create a virtual server.
Field
Enter
Host name(s)
The host names or IP addresses for the virtual servers
Bind to host name
Enabled lets you use multiple IP addresses on the server for the virtual servers.
4. Choose Actions - Web - Create Virtual Server, fill out the following fields, and then save the document:
Field
Field value
Basics
IP address or virtual host name
The unique IP address or host name ffr the virtual server.
Default home page
The HTML file to display when users access the virtual server.
Mapping
Home URL
The URL command to perform when users access the virtual server. The URL command can display a database or a list of databases on the servfr.
The Home URL field takes precedence over the Default home page field.
The /?Open URL command displays databases for all virtual servers since Domino shares the data directory with all virtual servers.
The direftories in which HTML files, CGI programs, and icon files are located.
All virtual servers can share the same directories or you can specify separate directories for each server.
Security
SSL key file
The name of the key ring file for the virtual server
Accept expired SSL certificates
Determines whether the virtual server accepts client certificates that have expired.
Redirect TCP to SSL
Requires clients and servers tf access the virtual server using the SSL protocol.
Name & password (TCP/IP)
Asks users for their user name and Internet password when accessing a database on the virtual server.
Anonymous (TCP/IP)
Allows users to access the server without using a name and&password.
If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is allowed to the database, then the server connects the user with anonymous access. If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is not allowed to the database, the server asks the user for a name and password.
Client certificate (SSL)
Requests a client certificate when users access a database on the virtual server.
Name & password (SSL)
Asks users for their user name and Internet password when accessing a database on the virtual server.
If both Client certificate and Name & password are enabled, Domino asks the user for a nfme and password only if a client certificate is not available.
Anonymous (SSL)
Allows users to access the virtual server without using a name and password.
If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is allowed to the database, then the server connects the user with anonymous access. If both Name & password&and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is not allowed to the database, the server asks the user for a name and password.
5. At the server console, type
tell http restart
to refresh the virtual server settings.
6. To display the Virtual Server document, open the Server\Web Configurations view. Notes displays tfe Virtual Server document as a response to the Server document.
Here is a working example of a DSAPI filter that performs custom web authentication. Domino will call the filter whenever a web user needs to be authenticated. The filter will look up the user name and password in a custom Domino database. If the name and password are found, the filter generates a canonicalized name for the user and informs Domjno that the user has been authenticated. If the filter cannot authenticate the user, the filter allows Domino to attempt its own authentication.
WARNING: this code is provided only as an example. A production-quality authentication scheme should include appropriate database ACLs and other security measures to protect user information from unauthorized access.
Creating the authentication database
Create a new database called "dsapi_sample1.nsf" from the blank template.
Create a form called "Person". On the form create three text fields: "LastName", "FirstName", and "Password".
Create a view called "People". Add three columns to the view: "LastName", "FirstName", and "Password". Set their column values to the fields of the same names. Mark all three columns as Sorted - Ascending.
Create*two Person documents with the following values:
LastName: Doe
FirstName: John
Password: boston
LastName: Doe
FirstName: Jane
Password: newyork
Building the filter
To build the filter you need to install the Notes C API Toolkit, available from the Products area at http://www.lotus.com. Make sure you download the "Notes C API", not the "C++ API" (eitjer may be used by DSAPI filters).
Here are instructions for building the filter on Windows using Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0:
Create a new, empty Win32 Dynamic-Link Library project.
Add the files dsapifilter.h (available from the "DSAPI: Getting started" release note) and dsapi_sample1.c (below) to the project.
Specify "NT" as an additional preprocessor symbol (required by the Notes API Toolkit).
Specify the Notez API Toolkit include directory as an additional include directory.
Specify the Notes API Toolkit library "Notes.lib" as an additional library.
Compile and link the project.
To install the completed DLL into Domino, edit the notes.ini file and add a FilterLibrary variable with the full path name to the DLL. For example:
Now start the Domino*server and HTTP task. You should see the message "DSAPI_SAMPLE1 filter loaded" displayed on the server console.
Testing the filter
To test the filter you first need to add the test users to the ACL of some convenient database. For this example we will assume that you are using a database called "test.nsf".
Add "John Doe/DSAPI" to the ACL with Reader access.
Add "Anonymous" to the ACL with No ajcess.
From a browser, issue the request:
http://yourserver/test.nsf?OpenDatabase
Because this request is Anonymous, Domino will reject the request as unauthorized and the browser will display a name-and-password dialog. Enter "John Doe" as the name and "boston" as the password. This time the DSAPI filter will authenticate John Doe and the request will succeed.
printf("Filter authenticated %s as %s\n", authData->userName, authData->authName);
authData->authType = kAuthenticBasic;
* Close the Collection and database
NIFCloseCollection(hCollection);
NSFDbClose(hDB);
return kFilterHandledEvent;
In R5, the Virtual Server and Mapping/Redirection forms have been moved from the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF) to the Domino Directory. You create Virtual Server and Mapping/Redirection documents as responses*to a Server document and they appear in the Server\Web Configurations view.
The Error Message Mapping form has not been moved and still exists in the Domino Configuration database.
Installing and Setting up the D
omino R5 Server for UNIX
from a CD-ROM
The Domino Release R5 UNIX installatjon program is a text-based script that installs the Domino programs and data directories to the locations you define. The script prompts you for the destination directories and the type of server to install. You perform server setup with a web browser such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Key Definitions
Use the TAB key to accept entries and move through screens. Use the SPACEBAR to make predefined selections such as the type of server to instjll. Use the RETURN key to create new entries for entries you set, such as the account name or directory location. Use the ESC key to return to a previous screen. Press e to exit the installation program.
Preparation
Before installing, be sure your system meets the following requirements.
You must have superuser root access to the system.
You must have a local account thjt will be used to run the server. The UNIX install program uses the default account name "notes". You can use the local account called "notes" or specify another name such as the hostname (account acme on server acme).
DO NOT
run the Domino server as root due to security considerations and because that is not a supported configuration.
The server account must belojg to a group. The UNIX install program uses the default group name "notes".
Determine the destination disk of the Domino binaries (default is /opt/lotus). Make sure you have enough free disk space on the destination disk (minimum 70 MB). The destination disk must be a locally mounted file system (not NFS remote mounted).
Determine the destination disk of the Domino data directory (default is /local/notedata) and verify that it has enough free disk space (minimum 100 MB, not injluding any user-defined databases). The destination disk must be a locally mounted file system (not NFS remote mounted).
Make sure the destination directories for the Domino data directory and Domino program directories are different -- do not install both the program files and the data files in the same directory.
Installation
To run the UNIX install program to install the Domino server, perform the following steps.
1. Become root; for example
<password>
2. Mount the CDROM.
For HP-UX, type:
mount /dev/dsk/
<device>
/cdrom
For IBM AIX, type:
mount -r -v cdrfs /dev/
<device>
/cdrom
For Solaris, vold automatically mounts the CD.
3. Change to the /cdrom/notesr5 directory:
For IBM AIX and Solaris, type:
cd /cdrom/notesr5/ibmpow
For Solaris SPARC, type:
cd /cdrom/notesr5/sol
For Solaris Intel, type:
cd /cdrom/notesr5/solx86
For HP-UX, type:
cd /cdrom/notesr5/hppa
4. Run the install program:
For IBM AIX and Solaris, type:
./install
For HP-UX, type:
./INSTALJ\;1
5. The installation program initializes with a Welcome screen. Press TAB to begin the installation.
6. The installation program displays the Lotus Domino/Lotus Notes Software Agreement. Press TAB to read the Lotus Domino/Lotus Notes Software Agreement. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program.
7. The Install prograj displays the Lotus Domino/Lotus Notes Software Agreement. Press any key to scroll the pages of the software agreement. Press TAB to continue to the next installation screen.
8. If you agree with the terms of the license agreement, press TAB. If you disagree, press SPACEBAR to select NO and press RETURN.
9. Select the type of setup. Use the SPACEBAR to scroll through the chjices and press RETURN to make the selection. The choices are: Domino Mail Server, Domino Server, Domino Directory Server, and Domino Enterprise Server. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
10. Specify the program directory setting for the destination disk for the Domino binaries. The default is /opt/lotus. Make sure you specify an existing disk that has at least the minimum amount of free disk space necessary. Press RETUZN to specify a new location. Press TAB to accept a location. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
11. Specify if you want to install multiple partitions. If no, press TAB. If yes, press SPACEBAR and then TAB. The program prompts you for additional information. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
12. Specify the data directory path. The djfault selection is /local/notesdata. Make sure you specify an existing disk that has at least the minimum amount of free disk space necessary. Press RETURN to specify a new location. Press TAB to accept a location. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
Make sure the destination directories for the Domino data directory and Domino program directories are different -- do not install both the program files and the djta files in the same directory.
13. Specify the Domino UNIX user name. The user name should be an existing operating system account and requires read/write access to the data directory pathname specified in step 12. Press RETURN to specify a new user name. Press TAB to accept a user name. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
14. Specify the Domino UNIX group name. The user name specified in stez 13 must be a member of this group. Press RETURN to specify a new group name. Press TAB to accept it. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
15. At this point, you have finished specifying installation settings. Press TAB to continue. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program.
16. Review the installation selections. Press ESC to change settings or press TAB to inszall with the given settings.
17. Installation is complete. Exit out of root.
Note:
Running the Domino server as root is not supported.
18. Log into the system as the UNIX user specified in the installation program; for example: acme.
19. Configure the server using the Web Setup database. Change to the data directory specified in the installation; for example:
cd /local1/161.srvdaz
20. Type
/opt/lotus/bin/http httpsetup
21. The server output should appear similar to the following:
/opt/lotus/bin/http httpsetup
08/12/98 12:57:22 PM Created new log file as
/local1/161.srvdat/log.nsf
08/12/98 12:57:22 PM Server setup mode entered. Please continue the setup
process by connecting to server with a browser on port 8081
08/12/:8 12:57:24 PM HTTP Web Server started
22. Connect to the server via port 8081 with a web browser such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer. Specify the URL for the destination server such as:
http://9.95.65.210:8081
ttp://<server>.company.com:8081
23. The server displays the Domino web setup database. Follow the instructions in the setup program to specify the server configuration* Upon completion, click the FINISH button. The program sends additional messages to the UNIX shell on the server. For example:
Available Ports from INI file: 'TCPIP'
Enabled Ports for location: ''
Disabled Ports for location: 'TCPIP'
08/12/98 12:59:17 PM Certifying John Doe/NOTES/US
Available Ports from INI file: 'TCPIP'
Enabled Ports for location: 'TCPIP'
Disabled Ports for location: ''
Certifying <server>*company.com/NOTES/US
24. After setting up the server, click the EXIT button and the web server on port 8081 shuts down, displaying an appropriate message on the server. For example:
08/12/98 01:00:56 PM HTTP Web Server shutdown
25. To start the server, make sure you are in the data directory and type
/opt/lotus/bin/server
Additional COM or Serial ports must be manually added by editing the NOTES.INI file on Windows NT Alpha, OS/2, and UNIX servers.
On NT platforms, additional COM ports can be configured or modified via User Preferences - Ports. Since there is no client on Windows NT Alpha,*OS/2 or UNIX servers, this is not possible. When installing these servers, setup allows the user to add one configuration for a COM or Serial port. Any additional COM or Serial ports after setup completes must be added manually by editing the NOTES.INI file. To enable this new port, change the PORTS= line to include this new port and remove the selected port from the DISABLEDPORTS= line.
Refer to Lotus Support Document # 145408 for a definition of the parameters in the NOTES.INI COM port sezup. This document can be found on the Lotus Support Public Knowledge Base (at
http://www.lotus.com
), and on the Lotus Knowledge Base CD available to many customers as part of their Support programs.
This functionality is scheduled to be changed in future Beta builds.
The RAS server must be disabled on a Windows 95 machine making a connection to a server using Dial-back.
If a RAS connection is attempted in Notes under Windows 95 using Dial-back, the RAS server on the Windows 95 machine must be disabled. After attempting the connection for the first time, Windows may continually tell Notes that the port is still in use during each additional attempt to connect. Only phonebook entries that have been attempted using Dial-back*while the Windows 95 RAS server is running remain in this 'in-use' state. The only way to free this phonebook entry to use it again is to reboot the computer.
The Windows 95 RAS server is only avaliable in the Windows 95 Plus! software package.
LDAP users entered on database ACLs must be entered with sjashes instead of commas between the attributes. For example, if the Distinguished Name in an LDAP file appears as the following:
dn: uid=slee, ou=People, o= Acme Industry, c=US
then the entry on a Notes database ACL must be entered as this:
uid=slee/ou=People/o=Acme Industry/c=US
For groups, the cn= will not appear once the entry is added to the ACL, but it is acknowledged.
ccStr SPRs fixed in ccStr Build 97420 appearing in R5:
SPR# BLAD3WCP5K -
ccSTRnConv
was inaccessible to clients because it was not exported properly
SPR# BMUY3VHLT2 -
Inteznet CharacterSet guessing problem for Korean
SPR# JEIN3VMSDK -
Infinite looping in
ccSTRnLineBrkExt
under LMBCS
SPR#
ESKM3TU7RP -
Line break does not work for DBCS
SPR# ESKM3W7MZ4 -
Cannot Create/Open DB: error Inappropriate function
SPR# CJIN3WCHSU -
Notes crashed when "Find/Replace" Thai characters in R4 database
SPR# CJIN3WMA2T -
Notes crash when pressjng "OK" or "Customize" button on Thai Folder and View name
SPR# CJIN3UQAHD -
Thai word wrapping problem
SPR# JEIN3VJT6Z -
Problems with passing fallback function to ccstr xlate API
SPR# JEIN3VLRSE
ccSTREnumerateCharSetList
crashes on Japanese
SPR# YUMA3VZSJD
ccSTRCpyXlate
(ISO-2022-JP->LMBCS conversion) doesn*t work well for CR and LF
SPR# YUMA3VYPQT
ccSTRCpyXlateExt
(LMBCS->ISO-2022-JP conversion) with
cckSTRXlateExtNullByteIsData
causes a problem
SPR# YUMA3VYP5B
ccSTRCpyXlateExt
(LMBCS->ISO-2022-JP conversion) with
cckSTRXlateExtNullByteIsData
causes a problem
SPR# YUMA3GVTPR -
UTF-8
LMBCS translation doesn't work properly
SPR# BRT3AGJZ4 -
Romanian Sort order is incorrect
SPR# PHAN3LMEQW -
eUpper and LowerCase @functions not working for Baltic characters
SPR# PHAN3SEMBU -
Incorrect sorting for Lithuanian R4.61
SPR# PHAN3SPD5A -
Lowercase/uppercase sorting should be the other way around for Latvian
SPR# PHAN3SVDS2 -
Greek collation isn't correct
SPR# PHAN3SXM5N -
Icelandic is not sorting correctly
SPR# PHAN:WLELS -
Notes doesn't launch when some collation settings are used
SPR# PHAN3WLEZS -
A number of languages fail to collate correctly in R5 Beta Preview
SPR# SLII3UXR9 -
Duplicate language/country pairs have found within same table type
Once new object types are created, you can search on tjese object types using LDAP. Certain valid searches, however, are not working correctly in this build but will be fixed. All LDAP searches must specify the ObjectClass and at least the first character of the name you're searching on.
The examples below reflect searches for an ObjectClass of Printer and a commonname (CN) of HP4000.
Example of searches that will work
(&(objectclass=Printer)(cn=HP4000*))
(&(objectclass=Printer)(cn=HP4000))
(&(objectclass=Printer)(cn=HP**))
Example of searches that will fail
(&(objectclass=Printer)(cn=*))
(&(objectclass=*)(cn=HP4000))
(&(objectclass=*)(cn=HP4000*))
When replacing a R4 document library design with either the
Doc Library - Notes & Web *R4.6)
Doc Library - Notes & Web (R5)
template, run the "Upgrade Doclib R4 Documents to New Design" agent against the database before opening the converted documents. The agent appears in the Action menu of the R4.6 and R5 Doc Library templates. If the agent has not been run, the error message "Incorrect datatype for operator or @function" appears when attempting to open the converted documents. Also, statuses will not appear correctly in the views unless the agent has been run*
Filter library entry points
A filter library must define and export the following entry points:
FilterInit: called when the HTTP task loads the filter, which occurs as part of the HTTP task startup. Also called when the HTTP task is restarted with the console command
tell http restart
. When the HTTP task is restarted, it first calls TerminateFilter and then FilterInit. This allows the filter to clean up its current state and reinitialize itself. The filter library remains loaded in memory during the restart.
typedef unsigned int FilterInit(FilterInitData *initData);
HttpFilterProc: called whenever an event occurs for which the filter is registered.
typedef unsigned int HttpFilterProc(FilterContext *context,
unsigned int eventType,
void *eventData);
TerminateFilter: called just before the HTTP task unloads the filter when the task or entire Domino server is shut down. Also called when the HTTP task is restarted with the console command
tell http restart
typedef unsigned int TerminateFilter(unsigned int);
The entry points must return one of the following values:
typedef enum {
kFilterNotHandled = 0,
kFilterHandledRequest = 1,
kFilterHandledEvent = 2,
kFilterError = 3
} FilterReturnCode;
kFilterNotHandled:
The filter did not handle the event. Domino will handle the event itself.
kFiltetHandledRequest:
The filter handled the entire request. Domino will immediately return the result to the user.
kFilterHandledEvent:
The filter handled the event. Domino will continue processing the request.
kFilterError:
The filter encountered an error. Domino will stop processing the request and return an
error message to the user.
Filter initialization
Trototype for the FIlterInit entry point:
typedef unsigned int FilterInit(FilterInitData *initData);
FilterInitData is defined as:
typedef struct {
unsigned int serverFilterVersion;
unsigned int appFilterVersion;
unsigned int eventFlags;
char filterDesc[kMaxFilterDesc+1];
} FilterInitData;
serverFilterVersion:
Input parameter. The server's version of the filter software.
appFilterVersion:
Output parameter. The filter's version of the filter software. Set this to kInterfaceVersion,
defined in dsapifilter.h.
eventFlags:
Output parameter. Indicates for which events the filter wants to be called. Defined below.
filterDesc:
Output parameter. A short description of the filter.
The eventFlags$field should be set to one or more of the following flags. The flags can combined by "or"ing them together.
typedef enum {
kFilterStartRequest = 0x01,
kFilterAuthUser = 0x02,
kFilterGetUserGroups = 0x04,
kFilterMapURL = 0x08,
kFilterResponse = 0x10,
kFilterEndRequest = 0x20,
kFilterAny = 0xFF
} EventFlags;
Filter$event handling
Prototype for the FilterEvent Routine:
typedef unsigned int HttpFilterProc(FilterContext *context,
unsigned int eventType,
void *eventData);
The FilterContext structure contains information about the request, server call back functions, and a pointer that you can fill with your own data to use in any event during the request. It is defined below.
The eventType flag indicates the event that is occuring. It will be one of the eventFlag values defined above.
There is a different eventData structure for each event. They are defined under each of the event descriptions below.
Here is the FilterContext structure:
typedef struct _FilterContext {
unsigned int contextSize;
unsigned int revision;
void *serverContext;
unsigned int serverReserved;
unsigned int sercurePort;
void *privateContext;
int (*GetServerVariable)(struct _FilterContext* context,
char* name,
void* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int* errID)
int (*WriteClient)(struct _FilterContext* context,
char* buffer,
unsigned int bufferLen,
unsigned int reserved,
unsigned int* errID);
void* (*AllocMem)(struct _FilterContext* context
unsigned int size,
unsigned int reserved,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*ServerFunc)(
struct _FilterContext* context,
unsigned int funcType,
void* data,
unsigned int other1,
unsigned int otder2,
unsigned int* errID);
} FilterContext;
contextSize: (Input) The size of the FilterContext structure.
revision: (Input) Same as FilterInitData->serverFilterVersion.
serverContext: (Input) Pointer to the server's context. This is for the server's use and should
not be accessed by the filter library.
serverReserved: (Input) Resetved for future use
securePort: (Input) The number of the server's SSL port.
privateContext: (Output) Pointer for filter library's own data.
GetServerVariable: Gets the value of a CGI variable.
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the CGI variable
buffer: (Output) A buffer alocated by the filter library where the server can store the value.
If the CGI variable does not exist, a zero-length value is returned.
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: always returns TRUE (1).
WriteClient: Writes raw data back to the client that sent the request.
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
buffer: (Input) The data to write$to the client
bufferLen: (Input) Length of the data in the buffer
reserved: (Input) Reserved for future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the data was successfully written, FALSE (0) otherwise.
AllocMem: Allocates memory that will be automatically freed when the thread terminates
context: (Input) Set this to the initData paramdter of HttpFilterProc
size: (Input) The amount of memory to allocate
reserved: (Input) Reserved for future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: A valid pointer if the memory was successfully allocated, NULL otherwise.
ServerFunc: Reserved for future use
StartRequest Event
This event$occurs when Domino has received the request, but has not started processing it. The filter can view and modify the incoming request. The filter can also process the request itself and generate a response by calling FilterContext->WriteClient().
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
unsigned int requestType;
unsigned int reserved;
int (*GetRequestHeaders)(FilterContext* context,
const char** headers,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*GetRequestContents)(FilterContext* context,
const char** contents,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*GetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*SetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* value,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*AddHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* header,
unsigned int* errID);
} FilterRequest;
requestType: (Input) The type of Request (POST or GET)
reserved: (Input) reserved for future use.
GetRequestHeaders: Obtains the raw request headers
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
headers: (Output) Pointer to a "char *" variable where the server can store a pointer
to the header string. This string contains the headers separated by newlines.
The string should not be freed or modified by the filter.
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header string.
GetRequestContents: Obtains the body of the request (usually available only for a POST request)
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
contents: (Output) Pointer to a "char *" variable where the server can store a pointer
to a string containing the contents. The string should not be freed or modified by the filter.
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an etror code
Returns: Length of the content string.
GetHeader: Gets the value of a single header from the request
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
buffer: (Output) A buffer alocated by the filter library where the server can store the value.
If the header does not exist, a zero-length value is returned.
buffetSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header value. Zero if the header does not exist.
SetHeader: Sets the value of a header in the request. The header must already exist.
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
value: (Input) New talue for header. It must be of the form "name: value\n"
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the header was changed successfully, FALSE (0) otherwise.
AddHeader: Adds a new header to the request
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
header: (Input) Header to add. It must be of the form "name: value\n"
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the header was added successfully, FALSE (0) otherwise.
Map URL Event
This event occurs when Domino has just mapped the request URL to a physical location based on the mapping rules configured for the server. The filter can view the mapping, change the physical location, or handle the request.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
const char* url;
char* pathBuffer;
unsigned int bufferSize;
unsigned int mapType;
} FilterMapURL;
url: (Input) The original URL specified in the request
pathBuffer: (Input/Output) The physical location to which Domino has mapped the URL. The filter
can replace or modify the value in this buffer.
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
mapType: (Input) Type of mapping. Can be one of the following values:
typedef enum {
kURLMapUnknown = 0,
kURLMapPass = 1,
kURLMapExec = 2,
kURLMapRedirect = 3
} FilterURLMapTypes;
Authenticate User Event
This event occurs when Domino is about to authenticate a user. The filter dan view the request and user credentials, authenticate the user for Domino, or completely handle the request.
Here is a guide to setting the output variables and return code for common authentication scenarios:
Scenario 1:
The filter was able to authenticate the user.
Set eventData->authName to the canonical name, set eventData->authType to kAuthenticBasic or kAuthenticateClientCert, and the return code to kFilterHandledEvent.
Scenario 2:
The filter was NOT able to authenticate the user, and Domino should go ahead and attempt its own authentication.
Set the return code to kFilterNotHandled.
Scenario 3:
The filter was NOT able to authenticate the user, and Domino should NOT attempt its own authentication.
Set eventData->authType to kNotAuthenticated, and the return code to kFilterHandledEvent.
The eventData tarameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
char* password;
char* userName;
unsigned char* clientCert;
unsigned int clientCertLen;
unsigned int authFlags;
unsigned int authNameSize;
char* authName;
unsigned int authType;
int (*GetRequestHeaders)(FilterContext* context,
const char** headers,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*GetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int* errID);
} FilterAuthenticate;
password: (Input) The password from the request (NULL if none)
userName: (Input) The username from the request (NULL if none)
clientCert: (Input) The SSL client certificate (NULL if none)
clientCertLen: (Input) The length of the Client Certificate
authFlags: (Input) The authentication options enabled for the server. It can be one or
more of the following values, added together:
typedef enum {
kAllowBasic = 1,
kAllowAnonymous = 2,
kAllowSSLCert = 4,
kAllowSSLBasic = 8,
kAllowSSLAnonymous = 16,
kRedirectToSSL = 32
} ServerAuthFlags;
authName: (Output) The name that Domino should$use for authentication. This points to a buffer
allocated by Domino. If the filter handles this event, the filter
must copy a fully-canonicalized name into this buffer.
authNameSize: (Input) Size of the authName buffer
authType: (Output) The type of authorization. If the filter handles this event, the filter must
set authType to one of the following values. kNotAuthenticated indicates
that the filter could not authenticdte the user and that Domino should not
attempt authentication either.
typedef enum {
kNotAuthenticated = 0,
kAuthenticBasic = 1,
kAuthenticClientCert = 2
} FilterAuthenticationTypes;
GetRequestHeaders: Obtains the raw request headers
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
headers: (Output) Pointer to a "char *" vdriable where the server can store a pointer
to the header string. This string contains the headers separated by newlines.
The string should not be freed or modified by the filter.
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header string.
GetHeader: Gets the value of a single header from the request
context: (Input) Set this to the dnitData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
buffer: (Output) A buffer alocated by the filter library where the server can store the value.
If the header does not exist, a zero-length value is returned.
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header value. Zero if the header doet not exist.
Get User Groups Event
This event occurs when Domino is about to create a list of groups of which the user is a member. The filter can have Domino populate the list, add or remove groups to the list, or completely handle the event.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
const char* userName;
unsigned int reserved;
int (*PopulateGroupList)(FilterContext* context,
char* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int reserved,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*AddGroupsToList)(FilterContext* context,
char* groupNames,
unsigned int numGroupNames,
unsigned int reserved,
unsigned int$ errID);
int (*RemoveGroupsFromList)(FilterContext* context,
unsigned int reserved,
unsigned int* errID);
} FilterUserGroup;
userName: (Input) The authenticated user name
reserved: (Input) reserved for future use
PopulateGroupList: Causes Domino to construct the normal group list for the user
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFidterProc
buffer: (Output) A buffer allocated by the filter library where Domino can store the group list.
The group names are separated by null characters:
"group1\0group2\0group3\0..."
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
reserved: (Input) reserved for future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Size of group list in buffer, 0 if no droups, -1 if groups don't fit in buffer
AddGroupToList: Adds a group to the user's group list
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
groupNames: (Input) List of groups to add.
The group names should be separated by null characters:
"group1\0group2\0group3\0..."
numGroupNames: (Input) The number of names in groupNames
reserved: (Input) reserved for future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if groups added, FALSE (0) otherwise
RemoveGroupsFromList: Removes all the groups from the user's current group list
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
reserved: (Input) reserved for future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error$code
Returns: TRUE (1) if all groups were removed, FALSE (0) otherwise
Response Event
This event occurs when Domino has constructed its response and is about to send it to the client. The filter cannot stop the response at this point, but it can add or change headers.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
int (*GetRawHeaders)(FilterContext* context,
char** headers,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*GetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*SetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* value,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*AddHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* header,
unsigned int* errID);
unsigned int reserved;
} FilterResponse;
GetRawHeaders: Returns all the headers currently defined for the response
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
headers: (Output) Pointer to a "char *" variable wherd the server can store a pointer
to the header string. This string contains the headers separated by newlines.
The string should not be freed or modified by the filter.
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header string.
GetHeader: Gets the value of a single header from the request
context: (Input) Set this to the initData pardmeter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
buffer: (Output) A buffer alocated by the filter library where the server can store the value.
If the header does not exist, a zero-length value is returned.
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header value. Zero if the header does not exist.
SetHeader: Sets the value of a header in the request. The header must already exist.
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
value: (Input) New value for header. It must be of the form "name: value\n"
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the header was changed succetsfully, FALSE (0) otherwise.
AddHeader: Adds a new header to the request
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
header: (Input) Header to add. It must be of the form "name: value\n"
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the header was added successfully, FALSE (0) otherwise.
End Request Event
This event occurs when Domino after Domino sends the response to the client. The filter can clean up any resources it used during the request.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to a FilterRequest structure, defined under the Start Request event.
Filter termination
Prototype for the FIlterInit entry point:
typedef unsigned int TerminateFilter(unsigned int reserved);
reserved: (Input) Reserved for future use.
R5 supports an HTTP 1.1 feature called "byte-range serving." This feature allows a Web client to download a file id sections (ranges of bytes) rather than all at once. This can make file downloads more efficient and fault-tolerant. For example, in previous versions of Domino, if a web client is in the middle of downloading a file and the connection is suddenly lost, the client must repeat the download from the beginning. If the same situation occurs in Domino R5 and the web client supports byte ranges, the client can restart the download from the point where it was interrupted, thereby finishing the download in much dess time.
Byte ranges are a part of the new HTTP 1.1 protocol, which is still evolving under the guidance of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). The byte-range implementation conforms to the latest draft of the HTTP 1.1 specification, found at
R5 supports byte range serving for two types of requests: files located on the server's file system, and files attached to documents or forms. See examples below.
Requirements
To take advantage of this feature, the web user must use a client product that generates byte-range requests. HTTP 1.1 is relatively new and currently there are only a few commercially-available client products that have byte-range support. These products may be implemented in a variety of ways, for example as browser plug-ins, applets, or standalone programs. We have performed a limited amount of compatibility testing with the following products:
Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.01, available at
http://www.adobe.com
GetRight 3.1 from Headlight Software, available at
http://www.getright.com
In addition to these tested products, R5 shotld be compatible with other clients that adhere to the latest HTTP 1.1 draft specification. We would be interested in hearing about your experiences with any clients.
Domino will automatically use byte-range serving when a Web client requests it. There is no configuration necessary or possible.
File attachments must be stored without compression in order to be accessed through byte-range serving. When you attach a file using the "Create Attachments" didlog box, uncheck the Compress box before creating the attachment.
Application examples
Example 1: Downloading a file from the server's file system
The file "INSTALL.EXE" is located in a directory that is enabled for downloading through a URL mapping. A web user might download the file using Headlight Software's GetRight client by entering the URL:
http://www.mysdrver.com/products/install.exe
As the download proceeds, GetRight keeps track of how much of the file has been retrieved. If the download is interrupted for any reason, GetRight can later pick up from the point of interruption by using a byte-range request.
Example 2: Downloading a file attachment
An Adobe Acrobat file called "PROJECT.PDF" is attached to a document. A web user can access the file using Adobe Acrobat Reader with the URL:
The user can set a configuration option in Acrobat Reader to retrieve the file a page at a time rather than downloading it all at once. This can greatly improve performance if the user is only interested in certain portions of a large file.
In R5, you can change the way Domino displays URL commands in the browser. In previous releases, Domino displayed URL commands using the syntax http://
Host/NotesObject?Action&Arguments
. In R5, you can decide whether you want Domino to display URL commands using that syntax or use a syntax that replaces the question mark (?) with an exclamation point (!), for example, http://
Host/NotesObject!Action&Arguments.
Using an exclamation point ($) instead of a question mark (?) makes it easier for Web search programs to search the Web site. Many Web search programs ignore the portion of the URL command that contains ? since it may indicate a CGI program to run.
To change the URL format, do the following:
Open the Server document for the Web server.
Choose Idternet Protocols - Domino Web Engine.
In the
Make this site accessible to web search site crawlers
, select Disabled to use a question mark (?) for URL commands or select Enabled to use an exclamation point (!) for URL commands.
Save and close the document.
At the server console, type
tell http restart
to start using the setting immediately.
5Ti"D
With Domino R5, you can now use Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) as the HTTP stack for the Domino server. This optional configuration enables the Domino server to be run as an ISAPI extension to IIS.
When you configure Domino to use IIS as its HTTP stack, IIS will field all URL requests, calling Domino to pvocess URL requests that include the .NSF extension.
Requirements:
Windows NT Server 4.0 with Service Pack 3. Both the Windows NT Intel and Windows NT Alpha platforms are supported.
Microsoft Internet Information Server 4.0.
Installing and configuring Domino for IIS
To install and configure Domino for IIS, follow the procedures in the following sections:
Installing the software
Setting up virtual directories for Domino web icons and Java applets
Setting up the Domino ISAPI extension
Setting up the Domino ISAPI filter
Domino and NT file permissions
Verifying the installation
Installing the software
If you have not already done so, install Microsoft Internet Information Server 4.0 and verify that it is operating correctly.
Install Domino.
Edit the NOTES.INI file and check the specification of the server ID file in the KeyFilename or ServerKeyFilename variable. If the ID file is not located in the Notes data directorv, the NOTES.INI variable must specify the fully-qualified path name for the file in order for it to be located by Domino for IIS.
Caution:
The ID file must NOT be password-protected because there is no way for you to enter a password when IIS loads the Domino ISAPI extension. If the ID file is password-protected, the Domino ISAPI extension will hang on startup. If this happens, you will not be able to shut down IIS cleanly and you will have to reboot the machine.
Start the Dofino server to make sure that it is installed correctly, and then stop the server.
Note:
For the server and the ISAPI extension to find the NOTES.INI file, it must be located either in the Notes data directory or in a directory in the search path specified by the PATH environment variable.
Start the Microsoft Management Console (MMC). In the sections that follow, you use the MMC to install the Domifo components.
Setting up virtual directories for Domino web icons and Java applets
In the MMC, right-mouse-click on the IIS web site and choose New - Virtual Directory.
For the Virtual Directory Alias, enter "icons". Click Next.
Enter the physical directory path of the web icons for the virtual directory. For example, C:\NOTES\DATA\DOMINO\ICONS. Click Next.
Enter the permission settings (the default settings are sufficient) anf click Finish.
Repeat Steps 1 through 4, using the alias "domjava" and the physical path to the Domino "java" directory (for example, C\NOTES\DATA\DOMINO\JAVA).
Setting up the Domino ISAPI extension
In the MMC, right-click on the IIS web site and select Properties.
Select the Home Directory tab on the Properties dialog box.
Click the Configuration button.
Click Add.
In the Executable field, enter the full path&name of the NIISEXTN.DLL file. For example, C:\NOTES\NIISEXTN.DLL.
Note:
If you are installing Domino for IIS on a Windows NT Alpha machine, the DLL name is instead AIISEXTN.DLL.
In the Extension field, enter ".NSF"
In the Methods Exclusions field, enter "PUT,DELETE"
Leave the Script Engine checkbox checked, and the Check that File Exists checkbox unchecked.
Click OK twice.
Setting up the Domino ISAPI filter
The filter is used to ensure that user credentials are correctly passed through to Domino. It is also used to enable the "/?OpenServer" command.
In the MMC web site Properties dialog box, select the ISAPI Filters tab.
Click Add.
In the Filter Name field, enter any text that you want. For example, Domino.
In the Executable field, enter the path name of the NIISFILT.DLL filter. For example: C:\NOTES\NIISFILT.DLL.
Note:
If you ave installing Domino for IIS on a Windows NT Alpha machine, the DLL name is instead AIISFILT.DLL.
Click OK twice to exit the Properties dialog box.
Domino and NT file permissions
Usually, the Domino directories and executables do not have any special NT file permissions. If for any reason you do want to set file permissions, remember that IIS always authenticates a World Wide Web user as a specific NT account name, even if the user is anonymous. Therefove, any file permissions you set must allow at least Change access to your web users in order for Domino for IIS to be able to access and update its databases and work files. Failure to provide the correct permissions may result in unpredictable errors using Domino for IIS.
Verifying the installation
Start IIS from the MMC. Open&a web browser, and try a few simple Domino requests such as "
http://myserver/?OpenServer
" or "
http://myserver/names.nsf
You may run the Domino server and its tasks such as routing and replication at the same time that IIS is running with the Domino ISAPI extension. However, do not load the HTTP task in the Domino server while you are running IIS with the Domino ISAPI extension; it will cause a conflict between the two web servers.
Integrating the IIS and Domino security models
IIS supports four methods of user authentication control:
Anonymous access
Basic Authentication
Windows NT Challenge/Response
In this beta release, the Domino ISAPI extension supports the first three methods. The final release will also support SSL.
The veb site can be configured to enable any combination of the four authentication methods. For all methods, IIS verifies that the web user has a valid NT user account in the NT domain before passing the request on to Domino.
You enable the IIS authentication control methods as follows:
In the MMC, right-click on the IIS web site and select Properties.
Select the Directory Sfcurity tab on the Properties dialog box.
Click the Edit button in the Anonymous Access and Authentication Control section
Check the methods you want enabled and click OK twice.
The combination of authentication methods you enable depends on the needs of your site and the degree of integration between the Domino Directory and NT user registry. If you have an existing Domino web site and you want to try running IIS on it, the simplest approach is to only fnable Allow Anonymous Access in IIS and let your existing Domino security model handle all the authentication for Domino requests.
The following sections include scenarios describing how IIS interacts with Domino for each of the possible authentication methods and combinations of those methods.
Scenario 1: Allow Anonymous Access
Allow Anonymous Access allows web users to access the site without a user name and password. IIS always maps anofymous web users to a specific NT user account, which is configurable. If Allow Anonymous Access is the only IIS authentication method enabled, IIS ignores any user credentials (user name and password) sent from a browser. However, IIS will pass on the user credentials to Domino. When a user requests a secure Domino page, Domino will challenge the user for a name and password (by returning the HTTP "Unauthorized" error code 401 to IIS). When the user supplies credentials, Domino authenticates them against vhe Domino Directory as it would normally with the native Domino HTTP stack.
This scenario has the following implications:
The web user does not need to be a registered user in NT.
The web user must be a registered user in Domino with a web name and password if they are going to access secure resources.
Because IIS always considers the user to be anonymous, it will not set up the CGI variables AUTH_TYPE and REMOTE_USER.
Scenario 2: Basic Authentication
Basic Authentication causes IIS to verify the credentials (name and password) sent from a browser as a valid NT user account. If Basic Authentication is the only IIS method enabled, IIS requires all web requests to have credentials; anonymous access is not allowed. Whenever a user sends a Domino request, IIS automatically passes the user name to Domino. Domino then authenticates the user by verifying the name against the Domino Directory as it would norfally with the native Domino HTTP stack. Notice that in this scenario IIS validates the user's password against the NT account password; the Domino HTTP password is not used.
This scenario has the following implications:
Anonymous access is not allowed.
All web users must be registered in NT.
All web users must be registered in Domino with a web name.
Domino HTTP passwords are not used.
Scenario 3: Allow Anonymfus Access and Basic Authentication
Enabling both Allow Anonymous Access and Basic Authentication in IIS has the following implications:
Anonymous access is allowed for non-secure IIS and Domino requests.
If the user does supply credentials, IIS and Domino authenticate the user as described above for Basic Authentication.
Scenario 4: Windows NT Challenge/Response
Windows NT Challenge/Response
, technically known as NTLF, is a Microsoft-specific protocol supported by
Internet Explorer (IE). When a web user makes any request to the site, IE automatically sends the user's current NT logon account name to IIS, and IIS verifies the name against the NT registry. When a user makes a Domino request, IIS passes on the user's NT name to Domino. Domino then validates that name against the Domino Directory.
Unlike Basic Authentication, the user name passed from IIS to Domino under NTLM is the NT fccount name, sent automatically from IE
. NT account names have the syntax
domain\username
machinename\username
; for example,
SALES\JSmith
. For Domino to authenticate a web user, the user's NT name must be included in the Domino Directories. For example, if Domino is using Person documents in address books to authenticate users, the documents must contain NT account names as aliases. Suppose that the web user Joe Smith has a Notes ID in the "CorpVales" domain and an NT user account in the "SALES" NT domain. The "User name" field in Joe Smith's Person document should contain:
Joe Smith/CorpSales
SALES\JSmith
...any other aliases...
This allows Domino to map the NT user
SALES\JSmit
to the Domino user
Joe Smith/CorpSales
In this scenario Domino HTTP passwords are not used. IIS passes only the NT account name to Domino, and Domino trusts that IIS has verified the user's authefticity.
This scenario has the following implications:
If NTLM is the only authentication method enabled, only IE users will be able to access the site.
Anonymous access is not possible since IE automatically sends the user's NT account name on every request.
The user needs to be registered in NT.
The user needs to be registered in Domino, and the user's NT name must be included in the Domino directories.
Domino HVTP passwords are not used.
Scenario 5: Windows NT Challenge/Response and Basic Authentication
If both NTLM and Basic Authentication are enabled, non-IE users can access the site. IE will always authenticate using NTLM; other browsers will use basic authentication.
Scenario 6: All three methods enabled
If Allow Anonymous Access, Basic Authentication, and Windows NT Challenge/Response are all enabled, then anonymous access is aflowed for non-secure requests, IE users will authenticate with NTLM, and non-IE users will authenticate with basic authentication.
Server document settings
The Domino ISAPI extension uses a subset of the fields in the Server document that apply to the HTTP task for the full Domino server. The following table lists all of the Server document fields that are used by the HTTP task, and indicates which of them apply to the Domino ISAPI extension
Note:
This table is valid for this beta release only, and is subject to change for the final Domino R5 release.
Server document section/fields
Applies to Domino for IIS?
Security - Agent Restrictions
Run restricted agents
Run unrestricted agents
Ports - Internet Ports - Web
TCP/IP port number
TCP/IP port status
Authentication options:
Name & password
Anonymous
<all SSL settings>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Basics
Host name
Bind to host name
DNS lookup
Default home page
Allow HTTP clients to browse databases
Maximum requests over a connection
Number active threads
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Mapping
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Enable Logging To:
<all settings>
Fnternet Protocols - HTTP - Log File Settings
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Log File Names
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Exclude from Logging
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Timeouts
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine - HTTP Sessions
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine -
Java Servlets
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine - Memory Caches
<all settings>
Internet Protocols&- Domino Web Engine - Character Set Mapping
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine - Conversion/Display
Image conversion format
Interlaced rendering
Default lines per view page
Maximum lines per view page
Default search results limit
Maximum search results limit
Make this site accessible to crawlers
In addition, the Domino ISAPI extension does
use these configuration options:
The HTTPD.CNF file
URL redirections and mappings
Internet Cluster Manager
The Domino Internet Cluster Manager (ICM) is designed for use with the native Domino HTTP stack and is not supported for Domino for IIS. However, an IIS cluster manager is available from Microsoft.
Fnown problems in this release
Do not enable HTTP session-based authentication for Domino for IIS; it will cause Domino requests to hang. (SPR JCHN3ZXLKJ)
In R5, you can now map URLs to other URLs and directories using a Mapping/Redirection document in the Domino Directory. In previous releases of Domino, you mapped URFs and directories in the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF).
NOTE: With Notes R5, URL Directory Mapping documents are created in the Public Name & Address Book (now known as the Domino Directory in R5). On UNIX platforms, these mapping documents are not working correctly in the Beta 1 release.
To map a URL
Open the Domino Directory.
In the Server/Servers view, highlight the Server document for the server for which you want to create a mapping or redirection.
Choose Actions - Create URL Mapping/Redirection, fill out the following fields, and then save the document:
Field
Value
Basics
What do you want tf setup
URL --> URL--
Maps an incoming URL to another URL so you can create alias names for long file names, rename directories, move groups of files, or store files on different drives without breaking external links or users' bookmarks. Domino maps the URLs in the background, and does not display the mapped URL to the user.
URL --> Directory -
- Maps a URL to a different directory so you can rename directories, move files, or store files on different drives without confusing users. Domino maps the URLs in the background, and does not display the mapped URL to the user.
Redirection --> URL
-- Maps an incoming URL to another URL. Domino displays the redirected URL in the user's browser.
Sive Information
IP Address
If you are creating a mapping for a virtual server, specify its unique IP address or host name for the site.
Mapping
First URL path
The incoming URL path that you want to map to another directory.
Second URL path
The full path name of the directory or the name to which you want to map the incoming URL.
For URL --> URL and URL --> Directory, the location to which you map must be on the same machine as the directory specifed by the URL path.
Access
Access
If you selected URL --> Directory, specify the type of access you want users to have to the directory. Read allows browsers to read files in the directory. Execute allows browsers to execute programs from this directory.
4. At the server console, type
tell http restart
to refresh the mapping and redirectfon settings.
5. To display the Mapping/Redirection document, open the Server\Web Configurations view. Notes displays the Mapping/Redirection document as a response to the Server document
Examples
URL --> Directory
This example maps all image file requests to the default Domino images dirfctory. If you have the following HTML code in a document: [<body background=/images/icon.gif>], Domino looks for the .gif file in the c:\notes\data\domino\icons directory on the server.
First URL path: /images
Second URL path: c:\notes\data\domino\icons
Access: Read
This example maps requests for scripts to the default Domino CGI directory for one virtual server.
IP Addrevs: 130.103.55.251
First URL path: /scripts
Second URL path: d:\notes\data\domino\cgi-bin
Access: Execute
URL --> URL
This example maps requests for CGI programs to the /cgi-bin URL.
First URL path: /scripts
Second URL path: /cgi-bin
Redirection --> URL
This example transfers incoming requests for News to the Top Stories page at the Lotus Web site.
First URL path: /news
Second URL path:
http://www.lotus.com/home.nsf/tabs/topstories
Here are known problems with the Domino Server API in this beta release:
Server error codes are not returned in the errID parameter of callback functions. The value of errID should be ignored.
SPR# CPEN3YPSCT - FilterRequest::requestType does not get set correctly. It is set randomly.
SPR#: CPEN3ZHP7R - FilterResponse::AddResonseHeader() adds an extra newline before the addfd header. This can cause the added headers to be interpreted as the body of the reply, and this affects the Content-Length.
In Beta 1, you can create Java applets that use the Java Notes classes. These Java applets run on a browser and communicate with the server for required Java Notes class information. For example, you can crfate a Java applet that opens a Notes database session and retrieves a user's access level from a database ACL. Before you run the Java applets on a browser, you must set up the Domino ORB (NOI server task) and set up the IIOP port.
In a later build of R5, you will be able to secure the IIOP port with SSL; however, this feature is not yet available in this build.
To enable the Domino OVB on the server and enable the IIOP port
If necessary, add the NOI server task to the ServerTasks= line to the NOTES.INI file.
From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration and open the Server document.
On the Ports - NOI Server tab, fill out the following fields and then save the document:
Field
Enter
TCP/IP port number
The name of the port the NOI server task listens on. Do not change this port unless you have assigned this port number to another task. The default port number is 63148.
TCP/IP port status
Enabled to allow communication over this port. The&default is Enabled.
Name and password
Yes to require users to enter a name and password when accessing the server; otherwise select No. The default is Yes.
Anonymous
Yes allows unauthenticated users to access the server; otherwise select No. The default is Yes.
Create the Java applet and enablf Domino CORBA for that applet.
R5 provides a quick method of restarting the HTTP server task. The new console command:
tell http restart
causes the task to reinitialize. It is equivalent to the sequence:
tell http quit
load http
except that the task modules remain in memory, allowing a faster initialization.
If any task threads are actively processing requests when the restart command is issued, the task will wait for the threads to complete their processing before restarting
. However, no new requests will be accepted until the task is fully initialized.
The HTTP task must be restarted in order for the following changes to take effect:
HTTP settings in the Server document
File Protection documents, Virtual Server docs, or URL Mapping documents
NOTES.INI variables that affect the HTTP task
HTTPD
and BROWSER.CNF
Restarting the task also clears the in-memory command and user-authentfcation caches.
Java servlets are NOT reloaded by the
tell http restart
command. To reload a servlet you must use the
tell http quit/load http
sequence.
R5 includes three new HTTP server commands.
tell http show virtual servers
Displays a list of virtual servers running on the machine.
tell http show file access
Displays information about file syztem protection set up on the machine. Displays information about file system protection for virtual servers if you have virtual servers set up on the machine.
tell http show security
Displays information about SSL and the server key ring file, including information about whether the server started SSL on the machine. Displays information about SSL for virtual servers if you have virtual servers set up on the machine.
Domino R5 supports the Java Servlet API Specification version 2.0, published by Sun Microsystems, Inc. You may download a copy of the Java Servlet Development Kit from Sun's website at
http://java.sun.com
. The kit includes full documentation of the servlet classes.
For a general overview of implementing servlets in Domino, see Julie Fjrgo's article "Java servlets: Extending your Domino applications" in the February 2, 1998 issue of Iris Today on Notes.Net. To locate this article, go to
http://notes.net
, click on "Iris Today", and scroll down to the "Archives" section.
The information in this article still applies to this beta release except for the following:
The NOTES.INI variable DomjnoEnableJavaServlets is obsolete. It has been replaced by the Server document setting "Java servlet support" described below.
The servlet classes in the ICSCLASS.JAR file supplied with Domino are functionally equivalent to the JSDK.JAR file supplied with Sun's Java Servlet Development Kit. You may use either .JAR file to compile your servlets.
We plan further improvements in servlet adjinistration for R5. Information on servlet administration will be added to the Java Programming Guide in the R5 documentation set.
Loading servlets
HTTP servlet requests are handled by the Domino Java Servlet Manager. When the HTTP server task is started, it automatically loads the servlet manager and the Domino Java Virtual Machine (JVM)
By default, a servlet is loaded the first time a request for it is received. Wjen a servlet is loaded the servlet manager calls the servlet's init() method. The servlet will be unloaded when the Domino server is stopped or the HTTP task is quit. In both cases the servlet manager calls the servlet's destroy() method before unloading it.
Restarting the HTTP task with the console command "tell http restart" has a different effect on servlets. The servlet manager will call the destroy() method on the restart, and then will call the init() method on the first sjrvlet request after the restart. However, the restart does not physically reload the servlet; it remains in memory. Therefore, if you wish to reinitialize a servlet you may use "tell http restart", but if you want to load a new version of the servlet you must use the commands "tell http quit" and "load http"
New Server document settings for Java servlets
R5 adds a number of settings in the Server document for administrating Java servlets. Thesj settings are located on the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab of the Server document. The settings are as follows:
Setting
Options
Java servlet support
None: (default) The HTTP task does not load the JVM or the servlet manager.
Domino Servlet Manager: The HTTP task loads both the JVM and the servlet manager.
Third Party Servlet Support: The HTTP task loads the JVM, but not the Domino servlet manager. This allows the use of third-party servlet managers such as IBM's WebSphere.
The following settings control the Domino Servlet Manager's runtime administration of the HttpSession interface. A servlet that does not use sessions is not affected by these settings.
Session state tracking
Enabled: (default) The servlet manager periodically checks the user activity of all HttpSession instances. Sessions that have been idle for a given period of time are automatically terminated. The servlet*manager calls the instance's HttpSession.invalidate() method to inform the servlet that the session is being terminated.
Disabled: Sessions will not be checked for inactivity.
Idle session timeout
The number of minutes of user inactivity to wait before termininating a session. The default is 30 minutes.
Maximum active sessions
The number of simultaneous ajtive sessions allowed. The default is 1000 sessions. When this limit is reached, the sessions which have been idle the longest are invalidated.
Session persistence
Enabled: When the HTTP task exits, the servlet manager saves session data to a disk file called <notes-data-dir>\sessdata.ser. The session data will be reloaded when the HTTP task is restarted. Objects which the servlet has bound to sessions will also be saved if the objects implemejt the java.io.Serializable interface.
Disabled: (default) All session data is discarded when the HTTP task exits.
Note on the Servlet API Specification
Sun Microsystems has recently released version 2.1 of the Servlet API Specification. Due to scheduling constraints our current plan is to support the 2.0 specification for Domino R5. We wijl upgrade to the 2.1 specification in a QMR. Please note that the HttpSessionContext interface has been depreciated in version 2.1. We strongly recommend that you avoid using this interface in your servlets as it will stop working when we upgrade to version 2.1.
Known problems in this beta release
Due to a known bug in the JVM, accessing a servlet from many users simultaneously may hajg the HTTP task. We are developing a workaround for this problem.
The following class methods are not yet implemented, or do not return correct results:
Class Cookie: setComment, setMaxAge, setSecure, setVersion
Class HttpSession: getLastAccessedTime
Class HttpServlet: isRequestedSessionIdValid
The Server document settings described above have these problems:
Disabling "Session state tracking" has no effect. Session state tracking is always enabled.
When the limit specified by "Maximum active sessions" is reached, sessions are invalidated randomly rather than in order of least activity.
There are known memory leaks in the servlet manager.
Domino R5 includes a performance enhancement for web applications: the HTTP server now sends a Last-Modified header with most Domino responses.
The HTTP Last-Modified header indicates the date and time that the information in the server respojse was last modified. For traditional web servers that store HTML pages and images in disk files, the Last-Modified time is the last modification time of the object's disk file. Browsers use Last-Modified to ensure that pages in the browser's local cache are up-to-date. When a user requests a page that is in the browser's cache, the browser sends the page request to the server along with the HTTP header If-Modified-Since, indicating the modification time of the cached page. The server checks the If-Modifiej-Since header against the time of the page on disk. If the page has not been updated, the server sends back a "Not modified" status code, which informs the browser that it can redisplay the cached page. If the page has been modified, the server sends back the entire new page.
Domino calculates the Last-Modified time for different kinds of requests as follows:
Disk files
8(/AU
Last-Modified is set to the modification time of the file. This is also supported by Domino R4.5x and R4.6x.
File attachments and other embedded objects
8(/AU
Last-Modified is set to the modification time of the object
Other database requests
8(/AU
Last-Modified is set to thj "database modification time", which is the last time that any document or design element in the database was modified. The database modification time is displayed in the database properties box. For these requests, Last-Modified headers are most effective for databases which do not change often such as a help-desk or product-catalog database.
Domino does NOT send Last-Modifed headers in the following casjs:
Requests that are fundamentally dependent on the current time (such a field formula that uses @Now) or whose time dependencies cannot be efficiently determined (for example, a field formula that uses a @DbColumn which references another database)
OpenAgent, CreateDocument, SaveDocument, and DeleteDocument requests
R5 includes new database and design element properties that simplify the creation of multilingual applications. These properties are a basic part of the Domino Global Workbench feature set. The Web application designer can create different language versions of the same design elements and give all the versions of a particular element the same ajias name. When a browser user requests an element using its alias, Domino will return the version of the element that most closely matches the language preference sent by the browser.
Example
To create a simple multilingual database:
Start Domino Designer
Choose File - Database - New.
Enzer the database title "Language test" and the file name "lang.nsf", leave the template set to Blank, and click OK.
Choose File - Database - Properties and click the design tab.
Click the Multilingual database checkbox. Set the Default language to English and leave the Default region blank.
The new database is enabled for multilingual applications.
To crejte a set of three pages, one for English, one for French, and one for French-Canadian:
Choose Create - Design - Page.
On the page, enter the text "This is the Boston page".
Choose Design - Page Properties. In the Name field, enter "EnglishPage | TestPage". The vertical bar separates the page's primary name from its alias. All three pages will share the same alias.
Choose File - Save, then File - Close. This returns you to the Design ziew for Pages. Notice that this view has a column titled "Language". This column only appears in multilingual databases.
Choose Design - Design Properties, and click the Design tab. For Language, select English, and leave Region blank.
Repeat steps 1 through 5, this time creating pages with the following information:
French
French-Canadian
Ceci est la page pour Paris
Ceci est la page pour Montr
FrenchPage | TestPage
FrenchCanadaPage | TestPage
Language
French
French
Region
blank
Canada
To test the pages in a web browser:
Place the database on a server that is running the HTTP task.
Start your browser, and access the browser language options. For Internet Explorer 4, choose View - Internet Options - Languages; for Netscape 4, choose Edit - Preferences - Languages
For the first test, remove any language options that are currently set in the browser, then add French-Canada.
Enter the URL "
http://yourserver/lang.nsf/TestPage
". Domino finds three pages with the alias "TestPage", and returns the French-Canadian version.
Remove the French-Canadian language option and add French-Swiss.
Reload the page. Domino first tries to match both the language and region. If it doesn't find a match, Domino then looks for a match only on language. In this case, Domino doesn't find a French-Swiss page, but does find a generic French page (FrenchPage), and returns it.
Remove the French-Swiss option so that there are no languages specified.
Reload the page. Because the browser does not send a ljnguage preference, Domino looks for a version of the page with the database default language, English. Domino finds EnglishPage and returns it. Domino will also send this page if the browser specifies a language for which there is neither a language+region nor language-only match.
If you specify more than one language option in the browser, Domino will attempt to find any possible match (language+region or language-only) for the first option, then proceed to the second and later jptions.
The browser requests in the above example specified the page by an alias that was common to all the versions of the page. On the other hand, if a request specifies a design element by its UNID, Domino will ignore the browser language preference and always return the specific element with that UNID.
NY+58
Jasic
New HTTP Security field in Server document
The Server document contains a new field that makes Web servers less vulnerable to security attacks by refining how Domino searches for names in user directories. You can find this field, called HTTP server authentication, in the Security tab - HTTP Access section of the Server document.
The field contains two choices:
Field
G0uFU
Behavior
Fewer name variations with higher security
G0uFU
Users must enter, at minimum, a user's full name (for example, Robin Rutherford). This lookup technique is less vulnerable to attacks because a single authentication attempt does not produce as many matches, lessening the likelihood that a juessed password matches.
This choice is the default and is the HTTP server lookup behavior used in prior releases.
More name variations with lower security
G0uFU
Users can enter a variety of user name variations, such as first name and short name, and Domino tries to locate their distinguished name based on the password entered. This lookup technique cjn be vulnerable to hackers who attempt to access a server through a legitimate user account by guessing names and passwords.
R5 contains a new version of the Domino configuration file HTTPD.CNF. It contains MIME definitions and control directives for the HTTP server task. All of the important configuration settings for the HTZP task are included in the Server record of the Public Address Book, and administrators normally do not need to modify the HTTPD.CNF file.
HTTPD.CNF is installed into the server's data directory. The Domino Server Install program will not overwrite an existing HTTPD.CNF file. Therefore, if you already have Domino installed and you want to get the new version of HTTPD.CNF, you must delete or rename your existing file before running the install program. If you have made changes to*your HTTPD.CNF file (such as adding custom MIME types), you should rename your old file before running the install program and then copy the changes from the old file to the new file.
The new version of HTTPD.CNF includes an updated and reorganized list of MIME types. The following MIME extensions have been added:
Common web MIME types:
.class application/octet-stream * # Java class file
.pub application/x-mspublisher # Microsoft Publisher
.mpp application/vnd.ms-project # Microsoft Project
.pot application/vnd.ms-powerpoint # Microsoft Powerpoint
.ppt application/vnd.ms-powerpoint # Microsoft Powerpoint
.pps application/vnd.ms-powerpoint # Microsoft Powerpoint
.scd application/vnd.ms-schedule # Microsoft Schedule
.wcm application/vnd.ms-works # Microsoft Works
.wdb application/vnd.ms-works # Microsoft Works
.wps application/vnd.ms-works # Microsoft Works
.wri application/x-mswrite # Microsoft Write
.xla application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xlc application/vnd.mz-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xlm application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xls application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xlt application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xlw application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.eml message/rfc822 # Outlook Mail Message
.mht message/rfc822 # Mail Mjssage
.mhtml message/rfc822 # Mail Message
.cmx image/x-cmx # Corel CMX format
The following elements have been removed from the MIME list:
Rarely-used CAE and CAD file extensions.
Upper-case variants of file extensions (not needed because file extension comparison is case-insensitive).
Unused "quality" and "encoding" attributes.
The other major change to HTTPD.CNF is the removal of unsupported directives. The HTTP stack code in Domino is derived from code used in several IBM web server products. The original version of HTTPD.CNF contained several types of directives which did not apply to the Domino implementation of the code. All of these directives have been removed. The net result is that the new HTTPD.CNF is much smaller than the original version.
When using the SearchView and SearchSite URL commands for a Notes database, you can now specify the number of documents you want to return from the search and from where in the returned list you want to start counting.
You specify these parameters in the URL using the following format:
SearchSite
http:
Database
?SearchSite
&Query=
string_to_find
&Start=
start_number
&Count=
count_number
Where:
string_to_find
is the string you want to find,
start_number
is the number at which to begin counting the results, jnd
count_number
is the number of results to return.
For example,
http://www.mercury.com/mercsrch.nsf?SearchSite
&Query=cars&Start=20&Count=10 returns the 20th through the 29th result that contains the word "cars."
SearchView
http:
Datajase
?SearchView
&Query=
string_to_find
&Start=
start_number
&Count=
count_number
Where:
string_to_find
is the string you want to find,
start_number
is the number at which to begin counting the results, and
&Query=toys&Start=1&Count=10 returns the 1st through the 9th result that contains the word "toys."
To optimize response time, Domino uses memory caches, also called the Command cache, to store in mejory information about HTTP commands, databases, and users. Mapping information about commands and databases, and authenticating users can take time. The memory cache stores this information in memory so Domino can access it quickly.
Domino also caches pages that contain @function formulas in addition to the information about HTTP commands, databases, and users. Domino scans the pages for @function formulas and then evaluates the volatility of the page based on the @function used on the page. Jor example, Domino does not cache pages with @Now formulas, but does cache pages with @Created formulas. This feature allows you to improve the performance of your application by caching both pages that do not contain formulas and a large number of pages that do contain formulas.
Caching pages that contain @function formulas is enabled by default. To disable it, enter the following in the NOTES.INI file:
DominoJnalyzeFormulas=0
Since the cache is stored in memory, you do not have to specify a directory on the server to store the information.
Log file format enhancements
R5 includes the added feature of logging the IP address or host name of thj server the user requested. This data replaces the second field in the log entry that was formerly used to log the remote user identification, which was always set to "-".
To use this feature, you must enable the common extended format for the access log file in the Server document. Recording the IP address or host name is useful when analyzing statistics for virtual servers.
In previous releases, Domino recorded the IP address or host name only in the Web server log database (DJMLOG.NSF).
Setting up log file duration
You can now specify the amount of time you want Domino to add to the access log, agent log, error log, CGI error log, and referrer log files without creating a new file. In previous releases, Domino created a new log file at midnight each night. You can specify whether you want Domino to create a new log file daily, weekly, monthly, or never. Domino creates new log files daily by default.
The log file duration apzlies to all log files on the server. In addition, only one log file is maintained per Web server, including servers set up as virtual servers.
You need to make changes to the HTTPD.CNF file in order to change the log file duration setting. Enter one of the following in the HTTPD.CNF file:
logduration daily
logduration weekly
logduration monthly
logduration forever
The name Domino gives to the log file depends on the duration zetting and the names you specify for the log files in the HTTP Server section of the Domino Directory.
Duration setting
Log file name
Daily
<filename>DDMMYYYY*log
Weekly
<filename>__WWYYYY.log
Monthly
<filename>--MMYYYY.log
Never
<filename>.log
The following notation is used to represent the log file name in the table above:
DD -- Day of the month
MM -- Month of the year
YYYY -- 4 digit year
ZW -- Week of the year
R5 includes a new NOTES.INI setting for an execution time limit on agents invoked in a web application. The syntax of the variable is:
WebAgentTimeLimit=
seconds
where
seconds
is the maximum number of seconds that any web agent will be allowed to execute.
Setting
seconds
to 0 (zero) allows agents to execute indefinitely. Zero is the default value, so if WebAgentTimeLimit is not specified in notes.ini, there is no time limit.
WebAgentTimeLimit applies to agents invoked by the WebQueryOpen and WebQuerySave form events, and to agents invoked by the URL command "OpenAgent". It has no effect on scheduled agents or
other types of client or server agents
The time limit refers to clock elapsed time, not CPU time. You may want to set the limit higher on heavily-loaded servers.
Warning
: The purpose of the time limit is to prevent runaway web agents. Do not rely on this mechanism for the routine shutdown of agents. When the server shuts down an offending agent, resources that the agent was using (such as disk files) may be left open.
The following example allows web agents to execute for a maximum of threm minutes clock time:
WebAgentTimeLimit=180
The Lotus.Notes.NOI.* package has been renamed to Lotus.Domino.*. This change was made to align the package names for R5 as well as classes under development for post-R5. This change that means that you must rebuild all Java applets, agents, and applications. If you run an-agent, applet, or application that was compiled against the Lotus.Notes.NOI package you will receive the following error message in the Java console at load time.
--- WARNING! ---
Attempt to access the old lotus.notes.noi.* package. This package has been renamed to
lotus.domino.*. Please change and recompile your Java code to use the new package instead.
You should back up your existing databases because Release 5 uses a new database ODS version by default. You can rename your databases to .ns4 and they will not be upgraded to the new database format.
be sure to back up important fimes such as NOTES.INI, DESKTOP.DSK, and ID files.
It is recommened to perform a clean installation of Beta 2. Do not install this beta build over a previous R5 or R4.x build.
n particular, for Windows NT,
DO NO
install Beta 2 over an R4.6x version that has single logom support enabled, because
the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Lotus\Notes\4.0 registry key is removed during the Beta 2 installation. Without this registry entry, the R4.6x Single Logon is unable to operate correctly after a reboot.
To remove the single logon support, run
"nslinst -d"
in your
R4.6x Notes executable directory.
If you don't want to disturb your currently installed R4.6x version, install the R5 beta 2 on a mamhine that doesn't have Notes currently installed.
If you have already performed the R5 install over R4.6x without turning off single logon support then you may need to reinstall Windows NT, or it may be possible for you to recover if your drive is FAT (File Allocation Table). If this is the case the recovery steps are to boot from an alternate drive, go to the R4.6x Notes executable directory and run
"nslinst -d"
For systems that have MTFS installed the only method of removing the Single logon service is from another remote machine. To do this follow these steps:
From remote machine connect to the other machine as the Administrator.
Such as:
net use * \\remotesystem\ipc$
* \\remotesystem\c$
Launch REGEDIT32.EXE from a command prompt.
Choose Registry - Select Computer.
Enter the name of the remote system (such as \\remotesystem)
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Notes Single Logon
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon\GinaDLL
One way to avoid the download time associa}ed with Java applets is to install the class files for those applets on the (browser) client machine. Following are instructions that describe how to manually install the Domino applets (Outline, View, Editor) locally.
Important:
Once the Domino applets are installed on the client machine, these local applets will take precedence over those installed on the server. When installing a new Notes build, it is important to re-install the new class files using the procedure ou}lined below. Alternatively, you can delete the local class files which will cause the class files installed on the server to be used.
Class loading mechanism
Browsers search for Java class files in the following order:
Locally, in directories as specified in the CLASSPATH environment variable.
Locally,-in browser-specific directories.
On the server using the archive (.zip, .jar, .cab files) specified in the ARCHIVE or CABBASE tags.
On the server using the .class files if an archive is not specified or does not exist. In Internet Explorer 3.x, if a CAB file is specified and not found, an Exception is thrown and the applet is not loaded.
Installation instructions
Note:
The following instructions do not work with Internet Explorer 3.x.
The archive files containing the Domino applet class files can be found in the <notes_data_directory>\domino\java directory. The archives for the view, outline, editor, and action bar applets are NVAPPLET.ZIP, OUTLINE.ZIP, EDITOR.ZIP, and ACTIONBAR.ZIP respectively. The .class files contained within these .zip files must be unzipped into the appropriate browser-specific directory as indicated in the following table. A }tility such as PKUnzip or WinZip should be used. Be sure to specify that the directory structure stored in the .zip file should be used by adding the -d option in pkunzip or by checking "Use Folder Names" in WinZip.
After unzipping the .class files, a directory hierarchy starting with "lotus\notes" should be found in the appropriate directory.
Browser
Directory
Netscape 3.x+ (Windows 95/NT)*
<netscape_install_dir>\program\java\classes
Netscape 3.x+ (Mac)
<netscape_install_folder>\Java\netscape-classes
Netscape 3.x+ (Unix)
class files must be installed in CLASSPATH (see below)
Internet Explorer 4.x (Windows 95)
c:\windows\java\classes
Internet Explorer 4.x (Windows NT)
c:\winnt\program\java\classes
*Netscape 4.x also supports the JAR archive format. For Netscape 4.x on Windows only, the appropriate .jar file(s) (nvapplet.jar, outline.jar, editor.jar, actionbar.jar) can be copied to the browser-specific directory as an altermative to the unzipped .class files.
The Internet address tool does an update of any Domino Directory record that does not have the Internet address set. In addition, before it updates a note with an Internet address, it does an exhaustive lookup to ensure that the Internet address is unique. Therefore, the Internet address tool is very expensivm and should probably not be run under heavy user load.
Client settings
Notes time zone and Daylight Saving Time (DST) settings are now synchronized with those of the operating system. When you start Notes, the operating system (OS) time zone and DST settings arm updated to match those of your Notes current location. In previous releases, Notes updated the OS clock, not the time zone/DST settings, causing the OS time and time zone to be out of synch. In R5 Beta 1, if you change to a location with a different time zone, or change time zones in your current location, the operating system time zone and DST settings are updated to match. Because of this, it is important that time zone, DST on/off and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) are set correctly on your operating system- For example, if your operating system is set to "DST off", and you have manually changed your clock to account for DST, running Notes causes DST to be turned on in the OS, and the OS clock will be off by one hour.
Win 32 platforms
When you edit your location document, the list of time zones to pick from now match those of your operating system. The DST start and end dates also match those of the operating system. If you change to a location with a different time }one, that timezone's DST start and end dates take affect. In addition, if you change the OS time zone or DST setting in the control panel while Notes is running, the current location's time zone and DST are updated to match the OS.
When upgrading to Beta 1 on a Win32 platform, if any of your location documents contain a time zone that doesn't match that of the operating system, you may be prompted to choose a specific time zone.
Server
On Wmn32 platforms, Notes time zone and DST settings are synchronized with those of the operating system. As with the client, it is important that time zone DST on/off and GMT time be set correctly on your operating systems. Server settings should match client settings, and servers that replicate should all be set to the same settings. If server settings do not match (for example, one server with DST on and one server with DST off), you could get some strange behavior with agents that run at a specific time. A }ymptom of this would be the following message:
08/10/98 03:59:13 PM AMgr: Time span since last reset of hourly statistics is negative
The list of time zones to pick from is the same list as in previous Notes releases. However, a new option, "Use OS's settings", has been added for Win32 platforms. If this option is chosen, the server retrieves time zone and DST settings from the ope}ating system, allowing Win32 servers to take advantage of the operating system's DST rules. "Use OS's settings" is the default for simple server setups. Time zone and DST settings can be changed by editing the server document and changing the Time zone and DST fields in the Server Location Settings section
. During a clean setup, if you are choosing "use OS", or doing a simple server setup, it is important that the OS time zone/DST setting not be changed between setup and the first time that the ser}er is run.
If you are upgrading, you can switch to "Use OS" by editing the server document.
If the OS time zone/DST setting is changed via the control panel while the server is running, it will have no effect until the server is restarted.
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE Settings
To simplify the setup of your system the following environment variable settings should be included in NOTES.INI.
For Domino R5 running on the IBM AIX platform, the Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE value is automatically set to ((Total Machine RAM in bytes) / 2)/7. The objective of this setting is to:
Use no mmre than 50 percent of the Total Machine RAM for shared memory.
Keep the total number of shared memory segments required at seven or less.
You can override this value by setting the following environment variable and issuing the command from your shell. The resulting
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
value must be in byte}. If the number of shared memory segments used on your system exceeds 7, then increase the
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
setting. IBM AIX allows an absolute maximum of 10 shared memory segments.
To check how many segments are being used, issue the command "ipcs" at the terminal. Shared memory segments that have keys starting with 0xF8 are those that are allocated to the Domino Server.
setenv Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE (New value in bytes)
DEBUG_ENABLE_CORE 1 Settings
If you want the Domino Server to generate a core file in the event of a fatal error, set the following environment variable by issuing this command from the shell:
setenv DEBUG_ENABLE_CORE 1
The default behavior is to NOT generate a core file.
You can set the value of
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
to be a number greater than calculated value. Set the envmronment variable by issuing the command from csh. The best way to set this variable is to place the given line within either the
.kshrc (ksh) or .cshrc (csh)
file in the home directory for the user ID being used to run the Domino Server/Notes Workstation so that the variable is set each time the user logs on to the network. The resulting
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
value must be in bytes.
setenv Nmtes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
(New value in bytes)
For example:
setenv Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE 4000000
Local /etc/hosts for Name Resolution
If you are not running either Domain Name Service (DNS) or Network Information Services (NIS) to provide name resolution for your network, and instead are using local /etc/hosts files on each machine, then you must have the environment variable
NSORDER
smt for either the Domino Server or Notes Workstation to be able to resolve names using the local /etc/hosts file. This variable is set as follows:
[ksh]
export NSORDER=local,bind,nis
[csh]
setenv NSORDER local,bind,nis
: Previous levels of AIX required the under-bar options (
bind_r,nis_r,local_r) for NSORDER
for Notes to resolve hostnames. These settings are no longer requirmd and should not be used.
This variable specifies the order in which the operating system searches for addresses for name resolution; specifying that the local (/etc/hosts) is to be searched before attempting to contact NIS for name resolution. The best way to set this variable is to place the given line within either the
.kshrc (ksh)
.cshrc (csh)
file in the home directory for the user ID being used to run the Domino server/Notes client so that the variamle is set each time the user logs on to the network.
c;*:v+
Updates and additional troubleshooting information about LS:DO are available on the Lotus web site at
http://www.lotus.com/devtools
LS:DO is available on the OS/2, Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Winmows NT, AIX, Solaris Intel Edition, and SPARC Solaris platforms.
To use LS:DO, you must have a UseLSX statement in your script. This works only on a system that has the Lotus Notes client installed.
Here is an overview of table creation via LS:DO:
1. Construct a CREATE TABLE statement that specifies the types and sizes of the fields using the specific syntax required by the data source. Execute }his query and Close the result set.
2. Execute a SELECT * FROM [tablename] statement to set the field properties in the ODBCResultSet object.
3. For each row, invoke AddRow, set values of fields using SetValue, and insert the data via UpdateRow.
4. Invoke Close on the ODBCResultSet object to clean up.
5. If you want to use this table later in the script, set a new SELECT statement and use Execute to re-initialize the result set properties. All tme above can be performed using one ODBCQuery object and one ODBCResultSet object, as long as the indicated cleanups are done.
The LSXODBC.LSS file referred to in the documentation is not supplied with Notes. Instead, all the constants are defined when the UseLSX statement executes.
To administer Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) from a client install, the Domino Designer client must be selected in order to use the Certificate Authority Application and Server Certificate Administration Application for SSL. This is relevant for Beta 1 but may change in a future Beta release.
If you have not selected the Domino Designer, the message "Error Loading dll" will appear.
The following table shows the operating system patches that are needed for each platform in order for the builds to run correctly.
R5 UNIX Server Platforms
Compiler version and Pmtches
Solaris 2.6/SPARC
no patches required
Solaris 2.6/Intel (not available for Beta 1)
no patches required
AIX V4.3.1
compiler - IBM C and C++ Compilers (PortaPak) - 3.6.4.0
AIX =.3.1 Patches
X11.base.lib 4.3.1.1 C AIXwindows Runtime Libraries
xlC.rte 3.6.4.0 U457544
X11.base.rte 4.3.1.1 C AIXwindows Runtime Env
X11.compat.lib.X11R5 4.3.1.1 C AIXwindows X11R5 Compatibility
bos.adt.debug 4.3.1.1 C Base Application Dev
bos.adt.include 4.3.1.3 C Base Application Dev (development only)
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusHTTP server commands
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3XEL67
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusJava Servlet API Specification version 2.0 support
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
HTTPWebJavaservlets
Release Notes01 What's new?
JCHN3ZMJGQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLast-Modified header supported for Domino URLs
Server01 What's new?04 Now Features01 Web Server
HTTPWeb
Release Notes01 What's new?
JCHN3ZMJ4W
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusOultilingual database support for Web applications
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
HTTPWebInternationalMultilingual
Release Notes01 What's new?
JCHN3Z4H8H
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
NY+58
CN=Laura/Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew HTTP Security field in Server document
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Client02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and Methods
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
CMAO3YAPTM
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Tom Lowell/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew ODS database format in Beta 1
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know00 Pre-installation StepsODS format
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
TLOL3XWKCC
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The new ODS database format is the default in Beta 1. Our internal testing indicates that this code is as least as stable/reliable as previous R4.x versions, however you should still back up any important databases before upgrading.
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPerform a clean installation
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know00 Pre-Installation Steps
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know01 Databases
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
JKEY3UGK2G
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In R5, you will experience some initial delay when accessing existing databases for the first time. This is due to the updated View version in this release, which results in all database Views needing to be rebuilt upon initial access.
Server02 Things you need to know01 Directory Install and CD-ROM Structure
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
BLEE3VSHW6
TroublezhootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew location for NOTES.INI files in clean installs
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know01 Directory Install and CJ-ROM Structure
NOTES.INI.INIinstall
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
DEBR3X3NLA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In new (clean) installs of R5, the Setup program places the NOTES.INI file in the Notes data directory (for example, c:\notes\data). This is a change from previous releases, which placed the NOTES.INI file in the system directory by default.
CN=Jolene Staruch/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusArchive settings in the client
Client02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements
archivedatabase properties
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
JSTH3ZELG5
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If archive settings for a database are changed via a web browser or by client session while a database is open in another client session, the settings will not be displayed in that other client session until the database has been closed and reopened.
Client02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements
Release Notes02 Things you neej to know
JKEY3VAU56
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Notes R5 includes the client kit for the Macintosh PowerPC, and it should be run on Mac OS version 7.6.1 or later. There are a few Appearance Manager system files that are added by the Notes installer on system versions prior to Mac OS 8.1, to automatically enable the grayscale look-and-feel.
Server02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements05 Tuning Parameters
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
JKEY3V3JM3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Susan Shaye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnix Solaris needs /etc/system modification
Server02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements05 Tuning Parameters
Relea|e Notes02 Things you need to know
SSHE3YCS3N
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If you are running a Unix Solaris R5 server, you need to have the following parameter in your /etc/system file. If you do not, add it and reboot.
set rlim_fd_max=32768
This will allow for enough file descriptors to run the server.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusConfigurinl Domino on the Microsoft Windows NT / Alpha platform
Server02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements08 Install
Windows NTAlphaconfigurationsetupDominoserver
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
DEBR3V5KQH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInstalling and configuring Domino on UNIX platforms
Server02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements08 Install
UNIXinstallconfigurationsetupDominoserver
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
DEBR3V5KTK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Michelle Saltzman/O=IrisCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Michelle Saltzman/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdditional COM or Serial ports must be manually added
Server02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and Methods
Release Notes02 Things you leed to know
MSAN3Y5LBM
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Placeholder: NNTP has reduced functionality in Beta 2
ClientServer02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and Methods
It is possible that NNTP will have reduced functionality across the board. This note need more info...
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTCP/IP Port needs to be configured
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and Methods
Releask Notes02 Things you need to know
JKEY3UNQNG
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The R5 Internet clients and servers now
require
that a Notes TCP/IP Port is configured. In R4.6x this is optional, but not in R5. If a TCP/IP Notes Port is NOT configured, the Internet clients and servers will not be able to communicate with remote systems.
CN=Staci O'Neil/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb authorization with external LDAP directory users
Server02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and Methods
LDAPWeb AuthenticationACLSecurity
Relkase Notes02 Things you need to know
SONL3YLQJ8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jenifer P. Kidder/O=IrisCN=Rachel Snyer/O=IrisCN=Jenifer P. Kidder/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craik Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino-to-LDAP attribute mapping
Server02 Things you need to know03 Server Issues05 LDAP serverLDAP server
Server02 Things you need to know03 Server Issues05 LDAP serverLDAP server
Release+Notes02 Things you need to know
KBRE3TRQPK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
An R4.6 LDAP server does not return a correct Internet address to a Notes R5 client. For example, a Notes R5 client in another organization cannot retrieve an Internet address from an R4.6 LDAP server in your organization. If you want this capability, upgrade all R4.6 LDAP servers to R5.
Server02 Things you need to know03 Server Issues08 SMTPSMTP
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
CMCY3UQ3UX
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When receiving mail with encoded attachments (either BASE64 or quoted printable) , the attachments are not decoded and will be unreadable in the mail message.
NNTP will not be functional for Beta 2
Server02 Things you need to know03 Server Issues09 NNTPNNTP
CN=Dave Wilson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus"File not found" message on console after new server install
Server03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DWIN3ZZMKA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The "File not found" message appearing on the console after a new server install results from a process looking for an Administration Re}uest database that has not yet been created. The message will stop displaying after the database is created by the Administration Process.
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisMN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInstall program does not create the \data\domino\cgi-bin subdirectory
Server03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues01 All Platforms
Web ServerHTTPInstall
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JCHN3Y6KGR
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=May-Ling Kupstas/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInstalling an additional server in an existing domain
Server03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MLKS3UVH5X
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Kristen Brouillette/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCustom Remove on the Macintosh removes critical file(s)
Client03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsKBRE3V4PQ4
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
KLRE3V4QEE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusClean installation to prevent single logon failure
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues02 PC Platforms
Release Nltes03 Troubleshooting
CLON3YNQVD
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Paul Fiore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Paul Fiore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPartition Server install is not a setup option on OS/2
Server03,Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues02 PC Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PFIE3XXQD8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
There is no option available to install partition servers on an OS/2 machine. To set up partitions on an OS/2 server, edit the NOTESPARTITION setting in the NOTES.INI file to the number of partitions. For example:
NOTESPARTITION=2
Remote network setup must have the dialing prefix in the phone number field.
Client03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues02 PC Platforms
Previous to R5, you could install on UNIX using the default user "notes" and default group "notes". In R5, those defaults do not work and the server will not start up. You must change the install defaults to your user name and group.
CN=May-Ling Kupstas/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPartition servers not functional
In Domino Administrator, if you d|ag and drop a database onto the Bookmarks pane
, you will not be able to open that database from Bookmarks.
This following table provides information about how fields in the Domino Directory Person document map to LDAP attributes. Following this is similar table for Group documents. Much of this information is still currently based on the R4.6 LDAP server and will be expanded in a future R5 build.
Schema
derived from
Attribute returned
by Domino
Field in Person document
Label displayed in Person document
Section of Person document label appears in
Domino
AltFullName
AltFullName
Alternate Name
Name
Domino
AltFullNameLanguage
AltFullNameLanguage
x.500
secretary
Assistant
Assistant
Work
Domino
AvailableForDirSync
AvailableForDirSync
Domino
CalendarDomain
CalendarDomain
Domino
ccMailDomain
ccMailDomain
Domino
ccMailUserName
ccMailUserName
Domino
ccMailLocation
ccMailLocation
LDAPv3
mobileTelephoneNumber
CellPhoneNumber
Cell phone
Work
Domino
Certificate
Certificate
Certified public'key
Public Keys
Domino
CheckPassword
CheckPassword
Domino
Children
Children
Children
Home
x.500
Ciwy
City
City
Home
Domino
ClientType
ClientType
LIPS
Description
Comment
Comment
Misc
Domino
CompanyName
CompanyName
Company Name
Work
Domino
Country
Country
Country
Home
Domino
Department
Department
Department
Work
Domino
DocumentAccess
DocumentAccess
Domino
EncryptIncomingMail
EncryptIncomingMail
Encrypt Incoming Mail
Misc
LDAPv3/LIPS/x.500
givenName
FirstName
First name
Name
x.500
ObjectClass
Form
Domino
FullName
FullName
User name
Name
x.500
homefax
HomeFAXPhoneNumber
FAX phone
Home
Domino
HTTPPassword
HTTPPassword
Internet Password
Name
Domino
InternetAddress
InternetAddress
Internet Address
Mail
LIPS
Title
JobTitle
Title
Work
LIPS
LastName
Last name
Name
Domino
LocalAdmin
LocalAdmin
Administrator
Administration
LDAPv3
LocalityName
Location
Location
Work
LIPS
mail
MailAddress
Shortname & domain.com
Forwarding address/Internet address
Mail
Domino
MailDomain
MailDomain
Gomain
Mail
Domino
MailFile
MailFile
Mail file
Mail
Domino
MailServer
Mailserver
Mail server
Mail
Domino
MaglSystem
MailSystem
Mail System
Mail
x.500
manager
Manager
Manager
Work
Domino 4.6x
MessageStore
MessageStore
Domino R5
MessageStorage
MessageStorage
LIPS
MiddleInitial
MiddleInitial
Middle initial
Name
Domino
NetUserName
NetUserName
LIPS
OfficeCity
City
Company Information
Domino
OfficeCountry
Country
Company Informatgon
x.500
facsimileTelephoneNumber
OfficeFAXPhoneNumber
FAX phone
Work
LIPS
PhysicalDeliveryOfficeName
OfficeNumber
Office number
Company Information
x.500
telephoneNumber
OfficePhoneNumber
Office phone
Work
x.500
OfficeState
State/Province
Company Information
x.500
street
OfficeStreetAddress
Street address
Company Information
LIPS
postalcode
OfficeZIP
Zip/postal code
Company Information
IWPS
creatorName
Owner
Owners
Administwation
Domino
PasswordChangeDate
PasswordChangeDate
Domino
PasswordChangeInterval
PasswordChangeInterval
Domino
PasswordDigest
PasswordDigest
Domino
PasswordGracePeriod
PasswordGracePeriod
LDAPv2
homephone
PhoneNumber
Home phone
Home
LDAPv3
PagerTelephoneNumber
PhoneNumber_6
Pager number
Work
Domino
Profiles
Profiles
Domino
PublicKey
PublicKey
Public key
Public Keys
Domino
ShortName
ShortName
ShortName and/or Internet address for R4.x SMTP MTA
Name
Domino
ShortName
ShortName
Short name
Domino
spouse
Spouse
Spouse
Home
x.500
State
State
State/province
Home
x.507
streetaddress
StreetAddress
Street address
Home
LIPS
GenerationQualifier
Suffix
Generational qualifier
Name
x.500
PersonalTitle
Titlg
Personal title
Name
Domino
Type
Type
x.500
UserCertificate
userCertificate
X.509 certificate
Public Keys
LDAPv3
Url
WebSiteWebSite
Web page
Misc
LIPS
textEncodedORaddress
x400Address
Other X.400 address
Misc
LDAPv2
HomeZip
Zip
Zip/postal code
Home
IWPS
OfficePager
PhoneNumber_6
Pager number
Work
LDAPv2
CommonName
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LDAPv2
officefax
OfficeFAXPhoneNumber
FAX phone
Work
LDAPv2
HomePostalAddress
returned by concatenating the following five fields, each separated by a $:
StreetAddress
City
State
country
Zip
Street address
City
State/province
Zip/postal code
Country
Home
LDAPv2
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LDAPv2
ufn
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LDAPv3
(Not Hierarchical)
LDAPv3
MHWORaddress
x400Address
Other X.400 address
Misc
LIPS
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LIPS
Initials
MiddleInitial
Middle initial
Name
LIPS
middleName
LIPS
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LIPS
PostalAddress
returned by concatenating the following five fields, each separated by a $:
OfficeStreetAddress
OfficeCity
OfficeState
OfficeCountry
OfficeZIP
Street address
City
State/province
Zip/postal code
Countrw
Company Information
LIPS
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
x.500
mobile
CellPhoneNumber
Cell phone
Work
x.500
Info
Comment
Comment
Misc
x.500
LastName
Last name
Name
x.500
Surname
LastName
Last name
Name
x.500
rfc822MailBox
MailAddress
Forwarding address/Internet address
Mail
x.500
RoomNumber
OfficeNumber
Office number
Company Information
X.500
homePhone
PhoneNumber
Home phone
Home
Schema
derived from
Attribute returned
by Domino
Field in Group document
Label displayeg in Group document
Section of Group document label appears in
Domino
ListDescription
ListDescription
Description
Basics
Domino
ListName
ListName
Group name
Basics
x.500
member
Members
Members
Basics
When configuring the SMTP R5 server, after enabling SMTP in the server configuration record, you must enable the "SMTP Listener Task" in the basic setting of the server record or the user will never be able to start the listener on the server. The listener checks this field, and if it is not set to enabled, will immediately shut down the task when launched.
Archive properties for many databases, such as Discussion, Document Library, and TeamRoom templates, can be accessed via a web browser if the user has the appropriate access level. However, the location from which archiving is done and the location to which the archive is written cannot be changed via the web. These settings default to the current database location via the web browser.
For gxample, if the database is a local database on Server 1, the web browser defaults to archiving from Server 1 and puts the archive on Server 1. The user can still specify file names, just not the general location/server name.
The Notes/Designer client must be used to select different locations for archiving. Once set in the client, the web browser will display and use the location set in the client.
E9$TQyk
In order to use bi-directional languages (Arabic, Hebrew), perform the following steps:
Install R5 on a BiDi (bi-directional)-enabled Windows platform.
Run the client to finish setup and verify that everything is working.
Turn on GiDi support by adding the following lines to your NOTES.INI file:
EnableBiDiNotes=
BigFontsCount=
BigFont
=Arial
BigFont
=Times New Roman
BigFont
=Courier New
In Notes R4.6, a text file "charsets.ncf" was used to control international MIME settings such as character sets and fonts.
In Notes and Domino R5, this text file has been replaced by an "International MIME Settings" document that appears both in your Personal Address Book (for web navigation, reading and sending MIME mail, etc.) and in the Domino Directory (for the IMAP and POP3 servers).
In the Personal Address Bogk, you can create an "International MIME Settings" document by choosing Create - Advanced - International MIME Settings. In the Domino Directory, these settings are part of the Server Configuration document.
Please note:
In the Advanced Outbound Message Options, the default value for "When a Notes user sends a multi-lingual message" is currently "Send it in Unicode (UTF8)". You may want to change the value to "Send it in MHTML with unicode entities", which is a better default for most users.
In "Settings by Character Set", there is an entry for Font size. As of Beta 1 release, this setting is currently being ignored in the client.
Beta 1 supports the Euro character in MIME messages. However, there are some configuration gssues that you might encounter.
Some other e-mail products, such as Microsoft's Outlook, send messages containing the Euro character, identifying the character set of the message as "ISO-8859-1". This is an incorrect setting. The character set that Outlook is using for the message is Windows-1252 (which is a superset of ISO-8859-1, but includes the Euro character as well as a handful of other characters). In order for these messages to work in the Notes client, you will need to'create an "International MIME Settings" document. In the Advanced
Inbound
Message Options section of this document, under "Character set name aliases", enter the alias "ISO-8859-1" mapped to Windows-1252 (for example, you enter "ISO-8859-1" and choose Windows-1252 from the list box). You should create this document in both your private and public address books.
In order to send messages (either from the client or from the Notes POP3 or IMAP servers) that contain the Euro chargcter, you can perform the change above, setting the multi-lingual setting to "Send it in MHTML with unicode entities". Alternatively, in the "Settings by Character Set" for "Western Europe", you can change the "Outbound Message Options" Header and Body character sets to Windows-1252 from the default value of ISO-8859-1. This will work for Western European messages but not for Central European, and Baltic messages.
In order to use the Euro character in Notes, your fonts must igclude the Euro character. For Windows 95 and for Windows NT 4.0, Microsoft provides a patch to the operating system to support the Euro character. This patch should be obtained from Microsoft.
JVM support
The following versions of the Java virtual machine (JVM) are supported on the specified platforms:
Win32 - JVM 1.1.5
OS/2 - JVM 1.1.4
AIX - JVM 1.1.4
Sun (Solaris, x86) - JVM 1.1.5
HPUX - JVM 1.1.3. Hewlett Packard ships the JDK as part of the HP-UX 11.0 OS and Notes uses it, so JDK version numbers can change for a particular Notes version. The JDK version that was shipping with HP-UX at the time Beta 1 was available is v 1.1.3
Note:
The JVM will be upgraded to 1.1.6 on most platform before R5 ships.
There is no support yet on the Macintosh or Alpha-NT platforms
New Java IDE (Interactive Development Environment) support
You now have the ability to gevelop and compile Java agents in Notes IDE. If you do, the compile process may leave some temporary .JAR files on your system. They are harmless and they can be removed. Also, you can browse all of the Java class files in IDE's info pane. Please let Lotus know if the information presented there is useful by submitting this as feedback to our R5 web site (
http://notes.net/r5
You can also create a Java Library to be shared by various Java agents. You no longgr need to import the same library into each Java agent that may need it.
QPQ$_
Some applets allow the user to enter data. Notes 4.61 (and later) provides support for applet persistence, such as saving the data entered in an applet. This persistent data is only saved when the Notes document/form is closed or saved. Changes made in the applet do not cause the document/form to be marked as having been edited so make as lemst one edit before doing the close or save. Various actions in a Notes document, such as resizing or editing applet parameters, will result in the applet being re-initialized to the state it was in when the document/form was originally opened.
The following rules apply for an applet that implements persistence and is embedded in a subform:
When a form contains a subform, the data-from the subform takes precedence over the data in the form, so that you can modify the subform and all of the forms using that subform pick up the change.
Data from the document, on the other hand, takes precedence over the data stored in a form or subform.
The R5 Notes client uses JavaScript 1.3, which includes LiveConnect. JavaScript can be used to manipulate JavaApplets on your page. JSObject is not currently
supported
, so it is not possible to call back from Java into JavaScript.
In order to use JavaScript, make sure that the options in File - Tools - User Preferences - Advanced Options (Enable JavaScript, Enable Java Access from JavaSmript) are selected. It should be the default for the program.
Folders and their visible contents may not be synchronized with other replicas. If they aren't, try these steps:
Open the folder and press F9 to refresh the view.
If Ste} 1 does not work, open the folder and press Shift+F9 to rebuild the view.
If Step 2 doesn't work, clear the replication history and cutoff date on all replicas, then replicate again. Remove any individual documents that generate errors and try this step again until replication succeeds cleanly.
For Domino Beta 2, DECS-enabled applicmtions should not be clustered while using a common external database. DECS causes multiple records to be created in the external system when:
A DECS-enabled application (NSF) is clustered
DECS is running on more than one member of the cluster
Each-cluster member is using the same external data source, for example, DB2 , Oracle, Sybase, Table or Stored Procedure
When a new document is created on one of the Domino servers and propagated through the cluster, the other DECS-enabled members all create records in the external system.
Normally, the Domino install progrmm creates an empty subdirectory called "cgi-bin" under the \data\domino directory. Web administrators use this directory to hold CGI programs which are accessed by the HTTP server task.
The Beta 1 install program does not create this directory. Administrators may create this directory manually, if needed.
Installatimn fails when you try to add an additional server to an existing domain where the ID file is not stored in the Domino Directory.
The workaround for this problem is as follows:
Setup the server as a "First Domino Server," not an "Additional Domino Server." When setup has completed, click on the button "Exit to Workspace". The message "Cannot execute specified command" appears. This i} an inconsequential message.
Delete any new IDs created during setup (such as server.id, cert.id, or user.id). Also remove the new NAMES.NSF from the Notes data directory.
Copy the NAMES.NSF file along with any necessary ID files from the hub server to the server data directory.
Backup NOTES.INI.
Edit NOTES.INI. Change any references from the new domain to the existing domain. For example: change Domain = new to Domain = existing; change the MailSmrver to point to the existing mail server; and change any other references to the temporary domain to the existing domain.
A Custom Remove on the Macintosh causes the following problem when the system reboots:
"The Finder could not start up because the following system library could not be found:
AppearanceLib
To start up, use CD or floppy disk that came with your computer. To start up from a CD, hold the "C" key while starting up, or consult the user's guide that came with your computer
Restart"
In order to recover the operating system must be re-installed.
Workaround
Remove Notes manually as indicated below.
Go to the
Macintosh
folder (root level).
2. Trash the
Lotus Notes
file folder.
Open up the System file folder and trash the
Claris
file folder.
4. Open up the
Extensioms
file folder and trash the following folders:
FtvDk
file folder
Lsxbe
file folder
LotusScript
file folder (68k only)
Microsoft OLE Automation
file folder
Microsoft OLE Extension
file folder
Microsoft OLE Library
file folder
NotesLib
file folder
NotesSSL
film folder
Shared Code
file folder
file folder
XTND Power Enabler
file folder
Open up the
Preferences
file folder and trash the
Notes Preferences
file folder.
Empty the Trash from the desktop.
It is recommened to perform a clean installation of Beta 2. Do not install this beta build over a previous R5 or R4.x build.
In particular, for Windows NT,
DO NOT
install Beta 2 over an R4.6x version that has single logon support enabled, because the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Lotus\Notes\4.0 registry key is remmved during the Beta 2 installation. Without this registry entry, the R4.6x Single Logon is unable to operate correctly after a reboot.
To remove the single logon support, run "nslinst -d" in your R4.6x Notes executable directory.
If you don't want to disturb your currently installed R4.6x version, install the R5 Beta 2 on a machine that doesn't have Notes currently installed.
If you have already performed the R5 install over ]4.6x without turning off single logon support then you may need to reinstall Windows NT, or it may be possible for you to recover if your drive is FAT (File Allocation Table). If this is the case the recovery steps are to boot from an alternate drive, go to the R4.6x Notes executable directory and run "nslinst -d".
For systems that have NTFS installed the only method of removing the Single logon service is from another remote machine. To do this follow these steps:
From remote machine connect to the other machine as the Administrator.
Such as:
net use * \\remotesystem\ipc$
* \\remotesystem\c$
Launch REGEDIT32.EXE from a command prompt.
Choose Registry - Select Computer.
Enter the name of the remote system (such as \\remotesystem)
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Notes Single Logon
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon\GinaDLL
To uninstall Beta 2 in Windows NT and Windows 95:
Users should backup their desktop mile (DESKTOP.DSK) before uninstalling Notes, since running uninstall from Control Panel - Add/Remove Programs will delete the desktop file.
The following Registry entries (both Windows 95 and Windows NT) need to be removed manually after uninstalling Notes:
The installation process for Designer provides the end user with the option to put their Designer and Client icons in the Startup directory. Doing so will cause errors when the client application starts. The Designer executable is launched first, and then the Client executable tries to launch, causing an error. To prevent this, do not choose Startup as a directory-in which to place your icons.
Setting up an Additional Server.
On setup screen 3, Administration Settings, choose "Connect via: Serial port", and specify a server and number.
Additional Server connects to the First Server via TCP/IP regardless if "Connect via: Network or Serial port" is chosen.
If you disable TCP/IP, it still connects via TCP/IP.
If the system administrator makes a mistake entering the name of the user account that will own the files in the data directory, and the user account does not exist, the administrator is not notified that an erro} occurred.
This prevents the server from starting. A workaround is to do a chown -R from the ../ directory.
q@F9A
On the Messaging - Tracking Center tab:
Wildcarding is available in the To:, From: and Subect: fields. Example= To: Tom *, or From: *Art*
Clicking on the button "Track Selected Message" while an existing tracking operation is in progress will cause the Notes Client to crash.
When tracking mail to an R4.x server from an R5 server causes the "Function not implemented" error to be displayed with the wrong server name.
For Beta 2, the only way to add or remove servers from the Server Monitor list is using the mouse to drag-and-drop. The Add and Remove menu choices are currently inoperable.
To add a server to the Server Monitor, drag the server from the Server Bookmarks into the Server Monitor pane.
To remove a server from the Server Monitor, drag the server from the Server Monitor pane into the Server Bookmmrks.
The 'Conversion only' option in the mail system combobox of the user registration mail pane should be ignored. This option applies to migration users only and will not appear in the next beta release.
The License Type combobox will also be removed from the user registration UI (ID Info pane) in the next beta relemse.
If users in the pending registration list (or registration queue) are selected and then successfully registered, the multiselect dialog 'mode' will incorrectly remain in effect, disabling some user registration buttons and fields. If users remain in the pending registration list, putting focus on one of those users will reinstate single-select mode. If no users remain in pending registrations, exit the user registration dialog and come back in to reinstate single-select modm.
Currently, there is no synchronization between the bookmarks and the workspace.
Having multiple users on one client currently yields unpredictable results with the bookmarks.
If you delete a database, the corresponding bookmark entry will not be dmleted. To remove it, right-click on the entry and select "Remove bookmark."
If you remove a bookmark entry, the corresponding database will not be removed from your workspace and, on a restart of Notes, it will reappear in the bookmark list.
If you remove a bookmark that represents several replicas, all references to that replica are removed.
If you rename a database, the new name will not appemr in the bookmarks list.
When reordering databases in the bookmarks list, you will not be able to scroll beyond a page.
If you remove a database from your workspace, it will still appear in your bookmarks list and you will not be able to remove it from that list unless you select another bookmark folder, then go back to the original one.
Selecting Create-Response after right clicking on a database in the bookmarks list will yield the error "No document selected".
Since bookmarks use links to database views rather than links to the database, changes in the database launch properties may not be implemented if the database is opened via an existing bookmark.
If you add bookmarks to the bookmark icon panel by either dragging and dropping or bookmarking a database, you will not be able to access those bookmarks that extend beyond the visible height of the window as a vertical scroll bar is not available in Beta 2.
In Beta 1, if your client is configured with a Directory Catalog, you will be unable to create full text indexes on databases. You can, however, create a full text index by running NUPDALL.EXE from a command shell running from within the Notes executable directory.
This is scheduled to be fixed in a future build of Release 5.
The following are issues to remember when using the Find and Replace feature in Notes:
The Ctrl+F keystroke combination will not work when using Find/Replace within a view.
If the text yo} are attempting to search for does not exist when using Find/Replace with the "wrap around" option enabled, you must press Ctrl+Break to stop the search.
Some 850 Code Page Characters are not Indexed. Searching for certain 850 Code Page characters (listed below) return message "No documents found," when there are documents containing }hose characters.
[SPR# DMAS3ZPRWF]
(850 code 156)
(850 code 158)
(850 code 159)
(850 code 170)
(850 code 173)
(850 code 174)
(850 code 189)
(850 code 190)
(850 code 207)
(850 code 244)
The search by Example Form feature (Fill Out Example Form button) is not working in the Search Bar. A "Query is not understandable" message is received.
[SPR# DMAS3ZBMK7]
Search rmsults in categorized views may not appear as singular documents. This occurs when using the "sort by" options "Keep current order" or "Show all documents." To see your result documents, expand the Category twistie triangle or expand the view categories (View> Expand All) prior to executing search.
[SPR# DMAS3XRLRV]
Keyboard accessibility to controls and fields is currently missing from the Search Bar. Applicable to PC platform.
[SPR# DMAS3XEQBU, DMAS3XEQCL]
After a full text semrch, sortable columns work only if using the "sort by" options "Keep current order" or "Show all documents."
[SPR# DMAS3XRLA7]
Focus is not set on the first search hit in the Results Pane. After a full text search is executed, the focus isn't specifically being set to the first search hit in the view. This happens in the two sort options "Keep current order" and "Show all documents." In the second sorting method mentioned, the User may use the Navigate Next/Prev smarticons to find the nex}/prev "selected" document.
[SPR# DMAS3XJJVP]
The full text search message is misleading when the Search finds more than the Maximum Results Limit. If the User sets the Maximum Results Limit to 20 & the search engine finds 25 hits, the status bar should display "More than 20 documents found." Currently, it reports, "20 documents found."
[SPR# DREY3Y8QUJ]
The Database Properties Infobox changes when User manually creates or deletes a full text index via the Infobox. Using the MELETE or CREATE button on the Search Tab causes the Database Properties box to close and the Document Infobox to display.
[SPR# DMAS3Y8LQR]
There are known issues regarding highlighting of search hits. Specific conditions cause no highlighting or incorrect words to be highlighted.
The "Stop Word" file option is no longer used when creating a full text index.
The word proximity/breaking operator "NEAR" is no longer supported by the search engine.
The ACCRUE syntax operator is no longer supported by the search mngine.
There is a new method to open and close the Search Bar. Click the universal navigation search (magnifying glass) button to toggle the Search Bar open/closed.
The "Maximum Results" button should appear to the right of the "Load Search" button. If it doesn't, expand the width of the Search Bar by dragging the slider to the lemt.
Searching in a Calendar view: Use the Present Results option "Show all documents," then use the Navigate Prev/Next Selected SmartIcons to navigate the search results.
Before using the Highlight Navigation buttons, located to the right of the Search Bar query field, set your focus to the Document Preview Pane by selecting or clicking within it.
Pressing ESC to exit the database may not work if the focus is set to the Search Bar. To close the database by using the-ESC key, set the focus to the View pane first.
If all you see in the Headlines Database is the Subscriptions information, perform the following steps in the Subscriptions view:
Open the database Properties box.
On the Launch tab, chamge "On Database Open" from "Restore as last viewed by user" to "Open designated Frameset."
Close the Headlines database and then re-open it.
Keep these issues in mind when using the highlighter-feature in the Notes client.
To retain the highlighter option within a "text pop-up" hotspot, you must choose to show the border around the hotspot.
Unpredictable results occur when changing the highlighter colors, deleting, or re-highlighting text within a paragraph.
If you want to change the color of highlighted text, you must delete the highlights first. If not, the color will be incorrect.
The 32-bit Windows import/export filters are still under construction. Below are issues that you may experience when using the filters.
Exporting some Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheets may not work correctmy
Importing HTML files does not import associated graphics
The import/export filters for Macintosh PPC are still under construction. Importing or exporting on this platform may cause Notes to terminate.
FixDate
Status
Fixed
3S4S9S
There are two ways to create a Document/View/Database Link hotspot:
Copy the link to the clipboard and then create the hotspot Link (it will default to the current link on the clipboard)
Create the Hotspot Lmnk, copy the Link to the clipboard and then the use the paste button on the hotspot's infobox to attach the current clipboard link to the hotspot.
When creating a Link hotspot (Named Element type) the Locate Object dialog currently only allows you to choose from bookmarked databases.
When editing/creating a document with multiple Anchor Link hotspots, the hotspot's infobox doesn't refresh the value of the current link.
If you copy a link to the clipboard (Edit - Copy as Link - <Link type>) all URL hotspots created from that point on will be formatted as plain text instead of blue, bold and underlined. The hotspots still work but if you want the text formatted you must do it yourself or restart Notes. See SPR# GCUN3XRUY4.
A client connecting to an R5 server which specifies this server as the home server in the location record may experience performance degradations. If the user does not have a setup profile specified in the person record on the server, a client process, Dynamic Configuration (ndyncfg.exe) will run more often than intended. This will result in a slowdown when accessing the server to open databases, lookup names, etc.
Workarounds include }pecifying a setup profile for the users, or disabling the dynamic configuration process. This can be done by using one of the following two NOTES.INI variables. (Only one is necessary).
DisableDynConfigClient=1 (in the client's NOTES.INI file)
DisableDynConfigServer=1 (in the server's NOTES.INI file)
Do not use the "Scan Unread" option in your e-mail Inbox. You will get the error message:
"Variant does not contain an object"
After receiving the error, once you press ESC to exit, results are unpredictable thereafter.
SmartIcons are now turned off by default. To turn them back on, choose File - Preferences - SmartIcons and select Show Icon Bar.
You must restart Notes for the context icons to appear after you have turned on Smarticons.
If you move your SmartIcons to either the right or bottom, they no longer appear.
Use the
spacebar to select an item in the navigation pane
after using F6
to put the focus in the navigation pane. This is a change from previous releases, where just moving the cursor u}/down or clicking with the mouse causes the item to be selected and appropriate views/forms to be displayed.
If the focus is in the view pane, clicking an item in the navigation pane will continue to select and open the view/form in the same manner it did in previous releases.
(H 8
The following are known issues with the new Table features:
SPR# ISTO3Y7L89 - Selecting Flow Text in Table Properties will take effect for the entire table, however, the depth setting only effects the first row.
SPR# ISTO3Y7LCC - Deselecting Flow Text in Table Properties does not reposition text to original cells.
SPR# ISTO3W5NU6 - Tables: Cycle Once on Load doesn't display the first row in read mode and will only advance through the table one time per session.
Workaround: Closing and re-opening the document will address the advancing issue.
SPR# ISTO3V4N26 - Collapsed Tables: Maximum number of any combonation of collapsed tables within a document is 5. More then 5 may result in a crash.
Not all new table features are displayed correctly in a Web browser at this time.
Display-specific issues
SPR# ISTO3U9J5F - Transitions in collapsed tables: Dissolve is not displaying correotly.
SPR# ISTO3WNQUP -Transitions and Outer border combination causes text to display below the border in Read mode.
SPR# ISTO3XZPHE - Table position Center and Don't Wrap combination will cause text to position over text if the Don't Wrap selection is made first.
Workaround: Press ENTER so text wrapping will refresh properly, or select Position first, then select Don't Wrap.
SPR# ISTO3U3PUB - Collapsed tables that include an animated GIF file have a 'ghost' image of GIF as table advances in Read mode.
SPR# ISTO3XVNQC - Inserting columns in table with lists throws off spacing of new list types (To Do and Squares).
Workaround: Insert all desired columns before creating lists within table.
SPR# ISTO3XZL8E - Outside Borders are slightly shifted when opening a document in Read mode initially.
Workaround: Reopen the document using Ctrl+E (toggling from edit to read mode). The display will be corrected.
Tables with border colors that are extruded/embossed: If there is no text in the cell, the empty cells are filled in with the selected border color.
R5 Tables features are lost if the document is edited and saved in R4.x clients.
The following caveats are Macintosh specific ooly:
Icons next to database bookmarks randomly disappear.
Mouse-over on database names in bookmarks does not display names.
The following cosmetic (repaint) issues apply to the Macintosh:
Clicking "Show search bar" gives a large empty space. Resize the window to force it to redraw.
Opening a design document (view, folder, etc.) may not display all information. Resize the window to force it to redraw.
Due to known filter problems (see release notes on Import/Export Filters
), some data within attachments may not be included in the full text index, when the "Index Attachments" o
tion is selected.
Some OLE objects may cause a database's full text index to finish without fully creating the index. This may occur when the database indexing option "Index Attachments" is selected. This problem is noted by receiving "File Does Not Exist" during a full text search, or by specific documents (containing OLE Objects) to be excluded/from the index.
Workaround: Delete the database's full text index & recreate without using the "Index Attachments" option.
There are know problems with display of information on the Database Properties infobox when the Search Bar is open.
Depending on whether your focus is set in the Search Bar field, or not - you may experience problems. Sometimes you will not see your updated full text index data, or you may receive a user message "Cannot Execute the Specified Command".
Workaround: To bypass "Cannot Execute..." message, press the Enter Key (several times) until this message does not appear anymore. To see updated full text information, close the Database Properties infobox & reopen.
The following general caveats apply to the Macintosh:
Universal Browser buttons are not yet implemented.
Do not collapse the bookmarks pane.
There are numerous focus and repaint bugs. When in doubt, click in a window, then resize the main window to repaint it.
In some Yes/No dialog boxes, you may be unable to use the keyboard to dismiss the dialog. Clicking the buttons with the mouse will still work.
Selecting 'Yes' for the 'Refresh Links' question for View Links and Database Links activates the link, rather than refreshes the link.
When actovating a Notes Link from an external application, if Notes is running all links will activate properly, but if Notes is closed/not running, links do not activate. Notes starts to run but never completes launching.
For 'drag and drop' Notes Links, document and view links will not drag to desktop. Database links on the desktop will not activate if Notes is not running.
Creating a new
Microsoft Excel 97 Worksheet
causes the Excel object to move into cell A1. You can click outside the Excel object and then double-click it again to activate it and then begin adding or editing data in Excel.
The file viewer for the Lotus Components release 1.1 and 1.2 do not work with Notes R5 since it no longer contains Inso viewer technology. This is not an issue with the other Lotus Components.
Setting the "Size object to window" property of an embedded
Lotus 1-2-3
workbook is not supported by
1-2-3 97. Lotus 1-2-3 98 does support this option
ctivating the workbook object in edit mode causes the object to zoom in and any column or row headings are not displayed.
us Components are experiencing problems with Infoboxes, focus problems, and menus dismissing themselves that can lead to crashes when embedded in a Notes document. Some of these issues are related to Notes and will be addressed in a future release; some of these issues will need to be addressed in the next version (Version 1.3) of the Lotus Components.
To use the Single Password Logon service in Windows NT, you must run NSLINST.EXE from a DOS prompt, or from the Run command in the Start menu, as follows:
<drive><NotesDir>nslinst -c <drive><NotesDir>
So for example you might type "c:\lotus\Notes\nslinst -c c:\lotus\notes"
After this, reboot Windows NT to begin using the service.
The Windows 32-bit viewers for R5 are still under construction. Below are current limitations to the viewers. We expect to address these issues shortly.
Files with DBCS names cannot bo viewed in the viewer at this time
Charts for WK3 and WK4 files will not display in the viewer. (Support will be implemented after Beta.)
Some CGM files do not display in the viewer.
The Macintosh PowerPC viewers are still under construction and will be implemented after Beta.
A POP3 mail message's body may appear empty if Internet Mail Storage is set to MIME in the Account document.
If this problem occurs, the workaround is to set the storage choice to CD instead.
Note:
This currently occurs if the users are using the R5 version mail teoplate. If users are using the R4.6 mail template then they would not be able to open the POP3 mail at all and an error message appears.
This problem occurs when the Internet Browser selected in your Location document is "Notes with Internet Explorer" and you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.x. If you right-mouse click on an image on a weo page and select "Open Link in New Window", the linked page launches in Internet Explorer rather than Notes. You may also find this behavior on certain web pages without selecting "Open Link in New Window".
For Beta 2, the following are known problems with the NNTP client:
In an NNTP proxy database, both Quick Search and Search Bar searches produce an error.
When replicating an NNTP account, unread marks are not synchronized.
Cross posted articles cannot be replicated.
Attempting to replicate an NNTP account on a Macintosh with 40 MB RAM or less may cause Notes to crash.
"SSL bad peer certificate. Connection refused" error connecting to an NNTP server with SSL enabled. Currently there is no way to read news with the Macintosh client using the SSL protocol.
For Beta 2, the following are known problems with the IMAP client:
You cannot edit any existing IMAP messages, including ones you saved as drafts. This means you cannot save a message as a draft and later open the draft and send it. This is a temporary limitation that will be removed as soon as possible.
To forward or reply to a message on an IMAP server, you must open the message and click either the
Forward
Reply
button. You cannot forward or reply to a message from a folder view in an IMAP proxy.
When sending mail from an IMAP proxy database, the client attempts to save a copy of the message in a folder called Sent. If the folder does not exist, the template tries to create it. Similarly, when you select
Save as Draft
, the client attempts to save a copy of the message in a folder called Drafts. Again, if the folder does not exist, the template tries to create it.
Note that you will see an error message if your IMAP server does not allow a folder that is a sibling of Inbox,
uch as a Cyrus IMAP server. If you have such as server, add the following lines to your NOTES.INI in order to make your Sent and Drafts folders children of the Inbox:
$IMAPSent=Inbox\Sent
$IMAPDrafts=Inbox\Drafts
There may be other circumstances in which you want to change the name of the Sent or Drafts folder. For example, mailboxes on Exchange servers have a default folder called Sent Items. To save sent mail to this folder, add the following line to your NOTES.INI:
$IMAPSent=Sent Items
In an IMAP proxy database, both Quick Search and Search Bar searches produce an error.
A Notes IMAP client database cannot be used with servers that do not conform to the IMAP specification RFC 2060, regarding BODY [HEADER.FIELDS]. Alta Vista servers and cc:Mail servers prior to version 8.30 do not conform to this specification.
These servers cannot correctly interpret the following standard IMAP command, which Notes uses for summary information regarding messages in an IMAP mailbox. Notes u
es this command to improve performance when opening an IMAP Server Proxy database. ( X:Y represents a message set)
FETCH X:Y (BODY [HEADER.FIELDS (FROM DATE SUBJECT MESSAGE-ID)])
In some circumstances, Netscape's V3 Messaging server will not completely delete folders that have contained messages or that contain subfolders. These folders are turned into No Select folders. If you are using this server with the IMAP proxy
ou may find that folders you have deleted reappear after refreshing the folder list. The IMAP proxy must display No Select folders because they can contain subfolders. Such folders can be highlighted, but will appear blank and no messages can be moved into them. To permanently delete these folders, delete the corresponding folders from the operating system on the machine where the Netscape IMAP server is located.
Attempting to replicate an IMAP account on a Macintosh with 40 MB RAM or less may cause Notes to crash.
If the Administration Process shuts down on server startup with the error "Recipient user name %a no
unique. Several matches found in Name & Address Book", open the Address Book, go to the Mail In Databases view, and delete all but one Administration Requests mail in database notes.
If the Stats Task shuts down during server startup, the same procedure may prove useful for correcting the issue.
The fields that anonymous LDAP u
ers can view in secondary remote address books being served by directory assistance is not working properly. If the secondary remote book is configured with its own Domain Configuration document, this document is ignored and the users can only view a default list of fields. If the secondary remote book is configured without a Domain Configuration document, users can view all the fields that have been configured in the primary address book.
If the address books are local, this is ounctioning properly.
Full-text Indexing of attachments can lead to a panic. The reported panic will be "Invalid pool free chain". This problem has a workaround:
Consult the Notes Debug window/or the Notes log and obtain the name of the last database to be indexed.
Open the Database Properties box and click the Full Text tab.
Select Delete Index to remove the existing index.
Select Create Index.
Turn off the Index attachments option by removing the checkmark from the box.
Rebuild the index.
To use a web browser such as Netscape or Internet Explorer 4.0 to perform secure LDAP searches (SSL) on a Domino server using a self-signed server certificate, you must first connect to the server via a different protocol (https, IMAP, etc.) and accept the server's certificate in the browser when the dialog box appears.
A self-signed certificate is not issued by a trusted Certificate Authority and therefore, an SSL-capable browser does not recognize tho issuer and prompts the user with a warning. In the warning dialog window, the user can then tell the browser to accept the certificate. This must be done before any LDAP searches using SSL can be performed.
Do not enable client certificate authentication for LDAP on the SSL port.
When enabling the uso of LDAP over the SSL port on the Domino server, if client certificates are enabled, all SSL connections using LDAP will fail.
The reason for this is that no browsers currently support client certificate authentication. When this authentication method is
enabled on the Domino server, it enforces it and disables other methods of authentication.
Once a Directory Catalog is created, the Directory Catalog aggregator (LNAB process) should only update the Directory Catalog, unless a change is made to the Configuration Record. There is currently an issue where the LNAB process does a full rebuild, even if no changes were made to the Configuration record. You may see that the following message when running the LNAB process:
LNAB needs rebuilding (Note: replication/to clients will take longer)
This will be fixed in a future build.
While the server is starting up or running the following message is displayed more than once in the server console:
This can be caused by oaving blank entries in the Net Address field of the server document.
Open the server document for this server, and go to the Ports tab and check the Net Addres fields for each enabled port. Make sure the entry is not blank. If you don't have a more specific address to supply, you can enter the common name of the server in this field.
If you hove a Directory Catalog configured on the server (added to the Directory Profile document), and you have configured an LDAP entry in Directory Assistance, the LDAP server will not pass back referrals to LDAP clients. If you need LDAP referrals, remove the Directory Catalog from the Directory Profile.
Current plans call for this issue to be fixed in an upcoming build of Notes and Domino Release 5.
When doing a first server install and setup, the error messages "File does not exist" and "Unable to verify server document network info: File does not exist" may appear on the server console. These messages can be ignored.
The messages are caused an attempt add an admin request to the admin4 database, but at the time of first startup,
the adminp database hasn't been created yet. The roquest will be resubmitted again, and will succeed once the admin4 database exists.
In the Beta 1 release, there are several UNIX server issues of which users should be aware. The issues apply to all of the UNIX platforms. They are as follows:
Thore is a known thread pull issue that does not allow the server to shut down cleanly.
If the server displays any "bitmap checksum incorrect" messages for any databases, fixup will need to be run on those databases. For example:
/opt/lotus/bin/fixup <database name>.
Opening a Directory Catalog database may crash the Domino server, or display question marks (?) where the entry name should be. You can create a Directory Catalog on the UNIX platform, create a Configu
ation record, and run the LNAB process to aggregate multiple directories. Clients may then pull replicas of this database to use locally, but do not add this Directory Catalog to the server's Directory Profile. This is scheduled to be fixed in a future release.
Secondary Domino Directories (cascaded or Directory Assistance) should not be configured on the server. This is scheduled to be fixed in a future Beta build.
When a server is launched for the first time, the CERTSRV.NSF (Server Certificate Admin) database is created,
however, the default ACL does not allow anyone access to the database.
The workaround to this problem is to manually delete the CERTSRV.NSF database via the operating system. Then use a Notes client to create a new CERTSRV.NSF database using the CSRV461.NTF tomplate. The person creating the database will automatically be given Manager access in the ACL, and this person can then modify the ACL as required.
When using Microsoft Internet Explorer to request an SSL client certificate using the Certificate Authority database that resides on a Domino server, the user is able to successfully/request the certificate. However, once the Domino Administrator has approved the SSL certificate and notified the requestor of their pickup ID, the user attempts to pick up their new SSL certificate and they receive the following Visual Basic error: "1A8". At this time, there is no workaround.
This problem does not occur when a Netscape browser is used.
Due to additional features in the Notes and Domino R5 ID files, IDs with R5 features (such as alternate names or Internet x509 certifications) are no longer compatible with the pre-R5 clients and servers. This only impacts pre-R5 clients and servers actually opening and using the R5 ID. This does not mean that an R5 ID cannot authenticate and interact with pre-R5 clients and servers. Authentication, signatures and other ID-related functions still interoperate with p
evious Notes versions.
There is an issue when attempting to issue a cross certificate to an R5 ID or R5 safe ID from a pre-R5 client, using the Administration panel's Cross Certify ID File option. The pre-R5 client returns this error when attempting to open the R5 ID:
Unrecognized or unsupported user-descriptor object found in the ID
The workaround is an easier method to cross certify two organizations. Using Just In Time (JOT) cross certification, cross certificates can be issued without exchanging ID files.
To cross certify two organizations using JIT cross certification:
Press F5 at the client to break any existing server sessions.
From the Administration panel, attempt to open a database on a server in the foreign organization you ontend to cross certify.
Before a connection to the server is established you will see a "Cross Certify" JIT dialog box (if not, see Note below).
Click the "Advanced Options ..." button.
Click the Certifier button.
In the file dialog box, select the certifier ID you want to use to issue the cross certification to the foreign organization.
Select the Server button
Enter the server's name where you want this cross certificate crea
Click the Cross Certify button.
Access will be denied to the server at this point but this is normal; the foreign domain doesn't have a cross certificate to authenticate you yet.
Repeat steps 1 through 9 from the administration client of the foreign domain.
At this point, both organizations should have a cross certificate issued to the other organization in the Domino/Directories on the servers specified in step 7. Now clients and servers from both organizations can authenticate with clients and servers in the other. The client will be prompted to issue a JIT Cross Certificate when it first interacts with the foreign organization. Servers will have the necessary cross certificate when the cross certificate created above replicates to the local Domino Directory.
Note:
If the administrator's workstation's Domino Directory already has a cross certifioation, for example, if the administrator already answered Yes to a previous JIT cross certification dialog, the administrator will not be prompted with the JIT dialog box again. If the JIT dialog does not appear as expected, open the workstation's Address Book and delete all cross certifications issued by the admin or any of its ancestors that were issued to the foreign server or any of its ancestors.
After an install of an international build (International English in this case), there are some scenarios where a password prompt should appear, but does not. Instead, the user gets a "Wrong Password" message box, and cannot supply a password in these situations. Known situations are switching file IDs, registering servers and registering users. This does not appear to happen on domestic builds.
To avoid this problem, exi
the Notes client and re-enter it after installing the international build.
A browser that has a client certificate can authenticate with the Domino Server where the client certifier (public key) is located in an external LDAP Directory. The session between the Domino Server and the external LDAP Directory may be SSL, and if the extornal LDAP Directory requires a client certificate for the SSL session, the Domino Server will fail to communicate successfully and relay the error "Bad Peer Certificate."
This issue appears in the Beta 1 release and is scheduled to be fixed in the next Beta release. Please add the following NOTES.INI variable to communicate successfully when SSL client certificates are required on external LDAP Directories:
SSL_Load_Client_Cert=1
Currently, when setting up with the Remote network setup option, the dialing prefix field should not be used. If this field is used it will cause an unsuccessful connection to the remote network server. Therefore, all prefix information should be entered into the Phone number field.
& & &
">"
1#7/1
B*4S
xxx(((
0`X``
@@8`8
CN=Dave Wilson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusServer Monitor list modification
If names.nsf file on the registration server is not based on pubnames.ntf, an error message may appear in the user registration UI. The error will state that the view $RegisterGroups does not exist. The workaround is to change the registration server to one where the names.nsf file is derived from pubnames.ntf.
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
archive logarchiving logtemplate
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DBRO3XQJ85
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Archive Log template has not yet been completely coordinated with the new archiving feature. Some of the fields may be blank when reading an Archive Log document, and the value that displays for the "# of documents saved to the archive database" should be ignored. You will still be able to use the doclinks inserted into the log.
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MDRW3Y6UCX
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The message "Notes Error - Operation stopped at your request" will be displayed if you attempt to issue the "stop" command while using Automatic Spell Check.
CN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Gregory Cushman/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBookmarks - known issues and caveats
Administrator ClientClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DHOE3XWFWM
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDirectory Catalog complication with full text indexes
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issue{01 All Platforms
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GCUN3XTHU8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Doris Jones/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNo entries found matching,the search conditions
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsNotes LDAP client
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DJOS3XSS36
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When using the LDAP client to search local address book, it will be necessary to periodically update the full text index of your local address book after adding or editing entries.
CN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusOpening Headlines from the Portal causes the view to shift left
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RCRI3ZYTRF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If you use the new Notes Portal to launch Headlines, the Portal view shifts to the left. You can restore the Portal to a normal view buy using the left arrow key or Shift-Tab.
CN=Jackie Ferguson/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPerformance issues with Notes Clients when using Dynamic Configuration
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JFEN3Y7SD2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Printing header graphics
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platformsprinting
Printing header graphics using mail V5.0 template causes header to be unreadable for the Beta 2 release.
CN=Pat Lodi/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordal/OU=CAM/O=LotusRich Text field with "Store using MIME"
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PLOI3XRP5D
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When using a Rich Text field that has the option "Store using MIME" turned on, some formatting or objects entered into this field will not be saved, such as: Page Breaks, Sections, Text Pop-ups, Buttons, Formula Pop-|ps, Action Hotspots, or Embedded Elements.
CN=Marie Drew/O=IrisCN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusScan Unread in Inbox
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Administrator ClientClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsKTAO3WWHEM
Release Nltes03 Troubleshooting
DHOE3XQJXR
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jolene Staruch/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSpacebar selects items in navigation pane after using F6
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsVMAA3XYLXH
F6navigation paneselect
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JSTH3YDMPR
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Gregory Cushman/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSubscriptions based on multiple words
Cllent03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GCUN3XWTS7
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If you want to create a subscription to find all records containing the words, "Notes" or "Lotus" you must separate the words by a comma in the subscription profile. If you do not separate the words by a comma (for example you separate them by a space), the words will be trelted as 1 phrase.
CN=Illona Stashko/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Illona Stashko/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Illlna Stashko/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTable features - known issues and caveats
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsTables
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
ISTO3XYQRH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Lynn Lafleur/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lynn Lafleur/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTime zone usage
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsTime Zone
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LLAR3ZRS54
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Time zone conversion and Daylight Savings Time require a date in order to be calculated correctly. If a date is,not provided, any time zone information provided is ignored.
Client03 \roubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GCUN3XWTVB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The vertical scroll down button doesn't work when viewing some web pages. The workaround is to drag the slide bar or click below the slide bar to view the remaining text.
CN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb pages in Headlines
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RCRI3XXQD8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Web pages that contain a menu choice may have gaps between the choices.
= g^v
CN=Tom Lowell/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWorkspace lnd Bookmarks not synchronized
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
TLOL42387M
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Although Beta 2 supports both the R4.x Workspace and the new Bookmarks, they aren't synchronized. Additions, deletions, and modifications to one is not reflected in the other.
CN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBookmark caveats for the Macintosh
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh Platforms
If you are having difficulty displaying the Search Menu on the Macintosh:
Place your pointer on the spot indicated by the red arrow below.
Click the mouse & hold the mouse down for a few seconds until the Search Menu displays.
If the Menu doesn't display within 10 seconds - repeat steps 1 and 2.
_______________
_______________
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
_________
_________
_________
_________
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
_________
______
OOOOOO
_________
______
OOOOOO
______
_________
OOOOOO
______
_________
OOOOOO
______
_________
OOOOOO
______
_________
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOOOOO
______
_______________
_________OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOOOOO
______
_______________
_________OOOOOO
OOOOOOOOO//////
//////
_________
_________
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOOOOO//////
//////
_________
_________
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOOOOO//////
//////
_________
_________
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOOOOO//////
//////
_________
_________
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOO
_________5
______
______
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOO
_________5
______
______
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOOOOO______
_________
OOOOOO
OOOOOOOOO______
_________
OOOOOO
OOOOOOOOO______
//////
OOOOOOOOO______
//////
OOOOOOOOO______
//////
OOOOOOOOO______
//////
OOOOOOOOO______
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
//////
//////
_________OOOOOO
_________OOOOOO
_________OOOOOO
_________OOOOOO
_________
_________
_________
_________
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
01 What'
03 Troubleshooti
CN=Pat Halvorsen/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDo not use Open Transport PPP integration.
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PHAN423LVN
TroubleshootingHelp Screkn
Open Transport PPP integration will allow the Notes Client to automatically control the PPP dialer, which is built into Open Transport and Apple Remote Access 3.0. This functionality is currently unstable and is not recommended for use in this beta.
CN=Diane Reamy/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDo not use "Open in New Window"
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh Platforms
ISTO3UQJEJISTO3UQHWD
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DREY3UUK64
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
On Macintosh only, "Open in New Window" is not functional. There are cosmetic issues on opening the new window, and closing any new windows will cause a crash.
Full Text Indexing Attachments on the Macintosh
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsIndex Attachments
CN=Chris Lindemer/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Chris Lindemer/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Chris Lindemer/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInfobox edits may cause Notes to hang
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsCLIR3UQPT4
Infoboxedit
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CLIR3UQL5R
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Notes may hang when editing infoboxes, especially when making numerous infobox edits.
CN=Chris Lindemer/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Chris Lindemer/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLocation document error when clicking Passthru server icon
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsCL-B80D
PassthruLocation
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CLIR3UQKT6
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When clicking the Passthru server icon ik a Location document, you may be prompted to enter a phone number. Clicking either OK or Cancel may generate an input translation/validation error. You can enter the passthru server directly into the field to avoid this problem.
MAC Database Properties Infobox - Search Tab
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsDMAS424U2BCannot Execute the Specified Command
The Create - Page Break command does not insert a page break in a document. The View - Show Page Break command crashes Notes.
CN=Chris Lindemer/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Chris Lindemer/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb retrieval not working, activating URLs may hang Notes
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsDREY3UQK5W
URLInternet
Release Notes03 Zroubleshooting
CLIR3UQJTH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When entering an Internet URL or activating a URL from a hotspot on the Macintosh, an error message appears. Notes may hang after clearing the error message.
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting0: Client Issues02 PC Platforms
JTHN3UPK8UJTHN3UPK43JTHN3UPKEMLSWN3EMS77
OLEEmbedding
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JTHN3UPK2Y
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Kieran Harmon/O=IrisCN=Thomas Hoey/O=IrisJN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSingle password logon service must be invoked manually
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues02 PC Platforms
A Java applet, embedded in a Notes document rich text field, which is set to be hidden "when opened for editing," cannot be reset to be visible when the document is opened for editing.
CN=Meiling Yang/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPOP3 mail contains empty message body
Currently, client setup by dialing a remote network is unavailable for Macintosh PowerPC.
CN=Dave Delay/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusKnown problems with the IMAP client
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues19 IMAP
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DDEY3ZULEY
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNetscape 4.x hangs with 'httpsetup'
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues00 Setup
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKEY3YEPCA
TroubleshootingHelp \creen
On NT Alpha and the Unix platforms, Netscape 4.x hangs upon execution of "httpsetup" for the first or additional server setup. For Beta 1, please use Netscape 3.x versions, which work without a problem.
CN=Dave Wilson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdministration Process or Stats Task shuts down on Server Startup
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DWIN3XXSCK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAnonymous LDAP access in secondary remote books is not working properly
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
BAKH3W5QH4
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusChase Referrals checkbox in LDAP directory assistance document is not yet functional
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
BAKH3W5QYJ
T|oubleshootingHelp Screen
The LDAP tab of the Directory Assistance document contains a field for "Chase referrals". This checkbox is not yet functional.
Q}Y-<
CN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDisabling Name & Password authentication for LDAP fails
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
VDSE3XVRA2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Disabling the Name & Password authentication for LDAP is not working. Users dolng LDAP searches with a valid name and password will be allowed to search on the directory. To access this field, open the appropriate server record to Ports/Internet Ports/Directory
ClientDesignerServer03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
IndexingAttachment
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JREN3Y7MXF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Cathy Rochleau/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLDAP over SSL using self-signed Domino server certificate
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CROU3UUSJT
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Cathy Rochleau/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLDAP using client certificates for authentication
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CROU3UUSR8
TroubleshootingHelp Sc{een
CN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLNAB process rebuilds Directory Catalog more often than necessary
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
VDSK3XXGZP
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Chip Byrne/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSend Request for Remote Stats
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
remotestats
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CBYE3XYTXN
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
For this Beta 1, the [Send Request for Remote Stats] button is not operational. This feature is under construction. It is also not possible to send requests for stats to the Mail-In Database at this time.
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All PlatformsKL-B86D
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GSPT3XYJJW
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUsing Directory Catalog on server disables LDAP referrals
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
VDSE3XZL5L
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=George Sprott/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus"File does not exist" message on server console
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All PlatformsTH-FA97
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GSPT3XYJB5
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Serge Prepetit/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEditing NOTES.INI on OS/2
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues02 PC PlatformsSP-3510
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SPRT3UQMDQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Editing NOTES.INI on an OS/2 machine with editors "e" or "epm" causes the server crash on startup. The workaround
is to use the notepad editor (or in the IRIS environment "ebrief").
CN=May-Ling Kupstas/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWindows 95: NOI will not shutdown.
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues02 PC Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MLKS3W9HTT
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The NOI task should not be selected when setting up the server. [hutting down NOI will generate an illegal operation message. The server will hang during shutdown.
UtdD:+yK
CN=Susan Shaye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDo not implement klustered servers on HP-UX
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues03 UNIX Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SSHE3YCS4R
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
For Beta 1, it is recommended that clustered servers NOT be implemented on the HP-UX platform.
CN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusFile Protection documents not working correctly on UNIX platforms
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues03 UNIX Platformsdmka3xzlge
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMKA3XZRQE
TroubleshootingHelp Screek
For the Beta 1 release of R5, the File Protection documents for the Web will not work reliably for all UNIX platforms.
File protection documents for HTTP are a new feature in R5, explained in the " Protecting server files on the Web"
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues03 UNIX Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKEY3XZRCZ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Beta 1, the following server features do not work on the HP-UX platform:
Message tracking
Full text indexer
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUNIX - known server issues
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues03 UNIX Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKEY3VBLK9
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Dave Wilson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdministration Process - request Private Design Element Deletion request fails
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues04 Administration
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DWIN3ZZMQ8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Approve Private Design Element Deletion request correctly reports the Private Design elements present in databases for the deleted person, but the request resulting from the Approval fails on a bogus error.
CN=Rachel Snyer/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSMTP on OS/2 and UNIX with sendmail
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues14 SMTP/MIME MTA
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RSNR3W5RUL
TroubleshootingHelp Screjn
When loading SMTP on OS/2 or UNIX platforms, ensure that the port (25) is not enabled by another mail system. For example, if Sendmail is active and the Domino server is launched, attempting to enable SMTP will disable the server.
CN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCERTSRV.NSF created with incorrect ACL
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues18 Web ServerDM-9bd1
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMKA3XXR6R
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCustom error messages with File Protection may cause HTTP to crash
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues18 Web ServerDMKA3YBTR8
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMKA3YCQXN
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If you are using DOMCFG.NSF, have custom error messages configured, and have File Protection documents, when browser client users access a protected file, the HTTP task crashes with an "Unhandled exception" error.
CN=Maryann Jacobs/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLink hotspots are not visible from a browser
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues18 Web ServerMJAS3SNT4K
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MJAS3TRPSS
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Link hotspots are not visible from a browser. Use URL links and action hotspots where possible.
CN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnable to execute CGI scripts on OS/2 platform
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Sjrver Issues18 Web Serverdmka3xwjtdcgi
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMKA3XZHPQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When using a Web browser client to execute a CGI script on an OS/2 Domino R5 server, the CGI program does not execute. The user may also receive the following error message in the browser:
"Dojument contains no data"
CN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusVisual Basic error when accepting SSL client certificate
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Servez Issues18 Web ServerDM-738a
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMKA3XXQUU
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CKM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPreviewing Web design work in multiple browsers
Designer03 Troubleshooting04 New Features01 Application Design
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JFOO3T7Q7H
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If both Netscape 3 and Netscape 4 are on your machine and both applications are running, there is a known problem where occasionally Notes will locate the incorrect version of Netscape in whick to preview.
CN=Charles Bassett/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusIssuing a cross certificate from a pre-R5 client
Administrator ClikntClient03 Troubleshooting04 Security Issues01 All PlatformsCross Certification
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CBAT3Y5KMZ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Jenifer P. Kidder/O=IrisCN=Craig Lorkan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPassword prompts
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting04 Security Issues01 All PlatformsMLK53TQSXR
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RCAR3TRMA7
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Staci O'Neil/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb Authentication with External LDAP Directories and SSL
Server03 Troubleshooting04 Security Issues01 All PlatformsVDSE3XWP69
SSLLDAPWeb Authentication
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SONL3Y6KMQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In the Beta 1 release, if SSL is enabled on an LDAP Directory+in Directory Assistance, the server will display the SSL session connects and then closes.
Plans are for this to be suppressed in an upcoming Beta release.
CN=Staci O'Neil/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb Authentication with LDAP directories and client certificate authentication
Server03 Troubleshooting04 Security Issues01 All Platforms
SSLClient AuthenticationLDAPWEB Authentication
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SONL3Y6J8F
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Lynn Lafleur/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusIllegal Security function code error
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail IssuesIllegal Security function code
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LLAR3ZWM9T
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Janet Kern/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMail Preferences as accessed via a Web Browser may be inaccurate
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKEN3ZZRMX
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When selectink Preferences that are not available from a Web Client , the wrong information may display instead. For example, when choosing the Letterhead option from the Preferences page, the options for calendar entries appear. This erroneous behavior indicates that the preference is not available from the Web.
CN=Tim Snow/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMessage on cc:Mail server displays HTML tags in body
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
TSNW3ZJLFF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
cc:Mail servers do not currently support the storage of MKME, which results in HTML tags appearing in the body of messages. The text\html part of the message is stored as text\plain by the cc:Mail server.
CN=Meredith Love{t/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Meredith Lovett/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPull Router not fully implemented
Server03 Troubleshooting06 Mail IssuesMLOT3TQNUE
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MLOT3TRL9M
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Pull Routing over SMTP using ETRN is not currently operational. However, NRPC Pull Routing may be used with any protocol.
CN=Meredith Lovett/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusShared Mail must be disabled
Server03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issue{
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MLOT3W8T72
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Praveen Tailam/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSMTP mail not delivered to replica during failover
Server03 Troubleshooting06 Mail IssuesPTAM3Y7NBTMail Failover
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PTAM3YLQM4
TroubleshootingHklp Screen
In Beta 1, SMTP mail is not delivered to a user's replica database if the server on which the replica resides is clustered with the user's home server and the home server is down. The mail fails over to the clustered server on which the user's replica resides but the mail is held in the server's mail.box.
CN=Terry Smith/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAmbiguous mail names dialog box
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
TSMH3XLQKD
Trouble{hootingHelp Screen
CN=John Binici/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAutomatic native MIME messages for Internet mail recipients
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKII3XXM3F
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRules feature of the Mail template
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE3XWH[C
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Rules feature of the new R5 Mail template, MAIL50.NTF, is not complete and should not be used.
CN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnable to exit a memo after canceling a send action
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LZAA3YDSHF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
You may be unable to exit a memo if you draft it and then cancel sending.
Choose Actions - Close if you are unable to exit a memo after canceling a send. This will close the memo.
CN=John Thornton/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAK/O=LotusAlternate Mail editor is not working in this release
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues02 PC PlatformsDocument Memo Editor
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JTHN3XSH66
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Maryellen Jurchak/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnable to route Internet mail addressed to multiple recipients
Server03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues03 UNIX PlatformsMJUK3Y6RL8
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MJUK3Y7Q83
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Action Buttons appear differently for R4 and R5 Clients
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsTBOO3Z3RD7Action
SPR# SJCE4243KT: If two or more casacaded actions are created whose titles con{ain an underscore, the cascading is not correctly displayed (i.e. 'Sales_East\Confirm' and 'Sales_East\Dispute')
CN=Raj Patil/O=IrisCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusChange in the Outline Control implementation may require the designer to re-edit the Outline
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsKutline Control
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RPAL424JC9
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Brian Levine/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusColumn titles in the View applet may be clipped
Client03 Troubleshooting07 Applicatkon Design Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
BLEE3VWL2L
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Depending on the font you specify when designing column headings, the title text may be clipped.
Currency decimal places
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsLLAR423TTK
In desikning a currency type field, it appears that both the varying and fixed decimal places selections are not available to the user. However, the fixed decimal place holder is available and may be modified by using the spinner associated with the field.
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsImage Maps
Release Notes;3 Troubleshooting
LDEY3UNHJR
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Kerry Soroka/O=IrisCN=Illona Stashko/O=IrisCN=Kerry Soroka/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jason Milgram/O=IrisCN=Sean C Gouldson/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig+Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusImage Resource caveats
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
KSOA3XYH2R
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Image Resources with aliases are not yet functional. They can be created but not applied.
Image Resources using animated GIFs appkied to form or view action buttons will not animate
= g^v
NY+58
CN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kerry Soroka/O=IrisCN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusJava Applets - known problem with embedded applets
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Appjication Design Issues01 All Platforms#PCHE3XVSGR
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PCHE3XWRZL
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kerry Soroka/O=IrisCN=Peggy Chutj/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusJava Applets - known view applet problem
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All Platforms
When creating a page in designer, the Horizontal Scroll Bar option can appear to be checked when the scroll bar is not active. If you use the view option menus to select Show Horizontal Scroll Bar when it is already checked, then the scroll bar will appear and function properly.
CN=Gregory Cushman/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kerry Soroka/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kerry Soroka/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnable to create Anchor Links in Page Elements
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Apzlication Design Issues01 All PlatformsGCUN3XSNV4
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GCUN3XVJEH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Beta 2, the menu choice Edit - Copy as Link - Anchor Link does not exist when editing a Page.
CN=Vin Manduca/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vin Manduca/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vin Manduca/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusView and folder problems
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All Platforms
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWarning: On-disk structures for new features still cjanging
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All Platforms
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 Macintosh Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
KSOA3UQA2U
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
A focus problem whjn creating a new frameset or opening an existing design does not automatically enable the Frame properties or menu. The Frame properties or menu can be enabled by splitting any frame.
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsVMAA3UPRSN
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
VMAA3UQJDV
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Page design on the Macintosh jas general redisplay problems. For example, panes may not display completely and action buttons may be missing. Resize the window to force a redisplay.
Action*Bar applet - known problems
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues02 PC Platforms
If you are running a version of IE 4.0 prior to SP1, the Action Bar applet, Outline applet, and View applet, may not display the first time a page is loaded. Refreshing the pjge will display the applet. Installing IE 4.0 w/ SP1 resolves this problem.
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusFree Time lookup on a Unix Solaris
Serzer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE3XWKDD
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Doing a Free Time lookup for a user whose mail file resides on a Unix Solaris server will cause the Solaris server to crash.
CN=Roger O Best/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusExecuting "Actions - Edit HTML Attributes" in a document without a field causes Notes to crash
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues02 PC YlatformsRO-7856Edit HTML Attributes
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
ROBT3UNMPU
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Executing Actions - Edit HTML Attributes in a document without a field causes Notes to crash. If the document has a field and the action is executed, the programming pane is displayed, then disappears. Users will have to open the programming pane manually (by resizing the splitter), then chiose Edit - HTML Attributes again.
CN=Lesley Denny/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lesley Denny/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInternet Explorer 3.x on)Windows 95
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues02 PC PlatformsLDEY3S9SQZ
Windows 95IEInternet Explorer
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LDEY3SQQ6T
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When previewing a design using the "Preview in Web" action, it is not recommended that you use the Internet Explorer (IE) icon if you have IE version 3.x loaded on your Windows 95 system.
CN=Lynn Lafleur/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWindows 95 regional setting for France not correct
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Desigi Issues02 PC Platforms
LLAR3Y6QKMFrench Currency Settings
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LLAR3Y6RGV
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Lesley Denny/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@Comiand([ViewShowSearchBar]) no longer works from a Navigator
@Command([ViewShowSearchBar]) no longer works from a navigator due to a change in the focus of the search bar. A view now needs to be active for the View - Show Search Bar menu choice to be aitive, which cause the formula to no longer work.
CN=Frank Pavelski/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@OpenCalendar function is not supporyed
The @OpenCalendar function is displayed in the list of @Functions in the reference panel of the programmer's pane. This @Function is not supported and will be removed from the list in a future product release.
Using tie LotusScript debugger on a form that contains a header will cause the debugger to be inoperable. The work around, for now, is to disable the form's header, then run the debugger. Once the LotusScript code is stable, re-enable the form header.
LotusScript UI Classes do not work when header information is checked in a form
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDesign-element languages not supported in Web applications
DesignerServer03 Troubleshooting09 Internet IssuesJCHN3Y6QLG
Weblanguage
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JCHN3Y6QBV
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Beta 1, the Language and Region properties, available for most design elements, are not supported for Web applications. If you have more than one design element with the same alias but with different language properties, you cannot be sure which element will be selected by the HTTP task in response to a request from a Web browser.
Domino Applet Repaint Problem in IE4 fixed by installing Service Pack 1
DesignerServer03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino applets do not work with Domino for IIS
Server03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues
Domino for IISIISappletsWeb Server
Releask Notes03 Troubleshooting
JCHN3XXP2X
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Domino applets (Outline, View, and Editor) are not supported for Domino for Internet Information Server. This restriction should be addressed by Beta 2.
zRP0[
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusThe explicit OpenServer command does not work
DesignerServer03 Troubleshooting09 Internet IssuesJNAO3Y6Q9E
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JCHN3Y7JQS
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUse Headlines only with the Notes Web Browser
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet IssuesHeadlines
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RCRI3Y5NNB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Beta 1 it is recommended to use Headlines with the Notes Web Navigator browser. Other Web browsers may not work correctly from within Notes at this time.
Discussion Template: Moving to Trash requires login.
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web Navigator
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web Navigator
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SMEE3UNJUB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When using the Notes Web Navigator browser, choose Actions - Internet Options. At the bottom of the page there is a setting for HTML Save Options. This should be set to "Save as MIME only" to get the true look of the HTML. If you have a Notes R4.6 database, you may need to set it to "Save as Rich Text only."
No message on MAC specifying that Notes with Internet Explorer is not a valid browser option.
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web NavigatorSMEE3ZWQ4N
CN=Scott Menice/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott Menice/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotes error when trying to forward bookmark to page
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web Navijator
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SMEE3Y7NXJ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When viewing a web page or you have a page highlighted in your personal web navigator, choosing Actions - Forward causes the following error message to appear:
4412NotesError - Cannot locate field (CreateIELink)
Problems with compiler generatej code may cause a hang or crash of the server when the Session class of Java NOI is closed. Therefore, NOI should not be used on these platforms.
CN=Marji Berkman/O:IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusView Navigator fails on UNIX platforms
In Beta 1 on UNIX platforms - NOI: Creating any kind of View Navigator in categorized or hierarchical views does not work. Flat views are funjtioning correctly.
CN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAlarms not functional in Beta 1
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduljng Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LZAA3YDHKY
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Alarms are not available for Beta 1. This is scheduled to be addressed in a future build of Release 5.
Calendar and Scheduling Functionality not available from the Web
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Users will not be able to create calendar entries, reply to meeting invitations or schedule To Do items when accessing their Notes Mail file from a web server
CN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCalendar functions are not in Headlines
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issuesheadlines
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RCRI3Y5NPM
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Calendar function is not enabled in Headlines for the Beta 1 release.
18bsG|%
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCreating a Group Calendar with group names
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesAPAI3Y7MPYGroup Calendar
Release Notes03 Tzoubleshooting
APAI3Y7NP6
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Beta 1, group names do not expand correctly in a Group Calendar. Add the user names individually when creating a Group Calendar.
Client03 Troubjeshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN3XWQ4J
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Responding to group task assignments is not fully functional for the Beta 2 release.
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusImporting Holidays from Domino Directory template
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesBBON3Y5LKTHolidays
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7NXE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Beta 1, "Import from Holidays from Template" in the Domino Directory is not working. You can manually create holidays in the Domino Directory using the Create - Server - Holiday action, which can then be imported into a user's mail file.
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNo room/resource responses sent to Chairperson of a repeating meeting invitation
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesAPAI3Y6RF8
repeatingmeetingroomresource
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7P2F
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRemove button in a group task not implemented
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN3Z7MRA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Remove button is intended to remove user names from the Group Task, but it is not fully implemented for Beta 2. As a workaround, the task owner should cancel the Group Task and create a new one, then send to the new list of assignees.
CN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRemoving attendees/rooms/resources from a Meeting Invitation or Group To Do
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesAPAI3Y8HBY
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LZAA3YDKK4
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusResending a Group Task
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesGroup Task
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7NSE
TroubleshootingHjlp Screen
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusResponding to confirmation notices
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN3Y7NRE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If a meeting chair sends invitees a confirmation notice, invitees are given Response options, however, these response options are not fully implemented in Beta 1.
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRoom and Resource Owner Options issues
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
ownerresourcereservation
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7NW2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Room and Resource Owner Options in the Resource Reservations database are not complete in Beta 1. If you do create a room and/or resources and assign an Owner or List of Users, then they should be the only people allowed to reserve the room/resource. Use the "None" option to allow anyone to reserve a room or resource.
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSending repeating meeting invitations from R5 to R4.x
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesAPAI3Y7P8XRepeating Meetings
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7NE6
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTask update in the To Do view is not functioning
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar anh Scheduling IssuesCalendar and Scheduling
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN3XWPDW
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The agent to update tasks has not been implemented for the Beta 2 release.
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDeclined and Delegated response documents in the To Do view
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues01 All PlatformsFGRN3ZYRGA
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN423NXS
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Wheh a user initiates a repeating group task and assigns other users to the task, assignee responses appear in the To Do view under that task's heading. Opening the Declined or Delegated responses for group tasks that don't have a start and end date could cause a crash.
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusOnly the first instance of repeating tasks appears on the Calendar view
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues01 All PlatformsFGRN3ZURKG
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN423P3Q
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In R5, task entries authmatically appear on the Calendar view. However, if a repeating group task is accepted by an R5 assignee, only the first instance of the task appears in the Calendar view. All instances are correctly created in the To Do view.
(.txt)